Documenti di Didattica
Documenti di Professioni
Documenti di Cultura
MANUAL
Ateca
575012720BD
Inglés 575012720BD (05.17)
Ateca Inglés
(05.17)
SEAT recommends SEAT recommends
SEAT GENUINE OIL Castrol EDGE Professional
About this manual The equipment marked with an aster-
isk* is fitted as standard only in certain
For the sake of the environment
versions, and is only supplied as op- Texts preceded by this symbol contain rele-
This manual contains a description of the vant information concerning environmental
equipment supplied with the vehicle at the tional extras for some versions, or are
protection.
time this manual was published. Some of the only offered in certain countries.
units described herein will not be available ® All registered marks are indicated with
Note
until a later date or are only available in cer- ®. Although the copyright symbol does
tain markets. not appear, it is a copyrighted mark. Texts preceded by this symbol contain additio-
nal information.
Because this is a general manual for the >> The section is continued on the follow-
ATECA, some of the equipment and functions ing page.
that are described in this manual are not in- This manual is divided into six large parts,
cluded in all types or variants of the model; Important warnings on a given page which are:
they may vary or be modified depending on Detailed contents on a given page 1. The essentials
the technical requirements and on the mar- 2. Safety
ket; this is in no way deceptive advertising. General information on a given page
3. Emergencies
The illustrations are intended as a general Emergency information on a given page 4. Operation
guide and may vary from the equipment fitted
in your vehicle in some details. 5. Tips
WARNING
The steering indications (left, right, forward, 6. Technical data
Texts preceded by this symbol contain infor-
reverse) appearing in this manual refer to the mation on safety. They warn you about possi- At the end of this manual, there is a detailed SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to under-
normal driving movements of the vehicle ex- ble dangers of accident or injury. alphabetical index that will help you quickly stand, that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason
cept when otherwise indicated. find the information you require. no right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook.
The audiovisual material only is intended to CAUTION All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error
help users to understand certain car function- or omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print.
Texts with this symbol draw your attention to
alities better. It does not replace the instruc- Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form.
potential sources of damage to your vehicle.
tion manual. Please use the instruction manu-
SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the “Copyright” Act.
al to obtain more comprehensive information
and indications. All rights on changes are reserved.
4
The essentials
Exterior view
Exterior view
7
The essentials
8
The essentials
Centre console
9
The essentials
1 ››› page 19
2 ››› page 158
10
The essentials
1 ››› page 19
2 ››› page 58
3 ››› page 15
4 ››› page 158
11
The essentials
Interior view
13
The essentials
Manual locking of the doors with no A warning appears on the instrument panel
lock cylinder Rear lid display if the rear lid is open or not properly
closed.* An audible warning is also given if it
is opened while the vehicle is moving faster
than 6 km/h (4 mph)*.
14
The essentials
››› Bonnet
in Tailgate automatic lock on
page 136
››› page 15
● The bonnet can be opened. Release the 4 Window on the rear right door
bonnet stay and secure it in the fixture de-
signed for this in the bonnet.
5 Safety switch for deactivating the electric
window buttons in the rear doors.
››› in Introduction on page 138
16
The essentials
Electric adjustment of the driver's Adjusting the head restraints Adjustment of the seat belt
seat*
›››
in Electric driver's seat adjustment*
on page 154
17
The essentials
Seat belt tensioners L/R Turning the knob to the desired posi-
tion, adjust the mirrors on the driver
During a collision, the seat belts on the front side (L, left) and the passenger side (R,
seats and side rear seats1) tighten automati- right) to the direction desired.
cally. Depending on the equipment fitted on
The tensioner can be triggered only once. the vehicle, the mirrors may be heated
according to the outside temperature.
›››
in Service and disposal of belt ten-
sioners on page 81
Folding in mirrors.
›››
Fig. 17 Correct seat belt and head restraint
positions, viewed from front and the side.
››› page 80 in Adjusting the exterior rear view
mirrors on page 153
To adjust the seat belt around your should- ››› page 152
ers, adjust the height of the seats. Adjusting the exterior mirrors
The shoulder part of the seat belt should be
well centred over it, never over the neck. The Adjusting the steering wheel
seat belt lies flat and fits comfortably on the
upper part of the body.
The lap part of the seat belt lies across the
pelvis, never across the stomach. The seat
belt lies flat and fits comfortably on the pel-
vis.
››› page 77
Fig. 18 Detail of the driver door: control for
the exterior mirror.
››› page 79
Adjusting the exterior mirrors: Turn the knob
Fig. 19 Lever in the lower left side of the
steering column.
to the corresponding position:
1) Depending on version/market.
18
The essentials
›››
in Adjusting the steering wheel po-
sition on page 72
the event of a severe frontal collision ››› in ● Insert the key blade into the slot provided
Front airbags on page 83. in the deactivation switch.
Their special design allows the controlled es- ● Approximately ¾ of the length of the key
cape of the propellant gas when an occupant blade remains inserted (the maximum).
puts pressure on the bag. Thus, the head and ● Turn the key blade, changing its position to
chest are protected by the airbag. After the . Do not force it. If you have difficulty, en-
collision, the airbag deflates sufficiently to sure that you have inserted the key as far as
allow visibility. it will go.
● Finally, check the control lamp on the in-
›››
Deactivating the front passenger front in Front passenger front airbag
switch on page 87
The knee airbag is located on the driver side
below the dash panel ››› Fig. 23. Airbags are
airbag identified by the word “AIRBAG”.
››› page 86
The area framed in red (deployment area)
››› Fig. 24 is covered by the knee airbag when
it is deployed. Objects should never be
Knee airbag* placed or mounted in this area.
››› page 83
Side airbags* In conjunction with the seat belts, the side ››› Fig. 27 and are identified with the text
airbag system provides additional protection “AIRBAG”.
for the upper body in the event of a severe
In conjunction with the seat belts, the head-
side collision ››› in Side airbags* on
protection airbag system gives the vehicle
page 83.
occupants additional protection for the head
In a side collision, the side airbags reduce and upper body in the event of a severe side
the risk of injury to passengers to the areas collision ››› in Curtain airbags* on
of the body facing the impact. In addition to page 84.
their normal protection, the seat belts also
hold the passengers in the event of a side
collision; this is how these airbags provide
maximum protection.
››› in Curtain airbags* on page 84
››› page 83
Head-protection airbags*
22
The essentials
Figure ››› Fig. 30 A shows the basic child re- ● In the passenger seat with height adjust- To adjust the passenger seat to accommo-
straint system mounting using lower retain- ment: It is necessary to place the passenger date a child's seat and get the seat belt in a
ing rings and the upper retaining strap. Fig- seat in its rearmost and highest position 1). perfect position, adjust the passenger back-
ure ››› Fig. 30 B shows the child restraint rest as far forward as possible 1).
To correctly use a child seat in the back, the
system mounting using the vehicle seat belt.
front backrest must be adjusted so that there If a semi-universal type chair is to be instal-
The seat belt may be used to secure univer- is no contact with the child seat in the back led, in which the method of attachment to
sal type child seats to the vehicle seats in the case that it goes opposite to the direc- the car is through the seat belt and support
marked with a U in the table below. tion of the car. In the case of front facing re- bracket, it should never be installed in the
straint systems, the front backrest must be central rear seat as the ground clearance is
● In the passenger seat without height ad- adjusted so that there is no contact with the lower than in other places and the support
justment: It is necessary to place the passen- child's feet. bracket will not allow the seat to remain suffi-
ger seat in its rearmost position 1). ciently stable. »
Seating position
Weight group Front passenger seata) Rear side seat Rear central seatb)
Group 0+ to 13 kg X U* U U
Group I 9 to 18 kg X U* U U
Group II 15 to 25 kg X UF* UF UF
X: It is not compatible to install chairs in *: Seats without height adjustment should The systems include the child restraint sys-
this configuration. be placed in their rearmost position. tem mounting with an upper retaining strap
U: Suitable for universal restraint systems Seats with height adjustment should be (Top Tether) and lower anchoring points on
for use in this weight group. placed in their rearmost and highest po- the seat.
sition.
UF: Acceptable for front-facing universal-cat-
egory child restraint systems approved
for this mass group.
››› in Safety instructions on page 89
The body weight permitted and information bel on child seats with “universal” or “semi-
regarding sizes A to F is indicated on the la- universal” certification.
Group 0 to 10 kg E ISO/R1 X X IL X
E ISO/R1 X X IL X
Group 0+ to 13 kg D ISO/R2 X X IL X
C ISO/R3 X X IL X
D ISO/R2 X X IL X
C ISO/R3 X X IL X
B1 ISO/F2X X X IUF/IL X
A ISO/F3 X X IUF/IL X
IUF: Suitable for forward-facing ISOFIX uni- list. This relates to ISOFIX CRSs that can X: ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX
versal child restraint systems approved be for the specific vehicle, restricted or child restraint systems for this weight
for use in this mass group. semi-universal categories. group or size class. »
IL: Suitable for certain ISOFIX child restraint
systems (CRSs) listed in the attached
25
The essentials
26
The essentials
Attachment of the child seat with the Securing the Top Tether* to the an- structions of the chair itself, lift or remove the
Top Tether* retainer straps chorage point head restraint if necessary).
● Slide the strap and secure it properly with
the anchorage of the backrest ››› Fig. 32.
● Firmly tighten the strap following the manu-
facturer's instructions.
Using the Top Tether in rear-facing mounted Securing the retainer strap
seats ● Follow the manufacturer's instructions to
Currently, there are very few rear-facing child deploy the child seat Top Tether retainer
safety seats that have Top Tether. Please strap.
carefully read and follow the seat manufac- ● Place the belt under the head restraint of
turer instructions to learn the proper way to the back seat ››› Fig. 33 (depending on the in-
install the Top Tether strap.
27
The essentials
Starting the vehicle Turning on/switching off the ignition, glow Lights and visibility
plugs reheating
Ignition lock ● Switch ignition on: Turn the key to the 2 Light switch
position.
● Switch ignition off. Turn the key to the 1
position.
● Diesel vehicles : The glow plugs reheat
when the ignition is switched on.
Daylight running
as the steering wheel in the direction indica- Side light on.
ted by the arrow. If it is not possible to turn
the steering wheel, it may be because it is
››› page 176
Dipped beam head-
lights switched on.
Dipped beam
light off switched on.
locked.
28
The essentials
Front fog lights: move the switch to the 2 Left turn signal: Left-hand parking light ● In an emergency
first position, from positions , or . (ignition switched off). ● The vehicle has broken down
Rear fog light: move the switch completely 3 Main beam switched on: Control lamp ● When towing or being towed
from positions , or . lit up on the instrument panel.
Headlight flasher: lit up when the lever is ›››
● Switching off fog lights: Push the switch or
turn it to the position.
4
pushed. Control lamp lit up. in Hazard warning lights on
page 147
›››
Lever all the way down to switch it off.
››› page 146
in Side light and dipped beam head-
light on page 141 ›››
in Turn signal and main beam lever
on page 142
››› page 141 Interior lights
››› page 142
Knob Function
Fig. 36 Turn signal and main beam lever.
Fig. 37 Dash panel: switch for hazard warn- Switches interior lights off.
More the lever to the required position: ing lights.
Switches interior lights on. »
1 Right turn signal: Right-hand parking Switched on, for example:
light (ignition switched off).
● When approaching a traffic jam
29
The essentials
Knob Function Windscreen wipers and window wiper More the lever to the required position:
blade
Door contact switch-on. 2 Slow wipe.
The interior lights come on automati-
Central position
cally when the vehicle is unlocked, a 3 Continuous wipe.
door is opened or the key is removed
or from the ignition. Short wipe. Brief press, short clean. Hold
a) The light goes off a few seconds af- 4 the lever down for more time to increase
ter all the doors are closed, the vehi- the wipe frequency.
cle is locked or the ignition is switch-
ed on. Automatic wipe. The windscreen washer
function is activated by pushing the lever
Turning the reading light on and off
5 forwards, and simultaneously the wind-
screen wipers start.
a) Depending on version.
Interval wipe for rear window. The wiper
Ambient light*: light guide on door panel. Fig. 39 Operating the windscreen wiper and 6 will wipe the window approximately every
Lighting can be selected from 8 possible col- rear wiper. six seconds.
ours via the menu and the SETTINGS func-
The rear window wash function is activa-
tion button. More the lever to the required position: 7 ted by pressing the lever, and the rear
wiper starts simultaneously.
Windscreen wiper off.
0
››› page 149
1
Windscreen wipers interval wipe.
Using the control ››› Fig. 39 A adjust the
interval (vehicles without rain sensor), or
››› page 150
30
The essentials
Easy Connect
CAR menu settings
Fig. 40 Easy Connect: Main menu. Fig. 41 Easy Connect: CAR menu.
To select the settings menus, press the Easy ● Press the system's button, then the Pressing the menu button will always take
Connect button and the SETTINGS func- system's Vehicle function button ››› Fig. 40 or you to the last menu used.
tion button. the system’s button to go to the Vehi-
When the function button check box is activa-
cle menu ››› Fig. 41.
The actual number of menus available and ted , the function is active.
the name of the various options will depend ● Press the SETTINGS function button to open
the menu Vehicle settings menu Any changes made using the settings menus
on the vehicle’s electronics and equipment.
››› Fig. 41. are automatically saved on closing the
● Switch the ignition on. BACK menus.
● To select a function in the menu, press the
● If the Infotainment System is off, switch it desired button.
on.
ESC system –
Deactivating the traction control system (ASR) or selecting the Sport mode of the electronic
stability control (ESC Sport)
››› page 184 »
31
The essentials
Vehicle interior lighting Instrument and control lighting, ambient door lighting, footwell lighting ››› page 149
Vehicle lights
Coming home/Leaving home
Start time for “Coming home” function, start time for “Leaving home” function
››› page 145
function ››› page 146
Motorway light Activation/deactivation ››› page 147
››› page 18,
Mirrors Synchronised regulation, lower the rear-view mirror when reversing, fold in after parking
Mirrors/wind‐ ››› page 152
screen wipers
Windscreen wipers Automatic windscreen wipers, wipe when reversing ››› page 30
Time source, set the time, automatic summer time (DST) setting, select time zone, time for-
Date and time – –
mat, set the date, date format
Service – Chassis number, date of next SEAT service inspection, date of next oil change service ››› page 40
All settings can be reset: driver assistance, parking and manoeuvring, lights, rear view mir-
Factory settings – –
rors and windscreen wipers, opening and closing, multi-function display
33
The essentials
Driver information system ■ MFD from refuelling Using the menus on the instrument
■ MFD total calculation panel
Introduction Assist systems ››› page 37
With the ignition switched on, it is possible Navigation ››› Booklet Navigation system
to read the different functions of the display Audio ››› Booklet Radio or ››› Booklet Naviga-
by scrolling through the menus. tion system
In vehicles with multifunction steering wheel, Telephone ››› Booklet Radio or ››› Book-
the multifunction display can only be operat- let Navigation system
ed with the steering wheel buttons.
Vehicle status ››› page 31
The number of menus displayed on the in-
strument panel will vary according to the ve- WARNING
hicle electronics and equipment. Fig. 42 Windscreen wiper lever: control but-
Any distraction may lead to an accident, with
A specialised workshop will be able to pro- tons.
the risk of injury.
gramme or modify additional functions, ac- ● Do not operate the instrument panel con-
cording to the vehicle equipment. SEAT rec- trols when driving.
ommends visiting a SEAT Official Service.
Some menu options can only be read when
the vehicle is at a standstill.
As long as a priority 1 warning is displayed, it
will not be possible to read the menus
››› page 38. Some warning messages can
be confirmed and made to disappear with the
windscreen wiper lever button or the multi-
function steering wheel button. Fig. 43 Right side of multifunction steering
wheel: control buttons.
The information system also provides the fol-
lowing information and displays (depending The driver information system is controlled
on the vehicle's equipment): with the multifunction steering wheel buttons
Driving data ››› page 36
››› Fig. 43 or with the windscreen wiper lever
■ MFD from departure
››› Fig. 42 (if the vehicle is not equipped with
multifunction steering wheel).
34
The essentials
Enabling the main menu Making changes according to the menu in the Assist systems menu
● Switch the ignition on. ● With the rocker switch on the windscreen ››› page 200.
● If a message or vehicle pictogram appears, wiper lever or the thumbwheel of the multi-
function steering wheel, make the desired Activate or deactivate a driver assistance
press button ››› Fig. 42 1 on the windscreen system
wiper lever or button on the multifunction changes. To increase or decrease the values
steering wheel ››› Fig. 43. more quickly, turn the thumbwheel faster. ● Briefly press the button ››› Fig. 44 in the di-
● Mark or confirm the selection with button rection of the arrow to open the menu As-
● If managed from the windscreen wiper lev-
››› Fig. 42 1on the windscreen wiper lever sist systems.
er: to display the main screen ››› page 35 or
to return to the main menu from another or button on the multifunction steering ● Select the driver assistance system and ac-
menu hold down the rocker button ››› Fig. 42 wheel ››› Fig. 43. tivate or deactivate it ››› page 34. A mark indi-
2 . cates that driver assistance system is switch-
ed on.
● If managed from the multifunction steering
wheel: the main menu list is not displayed. Button for the driver assistance sys-
To go from point to point in the main menu, tems*
press button or several times Selection menu
››› Fig. 43.
Menu Function
Select a submenu
Information and possible configurations
Driving
● Press the rocker switch ››› Fig. 42 2 on the of the multifunction display (MFD)
data
windscreen wiper lever up or down or turn ››› page 36, ››› page 31.
the thumbwheel of the multifunction steering Information and possible configurations
wheel ››› Fig. 43 until the desired option ap- Assist
of the driver assistance systems
systems
pears marked on the menu. ››› page 37, ››› page 31.
● The selected option is displayed between
Information instructions from the activa-
two horizontal lines. In addition, a triangle is Fig. 44 On the turn signal and main beam ted navigation system: when a route guid-
displayed on the right: headlight lever: button for the driver assis- ance is activated, the turning arrows and
● To consult the submenu option, press but- tance systems proximity bars are displayed. The appear-
Naviga- ance is similar to the Easy Connect sys-
ton ››› Fig. 42 1 on the windscreen wiper tion tem.
lever or button on the multifunction steer- With the turn signal and main beam head- If route guidance is not activated, the di-
ing wheel ››› Fig. 43. light lever button, you can activate or deacti- rection of travel (compass) and the name
vate the driver assistance systems displayed of the street along which you are driving
are shown ››› Booklet Navigation system. »
35
The essentials
Menu Function from departure, MFD from refuelling and MFD Menu Function
total calculation. On the screen display, you
Station display on the radio. can read which memory is currently dis- The memory records the values for a
Track name on the CD. played. specific number of partial trips, up to a
Audio
Track name in Media mode ››› Booklet Ra- total of 19 hours and 59 minutes or 99
dio or ››› Booklet Navigation system. MFD total hours and 59 minutes, or 1999.9 km or
● Toggle between memories with the ignition calcula- 9999 km, depending on the model of
Information and possible configurations on and the memory displayed: Press the tion instrument panel. On reaching either of
Tele- of the mobile phone preinstallation button on the windscreen wiper lever these limitsa), the memory is automati-
phone ››› Booklet Radio or ››› Booklet Navigation cally erased and starts to count from 0
or the button of the multifunction steering
system. again.
wheel.
Display of the current warning or informa- a) It varies according to the instrument panel version.
Vehicle tion texts and other system components, Menu Function
status depending on the equipment
››› page 118. Erasing a memory manually
Display and storage of the values for
the journey and the consumption from ● Select the memory that you wish to erase.
when the ignition is switched on to
● Hold the button of the multifunction
when it is switched off.
Driving data If the journey is continued in less than steering wheel or the button of the multi-
MFD from
2 hours after the ignition is switched function wheel pressed down for about 2 sec-
departure
The MFD (multifunction display) shows differ- off, the new data is added to the data onds.
ent values for the journey and the consump- already stored in the memory. The
memory will automatically be deleted if
tion. Personalising the displays
the journey is interrupted for more than
2 hours. In the Easy Connect system you can adjust
Changing between display modes on the which of the possible displays of the MFD can
MFD Display and storage of the values for
MFD from the journey and the consumption. By be shown on the instrument panel display
● In vehicles without multifunction steering refuelling refuelling, the memory will be erased with the button and the SETTINGS function
wheel: Press the rocker switch on the automatically. button ››› page 118.
windscreen wiper lever ››› Fig. 42.
● Vehicles with a multifunction steering
wheel: turn the thumbwheel ››› Fig. 43.
Data summary Menu Function The speed is stored and the warning activa-
ted.
Menu Function Digital dis-
Current speed displayed in digital ● To switch system off: press the but-
play of
The current fuel consumption dis- speed
format. ton or . The stored speed is de-
play operates throughout the jour- leted.
Current fuel
ney, in litres/100 km; and with the Speed warn- If the stored speed is exceeded (be-
consumption
engine running and the vehicle ing at --- tween 30 - 250 km/h, or 19 -
stopped, in litres/hour. km/h or Speed 155 mph), an audible warning is
warning at given together with a visual warn- Assist systems menu
After turning on the ignition, aver-
--- mph ing.
age fuel consumption in li-
tres/100 km will be displayed after Menu Function
Detection of
travelling about 100 metres. Other- The traffic signs detected are dis-
Average fuel traffic Adaptive cruise control (ACC) dis-
wise horizontal lines are displayed. played. ACC
consumption signs play ››› page 209.
The value shown is updated approxi-
mately every 5 seconds. Oil tempera- Updated engine oil temperature dig- Switching the monitoring system on
ACT®*: Depending on the equip- ture ital display Front Assist
and off ››› page 219.
ment, number of active cylinders.
Coolant tem- Switching the Lane Assist system on
Digital display of the current temper- Lane Assist*
Approximate distance in km that can perature or off ››› page 227.
ature of the liquid coolant.
still be travelled with the fuel re- gauge
Operating maining in the tank, assuming the Switching the Blind Spot Detection
range same style of driving is maintained. Blind spot*
system (BSD) on or off
This is calculated using the current Storing a speed with the speed warning
fuel consumption. ● Select the display Speed warning at Detection of
--- km/h (--- mph) traffic Display of traffic signs ››› page 240:
This indicates the hours (h) and mi- signs
Travelling
nutes (min) since the ignition was ● Press the button on the windscreen
time
switched on. wiper lever or the button on the multifunc- Switching the fatigue detection on
Fatigue de-
or off (pause recommendation)
Distance Distance covered in km (m) after tion steering wheel to store the current speed tection*
››› page 243.
covered switching on the ignition. and activate the warning.
● To switch system on: adjust to the desired
The average speed will be shown af-
ter a distance of about 100 metres speed within 5 seconds using the rocker
Average has been travelled. Otherwise hori- switch on the windscreen wiper lever or
speed zontal lines are displayed. The value by turning the thumbwheel on the multifunc-
shown is updated approximately ev- tion steering wheel. Next, press the button
ery 5 seconds. or again or wait several seconds.
37
The essentials
38
The essentials
Gear-change indicator Vehicles with an automatic gearbox* When the vehicle is at a standstill or when
The display is only visible in tiptronic mode travelling at very low speeds, the tempera-
››› page 190. ture displayed may be higher than the true
outside temperature as a result of the heat
The following display symbols mean: produced by the engine.
● Shifting up a gear The temperatures measured range from
● Shifting down a gear -40°C to +50°C (-40°F to +122°F).
CAUTION
Engine oil temperature display
The gear-change indicator is intended to help
save fuel, but it is not intended to recom-
Vehicles without multifunction steering
Fig. 46 Instrument panel: gear-change indica-
mend the right gear for all driving situations.
In certain situations, only the driver can
wheel
tor (manual gearbox).
choose the correct gear (for instance when ● Press the rocker switch ››› Fig. 42 2 until
overtaking, driving up a steep gradient or the main menu appears. Enter into Driving
A gear change will be recommended if the
towing a trailer). data. With the button 2 move to the oil
gear you are in is not the most economical
choice. If no gear-change is recommended, it temperature gauge.
means that you are already in the most eco- Note
nomical gear. Vehicles with multifunction steering wheel
The display disappears from the instrument
panel when you press the clutch pedal. ● Enter the submenu Driving data and
Vehicles with a manual gearbox turn the thumbwheel until the oil tempera-
The following display symbols ››› Fig. 46 ture display appears.
mean: Outside temperature display The engine reaches its operating temperature
● Change to a higher gear: the suggested when in normal driving conditions, the oil
gear appears to the right of the current gear When the outside temperature is below +4°C temperature is between 80°C (180°F) and
when a higher gear is recommended. (+39°F), the “ice crystal” symbol (warning of 120°C (250°F). If the engine is required to
risk of freezing) is also displayed. At first, this work hard and the outside temperature is
● Change to a lower gear: the suggested
symbol flashes and then it remains lit until high, the engine oil temperature can in-
gear appears to the left of the current gear the outside temperature rises above +6°C crease. This does not present any problem as
when a lower gear is recommended. (+43°F) ››› in Indications on the display on long as the warning lamps ››› table on
The gear recommendation may occasionally page 115. page 44 or ››› table on page 44 do not
skip a gear (2nd 4th). appear on the display.
39
The essentials
Additional electrical appliances Note ● Vehicles with Easy Connect: press the but-
ton Systems or else Vehicle systems >
● Operation with the windscreen wiper lever*: ● If you hide a saving tip, it will reappear af-
Driver assistant > Speed warning.
ter you switch the ignition on again.
Press the rocker switch ››› Fig. 42 2 until the
main menu appears. Enter into the section ● The saving tips do not appear in all situa- The warning limit can be set from 30 to
Driving data. With the rocker switch, tions, but rather with a large separation of 240 km/h (20 to 149 mph). The adjustment
move to the display Convenience con- time. is made at 10 km/h (5 mph) intervals.
sumers.
Note
● Operation with the multi-function steering
Speed warning device ● Please bear in mind that, even with the
wheel*: Move with the buttons 1 or 2 to speed warning function, it is still important
Driving data and enter with OK. Turn the The speed warning device warns the driver to keep an eye on the vehicle speed with the
right thumbwheel until the Convenience when they have exceeded the pre-set speed speedometer and to observe the legal speed
consumers display appears. limit by 3 km/h (2 mph). An audible warning limits.
signal sounds, and the warning lamp and ● The speed limit warning function in the ver-
In addition, a scale will inform you of the cur-
the driver message Speed limit excee- sion for some countries warns you at a speed
rent sum of all the additional appliances.
ded! will be displayed simultaneously on the of 120 km/h (75 mph). This is a factory-set
instrument panel. The warning lamp speed limit.
switches off when reducing speed below the
Saving tips stored maximum limit.
Tips on how to save fuel will be displayed in Speed warning programming is recommen- Service intervals
conditions that increase fuel consumption. ded if you wish to be reminded of a maxi-
mum speed, such as when travelling in a The service interval indication appears on the
Follow them to reduce consumption. The indi-
country with different speed limits or for a instrument panel display ››› Fig. 117 3 .
cations appear automatically only with the ef-
ficiency programme. After a time, the tips will maximum speed for winter tyres. SEAT distinguishes between services with en-
disappear automatically. gine oil change (e.g. Oil change service) and
Setting speed limit warning services without engine oil change (e.g. In-
If you wish to hide a saving tip immediately
You can use the radio or the Easy Connect* to spection).
after it appears, press any button on the
windscreen wiper lever*/multifunction steer- set, alter or cancel the speed limit warning. In vehicles with Services established by time
ing wheel*. or mileage, the service intervals are already
● Vehicles with radio: press the button SETUP
pre-defined.
> control button Driver Assistant >
Speed warning. In vehicles with LongLife Service, the inter-
vals are determined individually. Thanks to
40
The essentials
technological progress, maintenance work Vehicles with text messages: Service in ● Switch off the ignition, press and hold but-
has been greatly reduced. Because of the --- km or --- days will be shown on the ton ››› Fig. 117 4 .
technology used by SEAT, with this service instrument panel display. ● Switch ignition back on.
you only need to change the oil when the ve-
hicle so requires. To calculate this change Service due
● Release the 4 ››› Fig. 117 button and
(max. 2 years), the vehicle's conditions of press it again for the next 20 seconds.
When the service date is due, an audible
use and individual driving styles are consid-
warning is given when the ignition is switch- Note
ered. The advance warning first appears 20
ed on and the spanner displayed on the
days before the date established for the cor- ● The service message disappears after a few
screen flashes for a few seconds .
responding service. The kilometres (miles) seconds, when the engine is started or when
remaining until the next service are always Vehicles with text messages: Service now OK/RESET is pressed on the windscreen wiper
rounded up to the nearest 100 km (miles) will be shown on the instrument panel dis- lever, or OK on the multifunction steering
and the time is given in complete days. The play. wheel.
current service message cannot be viewed ● In vehicles with the LongLife system in
until 500 km after the last service. Prior to Reading a service notification which the battery has been disconnected for
this, only lines are visible on the display. a long period of time, it is not possible to cal-
With the ignition switched on, the engine off culate the date of the next service. Therefore
and the vehicle at a standstill, the current the service interval display may not be cor-
Inspection reminder service notification can be read: rect. In this case, bear in mind the maximum
When the Service date is approaching, when Press and hold the button ››› Fig. 117 4 service intervals permitted in the ››› Book-
the ignition is switched on a Service remind- for more than 5 seconds to consult the serv-
let Maintenance Programme.
er is displayed. ice message. ● If you reset the display manually, the next
Vehicles without text messages: a span- service interval will be indicated as in vehi-
When the service date has passed, a minus cles with fixed service intervals. For this rea-
ner will be displayed on the instrument sign is displayed in front of the number of kil- son we recommend that the service interval
panel plus an indication in km. ometres or days. display be reset by a SEAT authorised Dealer.
The kilometres indicated are the maximum Vehicles with text messages: the following
number of kilometres that can be travelled message is displayed: Service --- km
until the next service. After a few seconds, (miles) or --- days ago.
the display mode changes. A clock symbol
appears and the number of days until the
Resetting service interval display
next service is due.
If the service was not carried out by a SEAT
dealership, the display can be reset as fol-
lows:
41
The essentials
Cruise control Operation of the turn signal lever Operation using the third lever
● Switching on the CCS: Move switch ● Switching on the CCS: move the third lever
Operating the cruise control system ››› Fig. 47 1to . The system is on. If no to ››› Fig. 48. The system switches on but it
(CCS)* speed has been programmed, the system will does not control the speed as no speed has
not control it. been programmed.
● Activating the CCS: Press button ››› Fig. 47 ● Activating the CCS: press the ››› Fig. 48
2in the area. The current speed is button. It memorises and maintains the cur-
memorised and controlled. rent speed.
● Temporarily switching off the CCS: Move ● Temporarily switching off the CCS: move
switch ››› Fig. 47 1 to or push the the lever to ››› Fig. 48 and release it or
brake. The cruise control system is switched press the brake pedal. The cruise control sys-
off temporarily. tem is switched off temporarily.
● Reactivating the CCS: Press button ● Reactivating the CCS: move the lever to
››› Fig. 47 in . The memorised speed
2 ››› Fig. 48 and release it. The memo-
is saved and controlled again. rised speed is saved and controlled again.
Fig. 47 On the left of the steering column:
● Increasing stored speed during CCS regula- ● Switching off the CCS: move the third lever
switches and controls for operating the CCS
tion: press button 2 in . The vehicle ac- to position ››› Fig. 48. The system is dis-
celerates until the new stored speed. connected and the memorised speed is de-
● Reducing stored speed during CCS regula- leted.
tion: press button 2 in to lower the
speed by 1 km/h (1 mph). Speed is reduced
until reaching the new stored speed. ››› in Operation on page 205
42
The essentials
Warning lamps
On the instrument panel
Front brake pads worn. Lane Assist is switched on, but not ››› page On the instrument panel display
active. 225
it lights up: Fault in the ESC, or dis- ››› page
connection caused by the system. 184
Other warning lamps
flashes: ESC or ASR activated.
››› page
Left or right turn signal.
ASR manually deactivated. 141
››› page
ESC in Sport mode.
Hazard warning lights on.
››› page
184 146
ABS faulty or does not work.
››› page
››› page Trailer turn signals.
267
Rear fog light switched on.
141
it lights up green: Auto Hold activa- ››› page
lights up or flashes: fault in the ››› page ted. 203
emission control system. 197
it lights up green: Press the brake
it lights up: pre-heating of diesel pedal! ››› page
engine. It blinks in green: the selector lever 188
››› page
198 locking button has not engaged. Fig. 50 On the instrument panel display: door
flashes: fault in the diesel engine
management. it lights up green: cruise control ac-
open.
tivated or speed limiter switched
fault in the petrol engine manage- ››› page on and active. ››› page
ment. 198 ››› page
Do not continue driving! 122
it blinks in green: the speed set by 204
With the corresponding indica- ››› page
lights up or flashes: fault in the ››› page the speed limiter has been excee- tion: door(s), rear lid or bonnet 133
steering system. 286 ded. open or not properly closed. ››› page
Tyre pressure too low, or fault in 295
››› page it lights up green: Lane Assist is ››› page
the tyre pressure monitoring sys-
308
switched on and active. 225 Ignition: Do not carry on driv-
tem.
ing! Engine coolant level too low,
››› page ››› page
››› page Main beam on or flasher on.
141 coolant temperature too high
Fuel tank almost empty.
112
299
Flashing: Fault in the engine
Fault in airbag system and seat ››› page coolant system.
belt tensioners. 81
44
The essentials
Do not continue driving! Mobile telephone is connected ››› Book- Front passenger front airbag is
››› page
Engine oil pressure too low. If via Bluetooth to the original tele- let Radio disabled (
81
the warning lamp flashes, stop ››› page phone device. or ).
driving, even if the oil level is 297 ››› Book-
correct. Do not even run the en- Mobile telephone battery charge let Navi- The front passenger front airbag ››› page
gine at idle speed! meter. Available only for devices gation is activated ( 81
pre-installed in factory. system ).
››› page
Fault in the battery.
302 Freezing warning. The outside
››› page ›››
Driving light totally or partially
faulty.
››› page
104
temperature is lower than +4°C
(+39°F).
39
in Warning and control lamps on
page 117
Fault in the cornering light sys-
tem.
››› page
141
Start-Stop system activated.
››› page
Fault in the gearbox.
195
››› page
Light Assist on.
143
››› page
Immobiliser active.
129
● Press the clutch pedal and keep your foot Automatic gearbox* Manual release of the selector lever
right down.
● Move the gearbox lever to the required po-
sition.
● Release the clutch.
46
The essentials
Releasing the selector lever If the power supply should ever fail (e.g. dis- cle could otherwise start to move inadver-
● Using a screwdriver, press and hold the yel- charged battery) and the vehicle has to be tently after shifting the selector lever out of
low unlocking tab sideways ››› Fig. 54. pushed or towed, the selector lever must first position P - accident risk!
be moved to position N, after operating the
● Press the interlock button on the selector
manual release mechanism.
lever and move the selector lever to posi-
tion N. WARNING
● After carrying out the manual release, at-
The selector lever may be moved out of posi-
tach the selector lever boot on the gearbox tion P only when the handbrake is firmly ap-
console again. plied. If this does not work, secure the vehi-
cle with the brake pedal. On a slope the vehi-
47
The essentials
Air conditioning
How does Climatronic* work?
To switch a specific function on, press the ap- The LED on each control lights up to indicate
propriate button. Press the button again to that the respective function of a control has
switch off the function. been switched on.
1
The left and right sides can be adjusted separately: Turn the control to adjust the temperature
Temperature
2
The power of the fan is automatically adjusted. The fan is also adjusted manually by turning the control.
Fan
3
The airflow adjusts automatically for comfort. You can also switch it on manually using the buttons 3 .
Air distribution
4 Indications on the temperature display screen selected for the right and left sides.
48
The essentials
The air drawn in from outside the vehicle is directed at the windscreen and air recirculation is automatically switched off. To defrost the wind-
Defrost function screen more quickly, the air is dehumidified at temperatures over approximately +3°C (+38°F) and the fan runs at maximum output.
The air is directed at the chest of driver and passengers by the dash panel air vents.
Heated rear window: this only works when the engine is running and switches off automatically after a maximum of 10 minutes.
Air recirculation
Press the button to make maximum cooling capacity available. The recirculation of air and the cooling system turn on automatically and air distri-
bution adjusts automatically to the position .
When the warning light for button lights up, the settings on the driver side also apply to the passenger side. Press the button or the temper-
ature control on the passenger side
Automatic adjustment of temperature, fan, and air distribution. Press the button: the warning lamp on the button will light up .
Press the configuration button : the air conditioning operation menu will be displayed on the Easy Connect system screen.
Switching off Turn the blower control to the position or press the button.
49
The essentials
To switch a specific function on, press the ap- The LED on each control lights up to indicate
propriate button. Press the button again to that the respective function of a control has
switch off the function. been switched on.
1
Turn the control to adjust the temperature
Temperature
3
Rotate the continuous control to direct the airflow to the desired area.
Air distribution
The airflow is directed at the windscreen. Air recirculation is automatically switched off or is not switched on. Increase the fan power to clear the
Defrost function windscreen of condensation as soon as possible. To dehumidify the air, the cooling system will automatically switch on.
The air is directed at the chest of driver and passengers by the dash panel air vents.
Heated rear window: this only works when the engine is running and switches off automatically after a maximum of 10 minutes.
Air recirculation
Maximum cooling power. The recirculation of air and the cooling system turn on automatically and air distribution adjusts automatically to the
position
How does the heating and the fresh air system work?
To switch a specific function on, press the ap- The LED on each control lights up to indicate
propriate button. Press the button again to that the respective function of a control has
switch off the function. been switched on.
1 Turn the control to adjust the temperature. The temperature cannot be lower than that of the exterior air temperature, as this system cannot cool
Temperature or dehumidify the air
3
Rotate the continuous control to direct the airflow to the desired area.
Air distribution
The air is directed at the chest of driver and passengers by the dash panel air vents.
Heated rear window: this only works when the engine is running and switches off automatically after a maximum of 10 minutes
52
The essentials
Versions with
headlight washer
system
approx. 5 litres
locking.
››› page 289
53
The essentials
Oil
The level is measured using the dipstick loca- ● Zone C : Add oil up to zone B . ● When the oil level reaches at least zone B ,
ted in the engine compartment unscrew the engine oil filler cap carefully.
››› page 295. Topping up engine oil
● Unscrew cap from oil filler opening. Engine oil additives
The oil should leave a mark between zones
A and C . It should never exceed zone A . ● Add oil slowly. No type of additive should be mixed with the
engine oil. The deterioration caused by these
● Zone A : Do not add oil. ● At the same time, check the level to ensure
additives is not covered by the warranty.
● Zone B : You can add oil but keep the level
you do not add too much.
in that zone.
54
The essentials
VW 505 01c)
Diesel engines without particulate filter (DPF) –
VW 506 01c)
a) Use of engine oil compliant with the VW 504 00 specification instead of VW 508 00 may have a slight negative effect on the vehicle’s exhaust gas values.
b) Only use recommended oils, otherwise you may damage the engine.
c) If the quality of the fuel available in the country does not fulfil the EN 228 (for petrol) and EN 590 (for diesel) standards.
The brake fluid reservoir is located in the en- The windscreen washer reservoir is located in
››› in Topping up coolant on page 300 gine compartment ››› page 295. the engine compartment ››› page 295.
The level should be between the and To top up, mix water with a product recom-
››› page 299 marks. If it is below , please visit a Techni-
cal Service.
mended by SEAT.
In cold temperatures, add anti-freeze.
›››
in Topping up brake fluid on
page 301
››› in Checking and topping up the
windscreen washer reservoir on
page 301
››› page 300
Battery
The battery is located in the engine compart-
ment ››› page 295. It does not require
56
The essentials
›››
in Important safety warnings for
handling a vehicle battery on page 303
57
The essentials
Red 10
Blue 15
drive)
The fuse box is located behind the glove
››› page 100
Replacing a blown fuse ● Replace the cover again or close the fuse
Rear lights Type
box lid.
Retro fog light P21W LL
Preparation
light placed) ››› page 104
Dipped beam headlights H7 LL
● Switch off the ignition, lights and all elec-
trical equipment. Main beam headlights H7 LL
● Have the vehicle tool kit ››› page 93 Repairing a tyre with the anti-punc- ● Remove the lid from the filling tube
and the spare wheel* ready ture kit ››› Fig. 673 and screw the open end of the
››› page 311. tube into the tyre valve.
● Observe the applicable legislation for each ● With the tyre sealant bottle upside down,
country (reflective vest, warning triangles, fill the tyre with the contents of the sealant
etc.). bottle.
● All occupants should leave the vehicle and ● Remove the bottle from the valve.
wait in a safe place (for instance behind the ● Place the insert back into the tyre valve us-
roadside crash barrier). ing the tool ››› Fig. 67 1 .
● Screw the inflator tube ››› Fig. 67 3 into ● If it does not reach the pressure indicated,
the sealant bottle. The bottle's seal will break unscrew the tyre inflator tube from the valve.
automatically. ● Move the vehicle 10m so that the sealant is
distributed throughout the tyre.
60
The essentials
● Screw the compressor tyre inflator into the Changing a wheel Central wheel trim*
valve.
● Repeat the inflation process. Vehicle tool kit
● If the indicated pressure still cannot be
reached, the tyre is too badly damaged. Stop
and request assistance from an authorised
technician.
● Disconnect the air compressor. Unscrew
the tyre inflator tube from the tyre valve.
● When the tyre pressure is between 2.5 and
2.0 bars, continue driving without exceeding
80 km/h (50 mph). Fig. 69 Correct positioning of the central
● Check the pressure again after 10 minutes wheel trim for steel rims.
››› page 95. Fig. 68 Underneath the floor panel of the lug-
The central trims must be removed for access
gage compartment: vehicle tool kit.
››› to the wheel bolts.
in TMS (Tyre Mobility System)* on
page 93 1 An adapter for the anti-theft wheel bolts*
Removing
Towline anchorage
››› page 93
2
3 Box spanner for wheel bolts*
● Attach the wire hook (vehicle tools) to one
of the chambers of the central wheel trim.
4 Crank handle for jack ● Insert the box spanner through the hook,
5 Jack* supporting it on the tyre and remove the
6 Hook for extracting the central wheel wheel trim.
trims*
7 Clip for removing the wheel bolt caps. Fitting
● Fit the central wheel trim onto the rim. The
bottom of the “S” of the SEAT badge should
››› in What to do first on page 60
align with the inflation valve ››› Fig. 69 1 .
● Press the central trim firmly until it locks in
››› page 93 with an audible click. »
61
The essentials
Fig. 71 Anti-theft wheel bolt with cap and Fig. 72 Wheel: loosen the wheel bolts.
adapter.
● Insert the box spanner (vehicle tools) onto
● Remove the wheel cover* or the cap*. the wheel bolt as far as it will go. An adapter
● Insert the special adapter (vehicle tools) is required to unscrew or tighten the anti-
onto the anti-theft wheel bolt and push it on theft wheel bolts ››› page 62.
as far as it will go. ● Turn the wheel bolt approximately one turn
Fig. 70 Wheel: wheel bolts with caps.
● Insert the wheel brace (vehicle tools) onto to the left ››› Fig. 72 (arrow). To apply the re-
the adapter as far as it will go. quired torque, hold the wheel brace at the
Removal
● Remove the wheel bolt ››› page 62.
end. If it is not possible to loosen a wheel
● Fit the plastic clip (vehicle tools bolt, carefully apply pressure with one foot
››› Fig. 68 7 ) over the cap until it clicks into on the end of the box spanner. Hold on to the
Note
place ››› Fig. 70. vehicle for support and take care not to slip.
● Remove the cap with the plastic clip. Make a note of the code number of the anti-
theft wheel bolt and keep it in a safe place, WARNING
but not in your vehicle. If you need a new
adapter, you can obtain it from the SEAT Offi- Slightly loosen the wheel bolts (one turn) be-
cial Service, indicating the code number. fore raising the vehicle with the jack*. If not,
an accident may occur.
62
The essentials
Lifting the vehicle ● Find the support point on the strut (sunken CAUTION
area) closest to the wheel to be changed
››› Fig. 73. The vehicle must not be raised on the cross-
bar. Only place the jack* on the points de-
● Turn the jack* crank handle, located below signed for this purpose on the strut. Other-
the strut support point, to raise it until the wise, the vehicle may be damaged.
tab 1 ››› Fig. 74 is below the housing provi-
ded.
● Align the jack* so that tab 1 “grips” onto Removing and fitting a wheel
the housing provided on the strut and the
mobile base 2 is resting on the ground. The Change the wheel after loosening the wheel
base plate 2 should fall vertically with re- bolts and raising the vehicle with the jack.
spect to the support point 1 .
Fig. 73 Crossbar: marks. Taking off the wheel
● Continue turning the jack* until the wheel
is slightly lifted off the ground. ● Unscrew the wheel bolts using the box
spanner and place them on a clean surface.
WARNING
● Take off the wheel.
● Make sure that the jack* remains stable. If
the surface is slippery or soft, the jack* could Putting on the spare wheel
slip or sink, respectively, with the resultant
risk of injury. When fitting tyres with a compulsory rotation
● Only raise the vehicle with the jack* sup- direction, observe the instructions in
plied by the manufacturer. Other vehicles ››› page 64.
could slip, with the consequent risk of injury. ● Mount the wheel.
● Only mount the jack* on the support points
Fig. 74 Strut: mounting the jack on the vehi- ● Screw on the wheel bolts in position and
cle. designed for this purpose on the strut, and
always align the jack correctly. If you do not, tighten them loosely with a box spanner.
the jack* could slip as it does not have an ad- ● Carefully lower the vehicle using the jack*.
● Place the jack* (vehicle tools) on firm
equate grip on the vehicle: risk of injury! ● Tighten the wheel bolts in diagonal pairs
ground. If necessary use a large, strong
● The height of the parked vehicle can using the wheel brace.
board or similar support. If the surface is slip-
pery (for example tiles) place the jack on a change as a result of variations in tempera-
ture and loading. The wheel bolts should be clean and turn
rubber mat or similar to prevent it from slip- easily. Before fitting the spare wheel, inspect »
ping ››› .
63
The essentials
the wheel condition and hub mounting surfa- ● Return all tools to their proper storing loca- If there is a danger of being trapped despite
ces. These surfaces must be clean before fit- tion. having mounted the chains, it is best to disa-
ting the wheel. ● If the replaced wheel does not fit in the ble the driving wheels (ASR) in the ESC
spare wheel housing, store it safely in the ››› page 186, Switching on/off the ESC
luggage compartment ››› page 159. and ASR.
Tyres with compulsory direction of ro- ● Check the tyre pressure of the newly moun- Snow chains will improve braking ability as
tation ted tyre as soon as possible. well as traction in winter conditions.
● In vehicles fitted with a tyre pressure indi- For technical reasons snow chains may only
A directional tread pattern can be identified
by the arrows on the sidewall that point in cator, adjust the pressure and store the read- be used with the following wheel rim/tyre
the direction of rotation. Always observe the ing in the radio/Easy Connect system* combination.
direction of rotation indicated when fitting ››› page 308.
● Have the tightening torque of the wheel 215/60 R16 Chains with links of maximum 15 mm
the wheel to guarantee optimum properties
of this type of tyres with regard to grip, bolts checked as soon as possible with a tor- 215/55 R17 Chains with links of maximum 15 mm
noises, wear and aquaplaning. que wrench (it should be 140 Nm). Mean-
while, drive carefully. 215/50 R18 Chains with links of maximum 15 mm
If it is absolutely necessary to fit the spare
tyre* against the direction of rotation, drive ● Have the flat tyre replaced as quickly as Other dimensions do not allow chains
with care as this means the tyre does not of- possible.
fer optimum driving properties. This is of par- Remove any central wheel trims and the rim
ticular importance when the road surface is ring before fitting snow chains.
wet.
Snow chains Remove the chains when roads are free of
To return to directional tread tires, replace snow. Driving characteristics worsen, and the
the punctured tyre as soon as possible and Use wheels become damaged quickly and may
restore the obligatory direction of rotation of even be rendered unusable.
all tyres. Snow chains should only be used on the
front wheels.
Check that they are correctly seated after
Subsequent work driving for a few yards; correct the position if
necessary, in accordance with the manufac-
● Alloy wheels: replace the wheel bolt caps.
turer's fitting instructions. Keep your speed
● Plate wheels: fit the central wheel rim again below 50 km/h (30 mph).
››› page 61.
64
The essentials
Emergency towing of the vehi- Towline anchorages Do not pull too hard with the towing vehicle
Attach the bar or rope to the towline ancho- and take care to avoid jerking the tow rope.
cle When towing on an unpaved road, there is al-
rages.
ways a risk of overloading and damaging the
Towing The towline anchorages are located under anchorage points.
the floor panel in the luggage compartment,
next to the vehicle tools ››› page 93. Switch on the ignition so that the turn sig-
nals, windscreen wipers and windscreen
Screw the towline anchorage into the screw washer can work. Ensure that the steering
connection ››› Fig. 75 o ››› Fig. 76 and tighten wheel is unlocked and moves freely.
it with the wheel brace.
Place the gear lever in neutral on vehicles
Tow rope or tow bar with a manual gearbox. With an automatic
gearbox, place the lever in N.
The tow bar offers increased safety and a
lower risk of damage. To brake, press the brake pedal firmly. The
brake servo does not work when the engine
The tow rope is recommended when there is is switched off.
Fig. 75 Right side of the front bumper: tow- no tow bar. It must be elastic so that it does
line anchorage screwed in. not damage the vehicle. The power steering only works when the igni-
tion is switched on and the vehicle is moving,
Notes for the driver of the towing vehicle provided that the battery is sufficiently charg-
ed. Otherwise, it will need more force.
● The tow rope must be taut before you drive
off. Ensure that the tow rope remains taut at all
times.
● Release the clutch very carefully when start-
ing the vehicle (manual gearbox), or acceler-
ate gently (automatic gearbox). ››› in Introduction on page 96
Driving style
Towing requires some experience, especially
››› page 96
Fig. 76 Right side of the rear bumper: towline when using a tow rope. Both drivers should
anchorage screwed in. realise how difficult it is to tow a vehicle. In-
experienced drivers should not attempt to
tow.
65
The essentials
● Engage 2nd or 3rd gear before moving off. Jump lead terminal connections
● Press the clutch and hold the pedal down. How to jump start: description 1. Switch off the ignition of both vehicles
● Switch the ignition on. ››› .
● Once both vehicles are moving, release the 2. Connect one end of the red jump lead to
clutch. the positive + terminal of the vehicle
● As soon as the engine has started, press with the flat battery A ››› Fig. 77.
the clutch and move the gear lever to neutral. 3. Connect the other end of the red jump
lead to the positive terminal + in the ve-
hicle providing assistance B .
How to jump start 4. For vehicles without Start-Stop system:
connect one end of the black jump lead to
Jump leads the negative terminal – of the vehicle
Fig. 77 Diagram of connections for vehicles providing the current B ››› Fig. 77.
The jump lead must have a sufficient wire without Start Stop system
– For vehicles with Start-Stop system: con-
cross section. nect one end of the black jump lead X to a
If the engine fails to start because of a dis- suitable ground terminal, to a solid piece of
charged battery, the battery can be connec- metal in the engine block, or to the engine
ted to the battery of another vehicle to start block itself ››› Fig. 78.
the engine.
66
The essentials
5. Connect the other end of the black jump Make sure the battery clamps have sufficient ● Never attach the negative cable to fuel sys-
lead X to a solid metal component bolted metal-to-metal contact with the battery termi- tem components or the brake lines in the oth-
to the engine block or to the engine block nals. er vehicle.
itself of the vehicle with the flat battery. ● The non-insulated parts of the battery
If the engine fails to start after about 10 sec-
Do not connect it to a point near the bat- clamps must not be allowed to touch. The
onds, switch off the starter and try again after
tery A . jump lead attached to the positive battery
about 1 minute.
6. Position the leads in such a way that they terminal must not touch metal parts of the ve-
hicle, this can cause a short circuit.
cannot come into contact with any moving WARNING
parts in the engine compartment. ● Position the leads in such a way that they
● Please note the safety warnings referring to
cannot come into contact with any moving
working in the engine compartment
Starting parts in the engine compartment.
››› page 295.
● Do not lean on the batteries. This could re-
7. Start the engine of the vehicle with the ● The battery providing assistance must have
sult in chemical burns.
boosting battery and let it run at idling the same voltage as the flat battery (12V) and
speed. approximately the same capacity (see imprint
on battery). Failure to comply could result in Note
8. Start the engine of the vehicle with the flat an explosion.
battery and wait for 2 or 3 minutes until The vehicles must not touch each other, oth-
● Never use jump leads when one of the bat- erwise electricity could flow as soon as the
the engine is running. teries is frozen. Danger of explosion! Even af- positive terminals are connected.
ter the battery has thawed, battery acid could
Removing the jump leads leak and cause chemical burns. If a battery
9. Before you remove the jump leads, switch freezes, it should be replaced.
off the dipped beam headlights if they are ● Keep sparks, flames and lighted cigarettes
switched on. away from batteries, danger of explosion.
Failure to comply could result in an explo-
10.Turn on the heater blower and heated rear sion.
window in the vehicle with the flat battery.
● Observe the instructions provided by the
This helps minimise voltage peaks which
manufacturer of the jump leads.
are generated when the leads are discon-
● Do not connect the negative cable from the
nected.
other vehicle directly to the negative terminal
11.When the engine is running, disconnect of the flat battery. The gas emitted from the
the leads in reverse order to the details battery could be ignited by sparks. Danger of
given above. explosion.
67
The essentials
Changing the wiper blades Changing the windscreen and rear Cleaning windscreen wiper blades
window wiper blades ● Raise the wiper arms.
Windscreen wipers service position ● Use a soft cloth to remove dust and dirt
from the windscreen wiper blades.
● If the blades are very dirty, a sponge or
damp cloth may be used ››› in Changing
the windscreen and rear window wiper
blades on page 96.
›››
in Changing the windscreen and
rear window wiper blades on page 96
››› page 95
69
Safety
● belt tensioners for the front and rear side Correct position for passengers For your own safety and to reduce the risk of
Technical data
seats1), injury in the event of an accident, we recom-
● front airbags, mend the following adjustments for the driv-
Correct sitting position for driver
er:
● knee airbags,
● side airbags in the front seat backrests, – Adjust the steering wheel so that there is a
distance of at least 25 cm between the
● head-protection airbags, steering wheel and the centre of your chest
● “ISOFIX” anchor points for child seats in ››› Fig. 82.
Advice
the rear side seats with the “ISOFIX” system,
– Move the driver's seat forwards or back-
● height-adjustable front head restraints, wards so that you are able to press the ac-
● rear head restraints with in-use position celerator, brake and clutch pedals to the
and non-use position, floor with your knees still slightly angled
● adjustable steering column. ››› .
Operation
Fig. 82 The proper distance between driver – Ensure that you can reach the highest point
The safety equipment mentioned above
and steering wheel. of the steering wheel.
works together to provide you and your pas-
sengers with the best possible protection in – Adjust the head restraint so that its upper
the event of an accident. However, these edge is at the same level as the top of your
safety systems can only be effective if you head, or as close as possible to the same
and your passengers are sitting in a correct level as the top of your head ››› Fig. 83.
Emergencies
position and use this equipment properly.
– Move the seat backrest to an upright posi-
Safety is everyone's business! tion so that your back rests completely
against it.
– Fasten your seat belt securely ››› page 76.
– Keep both feet in the footwell so that you
have the vehicle under control at all times.
Safety
Fig. 83 Correct head restraint position for the
driver. Adjustment of the driver's seat ››› page 153. »
1) Depending on version/market.
71
Safety
WARNING Adjusting the steering wheel position – Move the seat backrest to an upright posi-
tion so that your back rests completely
● An incorrect sitting position of the driver
Read the additional information carefully against it.
can lead to severe injuries.
››› page 18. – Adjust the head restraint so that its upper
● Adjust the driver's seat so that there is at
least 25 cm distance between the centre of edge is at the same level as the top of your
WARNING
the chest and the centre of the steering head, or as close as possible to the same
wheel ››› Fig. 82. If you are sitting closer than ● Never adjust the position of the steering level as the top of your head ››› page 74.
25 cm, the airbag system cannot protect you wheel when the vehicle is moving, as this
could cause an accident. – Always keep both feet in the footwell in
properly.
● Move the lever up firmly so the steering
front of the front passenger seat.
● If your physical constitution prevents you
from maintaining the minimum distance of 25 wheel position does not accidentally change – Fasten your seat belt securely ››› page 76.
cm, contact a specialised workshop. The during driving. risk of accident!
workshop will help you decide if special spe- ● Make sure you are capable of reaching and It is possible to deactivate the front passen-
cific modifications are necessary. firmly holding the upper part of the steering ger airbag in exceptional circumstances
● When driving, always hold the steering wheel: risk of accident! ››› page 85.
wheel with both hands on the outside of the ● If you adjust the steering wheel so that it Adjusting the front passenger seat
ring at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions. points towards your face, the driver airbag ››› page 153.
This reduces the risk of injury when the driver will not protect you properly in the event of
airbag is triggered. an accident. Make sure that the steering WARNING
● Never hold the steering wheel at the 12 wheel points towards your chest.
● An incorrect sitting position of the front
o'clock position, or in any other manner (e.g.
passenger can lead to severe injuries.
in the centre of the steering wheel). In such
cases, if the airbag is triggered, you may sus- ● Adjust the front passenger seat so that
Correct sitting position for front pas- there is at least 25 cm between your chest
tain injuries to the arms, hands and head.
senger and the dash panel. If you are sitting closer
● To reduce the risk of injury to the driver
than 25 cm, the airbag system cannot protect
during sudden braking manoeuvres or an ac- For your own safety and to reduce the risk of you properly.
cident, never drive with the backrest tilted far injury in the event of an accident, we recom-
back! The airbag system and seat belts can ● If your physical constitution prevents you
mend the following adjustments for the front from maintaining the minimum distance of 25
only provide optimal protection when the
backrest is in an upright position and the
passenger: cm, contact a specialised workshop. The
driver is wearing his or her seat belt correct- – Move the front passenger seat back as far workshop will help you decide if special spe-
cific modifications are necessary.
ly. as possible ››› .
● Adjust the head restraint properly to ach-
ieve optimal protection.
72
Safe driving
● Always keep your feet in the footwell when – Always keep both feet in the footwell in – Never allow anyone to assume an incorrect
Technical data
the vehicle is moving; never rest them on the front of the rear seat. sitting position in the vehicle while travel-
dash panel, out the window or on the seat. An ling ››› .
– Fasten your seat belt securely ››› page 76.
incorrect sitting position exposes you to an
increased risk of injury in case of a sudden – Use an appropriate child restraint system The following list contains examples of sit-
braking or an accident. If the airbag is trig- when you take children in the vehicle ting positions that could be dangerous for all
gered, you could sustain severe injuries due ››› page 87. vehicle occupants. The list is not complete,
to an incorrect sitting position. but we would like to make you aware of this
● To reduce the risk of injury to the front pas- WARNING issue.
Advice
senger in events such as sudden braking ma- ● If the passengers in the rear seats are not
noeuvres or an accident, never travel with the Therefore, whenever the vehicle is in motion:
sitting properly, they could sustain severe in-
backrest tilted far back! The airbag system juries. ● Never stand in the vehicle.
and seat belts can only provide optimal pro-
tection when the backrest is in an upright po- ● Adjust the head restraint correctly in order ● Never stand on the seats.
sition and the front passenger is wearing his to achieve maximum protection. ● Never kneel on the seats.
Operation
or her seat belt properly. The further the seat ● Seat belts can only provide optimal protec-
● Never tilt your seat backrest far to the rear.
backrests are tilted to the rear, the greater tion when seat backrests are in an upright
the risk of injury due to incorrect positioning position and the vehicle occupants are wear- ● Never lean against the dash panel.
of the belt web or to the incorrect sitting po- ing their seat belts correctly. If passengers In ● Never lie on the rear bench.
sition! the rear seats are not sitting in an upright po-
sition, the risk of injury due to incorrect posi- ● Never sit on the front edge of a seat.
● Adjust the head restraint correctly in order
tioning of the seat belt increases. ● Never sit sideways.
Emergencies
to achieve maximum protection.
● Never lean out of a window.
● Never put your feet out of a window.
Correct sitting position for rear seat Examples of incorrect sitting posi-
● Never put your feet on the dash panel.
passengers tions
● Never put your feet on the surface of a seat.
To reduce the risk of injury in the event of a Seat belts can provide optimal protection on- ● Do not allow anyone to travel in the foot-
sudden braking manoeuvre or an accident, ly when the belt webs are properly posi- well.
Safety
passengers on the rear seat bench must con- tioned. Incorrect sitting positions substan- ● Never travel without wearing the seat belt.
sider the following: tially reduce the protective function of seat
belts and increase the risk of injury due to in- ● Do not allow anyone to travel in the lug-
– Sit up straight. correct seat belt position. As the driver, you gage compartment. »
– Adjust the head restraint to the correct po- are responsible for all passengers, especially
sition ››› page 74. children.
73
Safety
WARNING Properly adjusted head restraints are an im- Correct adjustment of rear head re-
portant part of passenger protection and can straints
● Any incorrect sitting position increases the
reduce the risk of injuries in most accident
risk of severe injuries. Sitting in an incorrect
situations.
position exposes the vehicle occupants to se-
vere injuries if airbags are triggered, by strik- ● Adjust the head restraint so that its upper
ing a vehicle occupant who has assumed an edge is, as far as possible, at the same level
incorrect sitting position.
as the top of your head, or at the very least,
● Before the vehicle moves, assume the prop- at eye level ››› Fig. 84.
er sitting position and maintain it throughout
the trip. Before every trip, instruct your pas- WARNING
sengers to sit properly and to stay in this po-
sition during the trip ››› page 71, Correct posi- ● Travelling with the head restraints removed
tion for passengers. or improperly adjusted increases the risk of
severe injuries. An improper adjustment of
the head restraints may cause death in an ac- Fig. 85 Head restraints in the correct posi-
cident and increase the risk of suffering inju- tion.
Correct adjustment of front head re- ries during abrupt braking actions or unex-
straints pected manoeuvres.
● The head restraints must always be adjus-
ted according to the height of the passenger.
Fig. 84 Correctly adjusted head restraint as Properly adjusted head restraints are an im-
viewed from the front and the side. portant part of the passenger protection and
can reduce the risk of injuries in most acci-
Read the additional information carefully dent situations
››› page 17.
74
Safe driving
Rear head restraints Pedal area ● Never lay or fit floor mats or other floor cov-
Technical data
– The rear head restraints have 2 positions: erings over the original floor mats. This
use and non-use. Pedals would reduce the pedal area and could ob-
struct the pedals. Risk of accident.
– One position for use (head restraint raised)
– Ensure that you can always press the accel- ● Never place objects in the driver footwell.
››› Fig. 85. In this position, the head re- An object could move into the pedal area and
erator, brake and clutch pedals unimpaired
straints are used normally, protecting pas- impair pedal operation. In the event of a sud-
to the floor.
sengers along with the rear seat belts. den driving or braking manoeuvre, you will
– Ensure that the pedals can return unim- not be able to operate the brake, clutch or ac-
– And one position for non-use (head re-
Advice
paired to their initial positions. celerator pedal. Risk of accident!
straint lowered).
– Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas-
– To fit the head restraints in position for use,
tened during the trip and do not obstruct
pull on the edges with both hands in the
the pedals ››› .
direction of the arrow.
Only use floor mats which leave the pedals
Operation
WARNING clear and which are secured to prevent them
● Under no circumstances should the rear from slipping. You can obtain suitable floor
passengers travel while the head restraints mats from a specialised dealership. Fasten-
are in the non-use position. See the warning ers* for floor mats are fitted in the footwells.
label located on the rear side fixed window
››› Fig. 86. If a brake circuit fails, the brake pedal must
Emergencies
be pressed down thoroughly in order to stop
● Do not swap the centre rear head restraint
the vehicle.
with either of the outer seat rear head re-
straints. Risk of injury in case of an accident!
Wear suitable footwear
Safety
WARNING
● Restricting pedal operation can lead to crit-
ical situations while driving.
75
Safety
The protective function of seat belts Ensure that your passengers wear their seat WARNING
Technical data
belts as well. Accident statistics have shown
● If seat belts are worn incorrectly or not at
that wearing seat belts is an effective means
all, the risk of severe injuries increases. The
of substantially reducing the risk of injury
optimal protection from seat belts can be
and improving the chances of survival when
achieved only if you use them properly.
involved in a serious accident. Furthermore,
● Fasten your seat belt before every trip -
properly worn seat belts improve the protec-
even when driving in town. Other vehicle oc-
tion provided by airbags in the event of an
cupants must also wear the seat belts at all
accident. For this reason, wearing a seat belt
Advice
times, otherwise they run the risk of being in-
is required by law in most countries. jured.
Although your vehicle is equipped with air- ● The seat belt cannot offer its full protection
bags, the seat belts must be fastened and if the seat belt is not positioned correctly.
Fig. 88 Drivers with properly worn seat belts worn. The front airbags, for example, are only ● Never allow two passengers (even children)
will not be thrown forward in the event of sud- triggered in some cases of head-on collision. to share the same seat belt.
den braking.
Operation
The front airbags will not be triggered during ● Always keep both feet in the footwell in
minor frontal or side collisions, rear-end colli- front of your seat as long as the vehicle is in
Properly worn seat belts hold the occupants sions, overturns or accidents in which the air- motion.
in the proper position. They also help prevent bag trigger threshold value in the control unit
uncontrolled movements that may result in ● Never unbuckle a seat belt while the vehi-
is not exceeded.
serious injury and reduce the risk of being cle is in motion. Risk of fatal injury.
thrown out of the vehicle in case of an acci- Therefore, you should always wear your seat ● The seat belt must never be twisted while it
Emergencies
dent. belt and ensure that all vehicle occupants is being worn.
have fastened their seat belts properly before ● The seat belt should never lie on hard or
Vehicle occupants wearing their seat belts you drive off! fragile objects (such as glasses or pens, etc.)
correctly benefit greatly from the ability of the
because this can cause injuries.
belts to absorb kinetic energy. In addition,
the front part of your vehicle and other pas- ● Do not allow the seat belt to be damaged or
sive safety features (such as the airbag sys-
Safety instructions on using seat jammed, or to rub on any sharp edges.
tem) are designed to absorb the kinetic ener- belts ● Never wear the seat belt under the arm or
Safety
gy released in a collision. Taken together, all in any other incorrect position.
– Always wear the seat belt as described in
these features reduce the releasing kinetic ● Loose, bulky clothing (such as an overcoat
energy and consequently, the risk of injury. this section. over a jacket) impairs the proper fit and func-
This is why it is so important to fasten seat – Ensure that the seat belts can be fastened tion of the seat belts, reducing their capacity
belts before every trip, even when "just driv- at all times and are not damaged. to protect. »
ing around the corner".
77
Safety
● The slot in the seat belt buckle must not be Head-on collisions and the laws of called “kinetic energy” is created both in the
blocked with paper or other objects, as this physics passengers and inside the vehicle.
can prevent the latch plate from engaging se- The amount of “kinetic energy” depends on
curely.
the speed of the vehicle and the weight of
● Never use seat belt clips, fastening rings or the vehicle and its passengers. The higher
similar items to alter the position of the belt they are, the more energy there is to be “ab-
webbing. sorbed” in the event of an accident.
● Frayed or torn seat belts or damage to the
connections, belt retractors or parts of the The most significant factor, however, is the
buckle could cause severe injuries in the speed of the vehicle. If the speed doubles
event of an accident. Therefore, you must from 25 km/h (15 mph) to 50 km/h
check the condition of all seat belts at regular (30 mph), for example, the corresponding ki-
intervals. netic energy is multiplied by four.
● Seat belts which have been worn in an acci- Given that the passengers of the vehicle in
Fig. 89 A driver not wearing a seat belt is
dent and stretched must be replaced by a thrown forward violently. our example do not have their seat belts fas-
specialised workshop. Renewal may be nec- tened, in the event of a collision the entire
essary even if there is no apparent damage.
amount of the passengers' kinetic energy will
The belt anchorage should also be checked.
be only absorbed by the mentioned impact.
● Do not attempt to repair a damaged seat
belt yourself. The seat belts must not be re- Even at speeds of 30 km/h (19 mph) to
moved or modified in any way. 50 km/h (30 mph), the forces acting on bod-
● The belts must be kept clean, otherwise the ies in a collision can easily exceed one tonne
retractors may not work properly. (1000 kg). At greater speed these forces are
even higher.
Vehicle occupants not wearing seat belts are
not “attached” to the vehicle. In a head-on
Fig. 90 The unbelted passenger in the rear
collision, they will move forward at the same
seat is thrown forward violently, hitting the speed their vehicle was travelling just before
driver who is wearing a seat belt. the impact. This example applies not only to
head-on collisions, but to all accidents and
It is easy to explain how the laws of physics collisions.
work in the case of a head-on collision: when Even at low speeds the forces acting on the
a vehicle starts moving, a type of energy body in a collision are so great that it is not
78
Seat belts
possible to brace oneself with one's hands. How to properly adjust your
Technical data
In a frontal collision, unbelted passengers
are thrown forward and will make violent con- seatbelt
tact with the steering wheel, dash panel,
windscreen or whatever else is in the way Fastening and unfastening the seat
››› Fig. 89. belt
It is also important for rear passengers to
wear seat belts properly, as they could other-
Advice
wise be thrown forward violently through the
vehicle interior in an accident. Passengers in
the rear seats who do not use seat belts en-
danger not only themselves but also the front
Fig. 92 Position of seat belt during pregnan-
occupants ››› Fig. 90. cy.
Operation
Read the additional information carefully
››› page 17.
Fasten your seat belt
The seat belt cannot offer its full protection if
the seat belt is not positioned correctly.
Emergencies
● Adjust the seat and head restraint correctly.
● To fasten the belt, take hold of the latch
plate and pull it slowly across your chest and
lap.
● Insert the latch plate into the buckle for the
Fig. 91 Positioning and removing the seat appropriate seat and push it down until it is
Safety
belt buckle. securely locked with an audible click
››› Fig. 91 A. »
79
Safety
● Pull the belt to ensure that the latch plate is and the seat belts have been fastened prop- The seat belts for the front seats and the side
securely engaged in the buckle. erly. rear seats1) are equipped with belt tension-
● Never put the latch plate in the buckle of
ers. The belt tensioners are activated by sen-
The seat belts are equipped with an automat- sors, although only in severe head-on, lateral
ic retractor on the shoulder strap. Full free- another seat. If you do this, the seat belt will
not protect you properly and the risk of injury and rear-end collisions. This retracts and
dom of movement is permitted when the tightens the seat belts, reducing the forward
is increased.
shoulder belt is pulled slowly. However, dur- motion of the occupants.
● Never unbuckle a seat belt while the vehi-
ing sudden braking, during travel in steep
areas or bends and during acceleration, the cle is in motion. If you do, you increase the The belt tensioners will not be triggered in
risk of sustaining severe or fatal injuries. the event of minor collisions, if the vehicle
automatic retractor on the shoulder belt is
locked. ● An incorrectly worn seat belt can cause se- overturns, or in accidents where no major
vere injuries in the event of an accident. forces act on the vehicle.
The automatic belt retractors on the front ● For pregnant women, the lap part of the
seats and side rear seats are1) fitted with seat belt must lie as low as possible over the Note
seat belt tensioners ››› page 80. pelvis, never across the stomach, and always ● If the seat belt tensioners are triggered, a
lie flat so that no pressure is exerted on the fine dust is produced. This is normal and it is
Releasing the seat belt abdomen ››› Fig. 92. not an indication of fire in the vehicle.
● Press the red button on the belt buckle ● Always engage the retractor lock when you ● The relevant safety requirements must be
››› Fig. 91 B. The latch plate is released and are securing a child seat in group 0, 0+ or 1 observed when the vehicle or components of
springs out ››› . ››› page 87. the system are scrapped. Specialised work-
● Guide the belt back by hand so that it rolls ● Read and observe the warnings ››› page 77. shops are familiar with these regulations,
up easily and the trim is not damaged. which are also available to you.
1) Depending on version/market.
80
Airbag system
belt may be damaged. The consequence may Airbag system airbag. In this case, the inflating airbag may
Technical data
be that, in the event of an accident, the belt inflict critical or fatal injuries on the occu-
tensioners function incorrectly or may not pant. This also applies to children.
function at all. Brief introduction
Always maintain the greatest possible dis-
So that the effectiveness of the seat belt ten- tance between yourself and the front airbag.
Why is it so important to wear a seat
sioner is not reduced and that removed parts This way, the front airbags can completely
do not cause any injuries or environmental belt and to sit correctly? deploy when triggered, providing their maxi-
pollution, regulations, which are known to mum protection.
For the inflating airbags to achieve the best
Advice
the specialised workshops, must be ob-
protection, the seat belt must always be worn The most important factors that will trigger
served.
properly and the correct sitting position must an airbag are: the type of accident, the angle
be assumed. of collision and the speed of the vehicle.
WARNING
● Improper use or repairs not carried out by The airbag system is not a substitute for seat Whether or not the airbags are triggered de-
qualified mechanics increase the risk of se- belts, but it is an integral part of the vehicle's pends primarily on the vehicle deceleration
Operation
vere or fatal injuries. The belt tensioners may overall passive safety system. Please bear in rate resulting from the collision and detected
fail to trigger or may trigger in the wrong cir- mind that the airbag system can only work ef- by the control unit. If the vehicle deceleration
cumstances. fectively when the vehicle occupants are occurring during the collision and measured
● Never attempt to repair, adjust, remove or wearing their seat belts correctly and have by the control unit remains below the speci-
install parts of the belt tensioners or seat adjusted the head restraints properly. There- fied reference values, the front, side and/or
belts. fore, it is most important to properly wear the curtain airbags will not be triggered. Take in-
Emergencies
● The seat belt tensioner, seat belt and auto- seat belts at all times, not only because this to account that the visible damage in a vehi-
matic retractor cannot be repaired. is required by law in most countries, but also cle involved in an accident, no matter how
for your safety ››› page 76, Why wear a seat serious, is not a determining factor for the
● Any work on the belt tensioners and seat
belt?. airbags to have been triggered.
belts, including the removal and refitting of
system parts in conjunction with other repair The airbag inflates in a matter of seconds, so
work, must be performed by a specialised WARNING
if you are not properly seated when the air-
workshop only. bag is triggered, you may sustain fatal inju- ● Wearing the seat belt incorrectly or assum-
ing an incorrect sitting position can lead to
Safety
● The belt tensioners will only provide pro- ries. Therefore, it is essential that all vehicle
tection for one accident and must be changed occupants assume a correct sitting position critical or fatal injuries.
if they have been activated. while travelling. ● All vehicle occupants, including children,
who are not properly belted can sustain criti-
Sharp braking before an accident may cause cal or fatal injuries if the airbag is triggered.
a passenger not wearing a seat belt to be Children up to 12 years old should always »
thrown forward into the area of the deploying
81
Safety
such as the properties of the object the vehi- In an accident with airbag activation: Knee airbag*
Technical data
cle hits (hard/soft), angle of impact, vehicle ● the interior lights switch on (if the interior
speed, etc. light switch is in the courtesy light position); Read the additional information carefully
Deceleration trajectory is key for airbag acti-
››› page 20.
● the hazard warning lights switch on;
vation. ● all doors are unlocked; WARNING
The control unit analyses the collision trajec- ● the fuel supply to the engine is cut. ● The knee airbag is deployed in front of the
tory and activates the respective restraint driver's knees. Always keep the deployment
system. areas of the knee airbags free.
Advice
If the deceleration rate is below the prede- ● Never not fix objects to the cover or in the
fined reference value in the control unit the
Airbag safety instructions deployment area of the knee airbag.
airbags will not be triggered, even though ● Adjust the driver's seat so that there is a
the accident may cause extensive damage to Front airbags distance of at least 10 cm (4 inches) between
the car. your knees and the location of the this air-
Read the additional information carefully
Operation
bag. If your physical constitution prevents
The following airbags are triggered in seri-
››› page 19. you from meeting these requirements, make
ous head-on collisions sure you contact a specialised workshop.
WARNING
● Driver airbag.
● The deployment space between the front
● Front passenger front airbag passengers and the airbags must not in any Side airbags*
case be occupied by other passenger, pets
Emergencies
● Knee airbag for the driver.
and objects. Read the additional information carefully
The following airbags are triggered in seri- ● The airbags provide protection for just one ››› page 21.
ous side-on collisions accident; replace them once they have de-
ployed. WARNING
● Front side airbag on the side of the acci-
● It is also important not to attach any ob-
dent. ● If you do not wear a seat belt, if you lean
jects such as cup holders or telephone
● Rear side airbag on the side of the acci- forward, or are not seated correctly while the
mountings to the surfaces covering the air-
vehicle is in motion, you are at a greater risk
Safety
dent. bag units.
of injury if the side airbag system is triggered
● Curtain (head) airbag on the side of the ac- ● Do not attempt to modify components of in an accident.
cident. the airbag system in any way. ● In order for the side airbags to provide their
maximum protection, the prescribed sitting »
83
Safety
position must always be maintained with ● Under no circumstances should protective scribed sitting position must always be main-
seat belts fastened while travelling. covers be fitted over seats with side airbags tained with seat belts fastened while travel-
● In a side-on collision the side airbags will unless the covers have been approved for use ling.
not work if the sensors do not correctly meas- in your vehicle. Because the airbag deploys ● For safety reasons, the curtain airbag must
ure the pressure increase on the interior of from the side of the backrest, the use of con- be disabled in those vehicles fitted with a
the doors, due to air escaping through the ventional seat covers would obstruct the side screen dividing the interior of the vehicle.
areas with holes or openings in the door pan- airbag, seriously reducing the airbag's effec- See your technical service to make this ad-
el. tiveness. justment.
● Never drive if the interior door panels have ● Any damage to the original seat upholstery ● There must be no other persons, animals or
been removed or if the panels have not been or around the seams of the side airbag units objects between the occupants of the outer
correctly fitted. must be repaired immediately by a special- seats and the deployment space of the head-
ised workshop. protection airbags so that the head-protec-
● Never drive the vehicle if the loudspeakers
● The airbags provide protection for just one tion airbag can deploy completely without re-
in the door panels have been removed, un-
less the holes left by the loudspeakers have accident; replace them once they have de- striction and provide the greatest possible
been closed properly. ployed. protection. Therefore, sun blinds which have
● Any work on the side airbag system or re- not been expressly approved for use in your
● Always check that the openings are closed
moval and installation of the airbag compo- vehicle may not be attached to the side win-
or covered if loudspeakers or other equip- dows
ment are fitted inside the door panels. nents for other repairs (such as removal of
the front seat) should only be performed by a ● The built-in coat hooks should be used only
● Occupants of the outer seats must never
specialised workshop. Otherwise, faults may for lightweight clothing. Do not leave any
carry any objects or pets in the deployment occur during the airbag system operation. heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets.
space between them and the airbags, or al- Please, do not hang the clothes on coat hang-
● Do not attempt to modify components of
low children or other passengers to travel in ers.
this position. It is also important not to at- the airbag system in any way.
● The airbags provide protection for just one
tach any accessories (such as cup holders) to
the doors. This would impair the protection accident; replace them once they have de-
offered by the side airbags. ployed.
Curtain airbags*
● The built-in coat hooks should be used only ● Any work on the head-protection airbag
for lightweight clothing. Do not leave any Read the additional information carefully system or removal and installation of the air-
bag components for other repairs (such as re-
heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets. ››› page 21.
moval of the roof lining) should only be per-
● Great forces, such as hard blows or kicks,
formed by a specialised workshop. Other-
must not be exerted upon the backrest bol- WARNING
wise, faults may occur during the airbag sys-
ster because the system may be damaged. In ● In order for the head-protection airbags to tem operation.
this case, the side airbags would not be trig- provide their maximum protection, the pre- ● Do not attempt to modify components of
gered.
the airbag system in any way.
84
Airbag system
● The side and head airbags are managed It lights up on the combi-in- The disabling of airbags is only carried out in
Technical data
through sensors located in the interior of the strument certain cases, i.e. if:
front doors. To ensure the correct operation of ● a child seat is required in the front passen-
the side and curtain airbags neither the Fault in airbag
Have the system checked immedi- ger seat with the child facing in the opposite
doors nor the door panels should be modified system and seat
ately by a specialised workshop. direction to the direction of travel (in some
in any way (e.g. fitting loudspeakers). If the belt tensioners.
countries, due to divergent legal require-
front door is damaged, the airbag system
may not work correctly. All work carried out
ments, facing in the direction of travel)
It lights up on the dash panel
››› page 89;
on the front door must be done in a special-
Advice
ised workshop. Fault in the air- Have the system checked immedi- ● despite the driver's seat being in the cor-
bag system. ately by a specialised workshop. rect position, a minimum distance of 25 cm
Front passenger cannot be maintained between the centre of
Check whether the airbag should re- the steering wheel and the driver's torso,
front airbag dis-
Deactivating airbags abled.
main disabled.
● installation of special devices is required in
the steering wheel area due to a physical dis-
Operation
Deactivation of front airbag It lights up on the dash panel ability,
● if you have special seats installed (e.g. an
The control lamp switches off about
Front passenger 60 seconds after the ignition is orthopaedic seat without side airbags).
front airbag ena- turned on or after enabling of the
bled. front passenger front airbag with the The front passenger front airbag can be disa-
key lock switch. bled using the switch ››› page 86.
Emergencies
We recommend that you contact an author-
Several warning and control lamps light up
ised SEAT dealer for the disabling of other air-
for a few seconds when the ignition is switch-
bags.
ed on, signalling that the function is being
verified. They will switch off after a few sec-
Airbag system control
onds.
Fig. 93 Control lamp for disabling the front The airbag system availability is controlled
passenger front airbag on the dash panel If the front passenger airbag is deactivated, electronically, regardless of whether an air-
Safety
the lamp does not re- bag is disabled. »
main lit, or if it is lit together with the control
lamp on the dash panel, there may be a
fault in the airbag system ››› .
85
Safety
light up, with the word Transporting children safely These systems have been especially de-
Technical data
in the centre part of the dash panel. signed and approved, complying with the
ECE-R44. regulation.
– The warning lamp is illuminated for
Safety for children
60 seconds in the centre part of the dash SEAT recommends securing the child seats
panel. shown on the website as described below:
Introduction
Control lamp with the word ● Child seats in the opposite direction of
(front passenger airbag disabled) For safety reasons, as we have learned from travel (group 0+): ISOFIX and support bracket
accident statistics, we recommend that chil- (Peke G0 Plus + ISOFIX Base (RWF)).
Advice
If the front passenger front airbag is disa- dren under 12 years of age travel in the rear
bled, after switching on the ignition, the con- ● Child seats in the direction of travel (group
seats. Depending on their age, height and
trol lamp will light up for several seconds, weight, children travelling in rear seats must 1): ISOFIX and Top Tether (Peke G1 ISOFIX
then it will switch off for about 1 s and then use a child seat or a seat belt. For safety rea- DUO Plus). »
switch on again. sons, the child seat should be installed in the
If the control lamp is flashing, there is a fault rear seat, behind the front passenger seat or
Operation
in the disabling of the airbag system ››› . in the centre back seat.
Please go immediately to an Official Service. The physical laws involved and the forces
acting in a collision apply also to children
WARNING ››› page 78. But unlike adults, children do not
● The driver of the vehicle is responsible for have fully developed muscle and bone struc-
Emergencies
disabling or switching on the airbag. tures. This means that children are subject to
● Always switch off the ignition before disa- a greater risk of injury.
bling the front passenger airbag! Failure to do To reduce the risk of injuries, children must
so could result in a fault in the airbag deacti-
always use special child restraint systems
vation system.
when travelling in the vehicle.
● Never leave the key in the airbag disabling
switch as it could get damaged or enable or We recommend the use of child safety prod-
disable the airbag during driving. ucts from the SEAT Original Accessories Pro-
Safety
● If the (airbag disabled) control lamp gramme, which includes systems for all ages
flashes, the front passenger front airbag will made by “Peke” (not for all countries) (see
not trigger in the event of an accident! Have www.seat.com).
the system immediately checked by an Offi-
cial Service.
87
Safety
● Child seats in the direction of travel (group The passenger side front airbag, when ena- However, if it is necessary, in exceptional ca-
2): seat belt and ISOFIX (Peke G3 KIDFIX) 1). bled, is a serious risk for a child that is facing ses, to transport a child in the front passen-
● Child seats in the direction of travel (group backward since the airbag can strike the seat ger seat, the front passenger front airbag
3): with seat belt (Peke G3 KIDFIX)2). with such force that it can cause serious or must always be disabled ››› page 85. If the
fatal injuries. Children up to 12 years old passenger seat has a height adjustment op-
Follow the manufacturer's instructions and should always travel on the rear seat. tion, move it to the highest, most upright po-
observe any statutory requirements when in- sition. If you have a fixed seat, do not install
stalling and using child seats. Always read Therefore we strongly recommend you to any child restraint system in this location.
and note ››› page 88. transport children on the rear seats. This is
● For those vehicles that do not include a key
the safest location in the vehicle. Alternative-
We recommend you always carry the manu- lock switch to deactivate the airbag, the vehi-
ly, the front passenger airbag can be disa- cle must be taken to a technical service. Do
facturer's Child Seat Instruction Manual to- bled with a key-operated switch ››› page 86. not forget to reconnect the airbag when an
gether with the on-board documentation. When transporting children, use a child seat adult wants to sit in the front passenger seat.
suitable for the age and size of each child ● All vehicle occupants, especially children,
››› page 89. must assume the proper sitting position and
Important information regarding the be properly belted in while travelling.
front passenger's airbag WARNING
● Never hold children or babies on your lap,
● If a child seat is secured to the front pas- this can result in potentially fatal injuries to
Read the additional information carefully senger seat, the risk to the child of sustain- the child!
››› page 22. ing critical or fatal injuries in the event of an ● Never allow a child to be transported in a
accident increases.
Read and always observe the safety informa- vehicle without being properly secured, or to
● An inflating front passenger airbag can stand up or kneel on a seat while travelling.
tion included in the following chapters:
strike the rear-facing child seat and project it In an accident, the child could be flung
● Safety distance with respect to the passen- with great force against the door, the roof or through the vehicle, causing possibly fatal in-
ger airbag ››› page 81. the backrest. juries to themselves and to the other vehicle
● Never install a child seat facing backwards occupants.
● Objects between the passenger and the
on the front passenger seat unless the front ● If children assume an improper sitting posi-
passenger side airbag ››› in Front airbags
passenger front airbag has been disabled. tion when the vehicle is moving, they expose
on page 83. Risk of potentially fatal injuries to the child! themselves to greater risk of injury in the
event of a sudden braking manoeuvre or in an
Technical data
child is travelling on the front passenger seat
An undue installation of the safety seat will
and the airbag system is triggered in an acci- Safety instructions increase the risk of injury in the event of a
dent; as this could cause serious injury or
crash.
even death. Read the additional information carefully ● Never tie the retainer strap to a hook in the
● A suitable child seat can protect your child! ››› page 22. luggage compartment.
● Never leave a child alone in the child seat
● Never secure or tie luggage or other items
or inside the vehicle because depending on WARNING
to the lower anchorages (ISOFIX) or the upper
the season, very high temperatures may be
Advice
When travelling, children must be secured in ones (Top Tether).
reached inside a parked vehicle, which could
the vehicle with a restraint system suitable
be fatal.
for age, weight and size.
● Children who are less than 1.5 metres tall
● Read and always observe information and
must not wear a normal seat belt without a Categorisation of child seats into
warnings concerning the use of child seats
child seat, as this could cause injuries to the
››› page 88. groups
abdominal and neck areas during a sudden
Operation
braking manoeuvre or in an accident. Use only child seats that are officially ap-
● Do not allow the seat belt to become twis- WARNING proved and suitable for the child.
ted and the seat belt should be properly in The retaining rings are designed only for use These seats are subject to the ECE-R 44 or
place ››› page 76. with “ISOFIX” and Top Tether* system child ECE-R 129 standard. ECE-R stands for: Eco-
● Only one child may occupy a child seat seats. nomic Commission for Europe Regulation.
››› page 89, Child seats.
Emergencies
● Never secure other child seats that do not
● When a child seat is mounted in the rear have the “ISOFIX” or Top Tether* system, or The child seats are grouped into 5 catego-
seats, the door child-proof lock should be ac- retaining belts or objects to the fastening ries:
tivated ››› page 131. rings - this can result in potentially fatal inju-
ries to the child. Group 0: Up to 10 kg (up to around 9
months)
● Ensure that the child seat is secured cor-
rectly using the “ISOFIX” and Top Tether* se- Group 0+: Up to 13 kg (up to around 18
curing rings. months) »
Safety
2) Temporarily, the child seat recommended by the
Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg (up to approx. 4 ● Universal: Child seats with universal appro- Attachment systems overview
years old) val can be installed in all vehicles. There is ● ISOFIX: ISOFIX is a standardised attach-
no need to consult any list of models. In the ment system allowing quick and safe attach-
Group 2: from 15 to 25 kg (up to approx. 7 case of universal approval for ISOFIX, the
years old) ment of child seats in the vehicle. ISOFIX at-
child seat is additionally provided with a Top tachment establishes a rigid connection be-
Tether belt. tween the child seat and the car body.
Group 3: From 22 to 36 kg (over around 7
years old) ● Semi-universal: semi-universal approval, in
addition to the standard requirements of uni- The child seat has two rigid attachment clips,
Child seats that have been tested and ap- versal approval, requires safety devices to called connectors. These connectors are fit-
proved under the ECE-R 44 or ECE-R 129 lock the child seat, which require additional ted into the ISOFIX attachment rings found
standard bear the test mark ECE-R 44 or ECE- testing. Child seats with semi-universal ap- between the seat cushion and the backrest of
R 129 on the seat (the letter E in a circle with proval include a list of vehicle models for the vehicle's back seat (on the sides). ISOFIX
the test number below it). which they can be installed. attachment systems are used mainly in Eu-
rope ››› page 24. If necessary, ISOFIX at-
Follow the manufacturer's instructions and ● Vehicle-specific: vehicle-specific approval
tachment may have to be supplemented with
observe any statutory requirements when in- requires a dynamic test of the child seat for
a Top Tether belt or a support bracket.
stalling and using child seats. each vehicle model separately. Child seats
with vehicle-specific approval also include a ● Automatic three-point seat belt. Whenever
We recommend you to always include the
list of vehicle models for which they can be possible, it is preferable to attach the child
manufacturer's Child Seat Instruction Manual
installed. seats with the ISOFIX system rather than at-
together with the on-board documentation.
● i-Size: Child seats with i-Size approval must taching them with an automatic three-point
SEAT recommends you use child seats from meet the requirements prescribed in the ECE- seat belt ››› page 23.
the Original Accessories Catalogue. These R 129 standard in relation to installation and
child seats have been designed and tested safety. Child seat manufacturers can tell you Additional attachment:
for use in SEAT vehicles. You can find the which seats have i-Size approval for this vehi- ● Top Tether: The Top Tether belt is guided
right child seat for your model and age group cle.
at SEAT dealers. over the back of the rear seat and attached to
an anchor point with a hook. Anchor points
Child seats by approval category are located at the back of the rear seat back-
Attachment systems rest on the boot side ››› page 27. The
Child seats may have the approval category rings for retaining the Top Tether belt are
of universal, semi-universal, vehicle specific Depending on the country, different attach- marked with an anchor symbol.
(all according to the ECE-R 44 standard) or i- ment systems are used for safely installing
● Support bracket: Some child seats rest on
Size (according to the ECE-R 129 standard). child seats.
the floor of the vehicle with a support brack-
et. The support bracket prevents the child
90
Transporting children safely
Technical data
pact. Child seats fitted with a support bracket
should only be used in the passenger seat
and side rear seats ››› . For the assembly of
this type of seat you should also consult the
list of approved vehicles for this assembly,
available in the instructions for child restraint
systems.
Advice
Recommended systems for attaching child
seats
SEAT recommends attaching child seats as
follows:
● Baby carriers or child seats in the opposite
Operation
direction of travel: ISOFIX and support brack-
et or iSize.
● Child seats in the direction of travel: ISO-
FIX and Top Tether.
Emergencies
WARNING
Incorrect use of the support bracket can
cause serious or fatal injury.
● Make sure the support bracket is correctly
and safely installed.
Safety
91
Safety
Technical data
tyre greater than 4 mm.
The jack does not generally require any main-
tenance. If required, it should be greased us- ● If you have been driving with very low pres-
Self-help ing universal type grease. sure or a completely flat tyre.
● If the sealant bottle has passed its use by
Vehicle tool kit, anti-puncture kit* date.
The tools and anti-puncture kit* are stored Tyre repair WARNING
under the floor panel in the luggage compart-
Advice
ment. Using the tyre mobility system can be dan-
TMS (Tyre Mobility System)* gerous, especially when filling the tyre at the
To access the vehicle tools: roadside. Please observe the following rules
Read the additional information carefully to minimise the risk of injury:
– Lift up the floor surface by the plastic han- ››› page 60
● Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible.
dle until it is fastened to the tabs on both
sides. The Anti-puncture kit* (Tyre Mobility System) Park it at a safe distance from surrounding
Operation
will reliably seal punctures caused by the traffic to fill the tyre.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the an- penetration of a foreign body of up to about ● Ensure the ground on which you park is flat
ti-puncture kit* is located under the floor 4 mm in diameter. Do not remove foreign ob- and solid.
panel in the luggage compartment. jects, e.g. screws or nails, from the tyre. ● All passengers and particularly children
The tool kit includes: After inserting the sealant residue in the tyre, must keep a safe distance from the work area.
Emergencies
you must again check the tyre pressure about ● Turn on the hazard warning lights to warn
● Jack* 10 minutes after starting the engine. other road users.
● Wire hook for pulling off the wheel cov- ● Use the tyre mobility system only if you are
You should only use the tyre mobility set if
er*/wheel bolt cap clip. the vehicle is parked in a safe place, you are familiar with the necessary procedures. Oth-
● Box spanner for wheel bolts* erwise, you should seek professional assis-
familiar with the procedure and you have the
tance.
● Towline anchorage necessary tyre mobility set! Otherwise, you
● The tyre mobility set is intended for tempo-
should seek professional assistance.
● Adapter for the anti-theft wheel bolts* rary emergency use only until you can reach
Safety
● Towing bracket device the nearest specialised workshop.
Do not use the tyre sealant in the following
cases: ● Replace the repaired tyre with the tyre mo-
Some of the items listed are only provided in bility set as soon as possible. »
certain model versions, or are optional ex- ● If the wheel rim has been damaged.
tras. ● In outside temperatures below -20°C (-4°F).
93
Emergencies
94
Self-help
Technical data
Switch off the air compressor after a maxi- Getting in the way of the doors and the rear
mum of 8 operational minutes to avoid over- lid is dangerous and can lead to serious in-
heating! Before switching on the air compres- jury.
sor again, let it cool for several minutes. Manual unlocking/locking ● Open and close the doors and the rear lid
only when there is nobody in the way.
Introduction
Check after 10 minutes of driving Read the additional information carefully CAUTION
Advice
››› page 14, ››› page 15. When opening and closing in an emergency,
Screw the inflator tube ››› Fig. 96 again
5
and check the pressure on the gauge 6 . carefully disassemble components and then
The doors, rear lid and panoramic tilting sun- reassemble them carefully to avoid damage
roof can be locked manually and partially to the vehicle.
1.3 bar (19 psi / 130 kPa) and lower: opened, for example if the key or the central
● Stop the vehicle! The tyre cannot be sealed locking is damaged.
Operation
sufficiently with the tyre mobility set.
● You should obtain professional assistance
WARNING Changing the windscreen wiper
››› . Opening and closing doors carelessly can blades
cause serious injury.
1.4 bar (20 psi / 140 kPa) and higher: ● If the vehicle is locked from outside, the Changing the windscreen and rear
Emergencies
doors and windows cannot be opened from
● Set the tyre pressure to the correct value window wiper blades
the inside.
again.
● Never leave children or disabled people Read the additional information carefully
● Carefully resume your journey until you alone in the car. They could be trapped in the
reach the nearest specialised workshop with-
››› page 68.
car in an emergency and will not be able to
out exceeding 80 km/h (50 mph). get themselves to safety. The windscreen wiper blades are supplied as
● Have the damaged tyre replaced. ● Depending on the time of the year, temper- standard with a layer of graphite. This layer is
atures inside a locked and closed vehicle can responsible for ensuring that the wipe is si-
Safety
WARNING be extremely high or extremely low resulting lent. If the graphite layer is damaged, the
in serious injuries and illness or even death, noise of the water as it is wiped across the
Driving with an unsealed tyre is dangerous
particularly for young children. windscreen will be louder.
and can cause accidents and serious injury.
● Do not continue driving if the tyre pressure Check the condition of the wiper blades regu-
is 1.3 bar (19 psi / 130 kPa) and lower. larly. If the wipers scrape across the glass, »
95
Emergencies
they should be changed if they are damaged, CAUTION the hazard warning lights. In vehicles with
or cleaned if they are dirty ››› . the Keyless Access system, the steering
● To prevent damage to the bonnet and the
wheel could lock ››› .
Damaged wiper blades should be replaced wiper arms, only leave them in the service
immediately. These are available from quali- position.
WARNING
fied workshops. ● Before driving, always lower the wiper
arms. A vehicle with no power should never be tow-
WARNING ed.
● During towing, never switch off the ignition
Worn or dirty wiper blades reduce visibility
and increase the risk of accident and serious with the starter button. Otherwise, the elec-
injury. Tow-starting and towing tronic lock of the steering column could sud-
denly get blocked and it would be impossible
● Always replace damaged or worn blades or
to steer the vehicle. This could cause an acci-
blades which do not clean the windscreen Introduction
dent, serious injury and loss of control of the
correctly. vehicle.
Tow-starting means starting the engine of
the vehicle while another pulls it. ● If during towing the vehicle runs out of
CAUTION power, stop towing immediately and request
● Damaged or dirty windscreen wipers could
Towing means one vehicle pulling another the assistance of specialist personnel.
scratch the glass.
that is not roadworthy.
● If products containing solvents, rough Always consider the legal provisions relating WARNING
sponges or sharp objects are used to clean to tow-starting and towing. Vehicle handling and braking capacity
the blades, the graphite layer will be dam- change considerably during towing. Please
For technical reasons, towing a vehicle with a
aged. observe the following instructions to mini-
discharged battery is not allowed. The jump
● Never use fuel, nail varnish remover, paint mise the risk of serious accidents and injury:
start should be used instead ››› page 66.
thinner or similar products to clean the win- ● As the driver of the vehicle being towed:
dows. If the vehicle comes with the Keyless Access
system, towing is only allowed with the igni- – You should depress the brake much hard-
● In icy conditions, always check that the
tion on! er as the brake servo does not operate.
wiper blades are not frozen to the glass be- Pay the utmost attention to avoid crash-
fore using the wipers. In cold weather, it may The vehicle battery drains if the vehicle is ing into the towing vehicle.
help to leave the vehicle parked with the wip- towed with the engine switched off and the – More strength is required at the steering
ers in service position ››› page 68.
ignition connected. Depending on the battery wheel as the power steering does not op-
charge status, the drop in voltage may be so erate when the engine is switched off.
large, even after just a few minutes, that no ● As the driver of the towing vehicle:
electrical device in the vehicle may work e.g.
96
Self-help
– Accelerate with particular care and cau- ● If the battery is flat, it is possible that the Indications for towing
Technical data
tion. engine control units may not operate correct-
ly. Tow rope or tow bar
– Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres.
– Brake earlier than usual and more It is safer for the vehicle to be towed using a
However, if the vehicle must absolutely be tow bar, avoiding damage to the vehicle. A
smoothly.
tow-started (in the case of manual gearbox- tow rope should only be used if a tow bar is
es): not available.
CAUTION
● Engage the 2nd or 3rd gear.
A tow rope should be slightly elastic to avoid
● To avoid damaging the vehicle, for example
Advice
● Keep the clutch pressed down. damage to both vehicles. It is advisable to
the paint, remove and replace the lid and
towing eye carefully. ● Switch on the ignition and the hazard warn- use a tow rope made of synthetic fibre or sim-
ing lights. ilarly elastic material.
● Unburnt fuel could enter the catalytic con-
verter and damage it during towing. ● Once both vehicles are moving, release the Only attach the tow rope or the tow bar to the
clutch. towing eyes provided or a towing bracket.
Operation
● Once the engine starts, press the clutch If the vehicle is factory-equipped with a tow-
Indications for tow-starting and disengage the gear to avoid colliding ing bracket, it is only allowed to tow with a
with the towing vehicle. tow bar if this has been specially designed to
Vehicle's should not generally be tow-star- be installed with a tow hitch ››› page 270.
ted. The jump start should be used instead CAUTION
››› page 66. When tow-starting, unburnt fuel could enter When the vehicle needs to be towed:
Emergencies
For technical reasons, towing the following the catalytic converter and damage it. Check whether the vehicle may be towed
vehicles is not allowed: ››› page 98, Cases where towing a vehicle
Note is not allowed.
● Vehicles with an automatic gearbox.
● If the vehicle battery is discharged, be-
The vehicle can only be tow-started if the ● Switch the ignition on.
electronic parking brake and, if appropriate,
cause in vehicles with the Keyless Access the electronic lock of the steering column are ● Put the gearbox lever in neutral or the se-
locking and ignition system the steering re- deactivated. If the vehicle has no power sup- lector lever in the N ››› page 187 position.
Safety
mains locked and the electronic parking ply or there is an electric system fault, the ● Do not allow the vehicle to be towed at
brake cannot be deactivated nor can the elec- engine must be tow-started to deactivate the speeds of over 50 km/h (30 mph).
tronic lock of the steering column be re- electronic parking brake and the electronic
leased if they are activated. ● The vehicle must not be towed further than
lock of the steering column.
50 km (30 miles). »
97
Emergencies
98
Self-help
● Screw the towing eye in the housing by Fitting the rear towing eye or installed and used for towing
Technical data
turning it to the maximum anticlock- ››› page 267, ››› .
wise ››› . Use a suitable object that can
Bear in mind the instructions for towing
completely and securely tighten the towing
››› page 97.
eye in its housing.
● After towing, unscrew the towing eye clock- Assemble the rear towing eye (cars without a
wise with a suitable object. factory-equipped towing bracket)
● Insert the side tab of the lid into the open- ● Remove the towing eye from the vehicle
Advice
ing of the bumper and press until the tab is tool kit in the luggage compartment
properly clipped into the bumper. ››› page 93.
● Clean the towing eye if necessary and then ● Press the upper side of the lid ››› Fig. 99 to
store it in the luggage compartment along unclip it.
Fig. 99 Rear bumper on right: remove the lid.
with the other vehicle tools.
● Remove the lid and let it hang from the ve-
Operation
CAUTION hicle.
● Screw the towing eye in the housing by
The towing eye must always be completely
and firmly tightened. Otherwise, it could be turning it to the maximum anticlockwise
released while towing and tow-starting. ››› Fig. 100 ››› . Use a suitable object that
can completely and securely tighten the tow-
ing eye in its housing.
Emergencies
● After towing, unscrew the towing eye clock-
wise with a suitable object.
● Insert the upper flange of the lid into the
Fig. 100 Rear bumper on right: towline an- opening of the bumper and press the lower
chorage screwed in. side of the lid until the upper flange is inser-
ted into the bumper.
The housing of the screw towing eye is on the ● Clean the towing eye if necessary and then
Safety
right side of the rear bumper behind a lid store it in the luggage compartment along
››› Fig. 99. Vehicles equipped as standard with the other vehicle tools. »
with a towing bracket do not have any hous-
ing for the screw towing eye behind the lid. In
this case, the tow hitch needs to be extracted
99
Emergencies
100
Fuses and bulbs
● Never use a fuse with a higher value. Only Vehicle interior fuses
Technical data
replace fuses with a fuse of the same amper-
age (same colour and markings) and size.
● Never repair a fuse.
● Never replace a fuse by a metal strip, staple
or similar.
CAUTION
Advice
● To prevent damage to the vehicle's electric
system, before replacing a fuse always turn
off the ignition, the lights and all electrical
elements and remove the key from the igni- Fig. 101 On the driver-side dash panel (left-
tion. hand drive): fuse box cover.
● If you replace a fuse with higher-rating
Operation
fuse, you could cause damage to another part
of the electrical system.
● Protect the fuse boxes when open to pre-
vent the entry of dust or humidity as they can
damage the electrical system.
Emergencies
Fig. 102 Glove compartment (right-hand
Note drive): Access to the fuse box.
● One component may have more than one
fuse. Opening and closing the fuse box situated
below the dash panel (left-hand drive)
● Several components may run on a single
fuse. ● Opening: fold the cover down ››› Fig. 101.
● Closing: push back the cover it in until it
Safety
clicks into place.
● Undo the opening limiter ››› Fig. 102 A in Engine compartment fuses Fuses in the vehicle interior
two steps: first, unlock the limiter by pulling
No. Consumers/Amps
back on it (arrow 1 ) and then move it gently
to the right (arrow 2 ). Remove the guide 1 Adblue (SCR) 30
when the cover is in the normal opening po-
sition (30°). 5 Gateway 5
● Free the side pivots B to release the cover 6 Automatic gearbox lever 5
to its second opening position (60°).
Air conditioning and heating con-
Follow the same procedure in reverse order to 7 trol panel, back window heating, 10
auxiliary heating.
return the glove compartment to its normal
position. Diagnosis, handbrake switch,
Fig. 103 In the engine compartment: fuse box 8 light switch, reverse light, interior 10
CAUTION cover. lighting, driving mode
● Protect the fuse boxes when open to avoid ● Press the locking tabs to release the fuse 11 Left lights 40
the entry of dust or humidity. Dirt and humid- box cover ››› Fig. 103.
ity inside fuse boxes can cause damage to 12 Radio 20
● Then lift the cover out.
the electrical system. 14 Air conditioner fan 40
● To fit the cover, place it on the fuse box.
Push the locking tabs down until they click 15 Steering column release 10
audibly into place.
16 Connectivity Box. 7.5
17 Instrument panel 5
Fuse placement 18 Rear camera 7.5
102
Fuses and bulbs
Technical data
24 Right lights 40 50 Electric rear lid 40 16 Petrol pump 5/15/20
Advice
No. Consumers/Amps
Control unit for parking aid, front 22 Engine control unit 5
32 7.5/10 1 ESP control unit 25
camera and radar
23 Starter motor 30
2 ESP control unit 40
33 Airbag 5
24 PTC 40
Engine control unit (diesel/pet-
Reverse switch, clima sensor, 3 30/15
34 7.5 rol)
Operation
electrochromic mirror 31 Pressure pump 15
4 Engine sensors 5/10 33 Gearbox pump 30
Diagnosis, headlight control unit,
35 10
headlight adjuster 5 Engine sensors 7.5 37 Parking heating 20
36 Right LED headlight 10 6 Brake light sensor 5
Note
37 Left LED headlight 10
Emergencies
7 Engine power supply 10
● In the vehicle, there are more fuses than
38 Trailer 25 8 Lambda probe 10/15 those indicated in this chapter. These should
39 Right door 30 only be changed by a specialised workshop.
9 Engine 5/10/20
● Positions not containing a fuse do not ap-
40 12V socket 20 10 Fuel pump control unit 15/20 pear in the following tables.
42 Central locking 40 11 PTC 40 ● Some of the equipment listed in the tables
below pertain only to certain versions of the
44 Trailer 15
Safety
12 PTC 40 model or are optional extras.
45 Electric driver's seat 15 13 Automatic gearbox control unit 15/30 ● Please note that the above lists, while cor-
rect at the time of printing, are subject to
47 Rear window wiper 15 14 Heated windscreen 40 change.
49 Starter motor; clutch sensor 5 15 Horn 15
103
Emergencies
104
Fuses and bulbs
Change the front bulbs 2. Move the loops ››› Fig. 104 1 in the di-
Technical data
rection of the arrow and remove the cov-
er.
Dipped beam headlight
3. Remove connector ››› Fig. 105 2 from
the bulb.
4. Unclip the retainer spring ››› Fig. 105 3
pressing clockwise and inwards.
5. Extract the bulb and fit the replacement
Advice
so that the lug on the base fits into the
recess on the reflector.
6. Installation involves all of the above
steps in reverse sequence.
Operation
Fig. 104 In the engine compartment: remove
the lid. Main beam headlight bulb and turn Fig. 107 In the engine compartment: main
signal bulb beam headlight bulb 2 and turn signal bulb
3 .
Emergencies
Main beam headlight bulb
1. Raise the bonnet.
2. Move the loop ››› Fig. 106 1 in the di-
rection of the arrow and remove the cov-
er.
3. Slide connector ››› Fig. 107 2 to the left
Safety
Fig. 105 In the engine compartment: dipped or right and pull.
beam headlight. Fig. 106 In the engine compartment: remove
the lid. 4. Remove the bulb by disconnecting the
connector.
Follow the steps indicated:
5. Installation involves all of the above
1. Raise the bonnet. steps in reverse sequence. »
105
Emergencies
Note Rear bulbs (in the side panel) 3. Remove the lid, levering it with the flat
Technical data
side of a screwdriver into the recess
Due to the difficulty of accessing fog light ››› Fig. 110 1 .
bulbs, have them replaced at a Technical
Service or specialised workshop. 4. Remove the bulb connector.
5. Unscrew the light securing bolt by hand
or using a screwdriver ››› Fig. 110 2 .
6. Remove the light from the body, gently
Change the rear bulbs pulling it toward you, and place on a
Advice
clean, smooth surface.
Overview of tail lights
7. Disassemble the bulb holder unlocking
Tail lights on side panel the securing tabs ››› Fig. 111 1 .
Fig. 110 Luggage compartment: access to the 8. Change the damaged bulb.
Turn signal PY21W NA LL
bolt securing the tail light unit.
9. To refit follow the steps in reverse order,
Operation
Side light and brake light P21W LL taking special care when fitting the bulb
holder. The securing tabs must click into
Tail lights on the rear lid place.
Left side
CAUTION
Side lights P21W LL Take care when removing the rear light unit to
Emergencies
make sure there is no damage to the paint-
Fog light/side light P21W LL
work or any of its components.
Reverse light W16W
Safety
Follow the steps indicated: ● In the case of LED lights, change only the
The table corresponds to a right-hand traffic turn signal bulb.
vehicle. The position of lights may vary ac- 1. Check which of the bulbs is defective.
cording to the country. 2. Open the rear lid.
107
Emergencies
Rear lights (in the rear lid) 2. Unlock the securing tabs from the bulb Changing number plate light bulbs
holder ››› Fig. 113 1 or turn the bulb
holder to the left 2 and 3 .
3. Remove the bulb holder from its loca-
tion.
4. Lightly press the defective bulb into the
bulb holder, then turn it to the left and
remove it.
5. Fit the new bulb, pressing it into the
bulb holder and turn it to the right as far
as it will go.
Fig. 112 Rear lid open: remove the lid. 6. Use a cloth to remove any fingerprints Fig. 114 In the rear bumper: number plate
from the glass part of the bulb. light.
7. Check that the new bulb works properly.
8. Carry out the same actions in reverse or-
der for assembly and pay special atten-
tion to placing the bulb holder, ensuring
that the tabs are properly secured.
Note
For LED pilots, you can only change the re-
verse bulb.
108
Fuses and bulbs
Technical data
direction of arrow 1 and pull on the
connector.
4. Rotate the bulb holder in the direction of
arrow 2 and extract it with the bulb.
5. Replace the defective bulb with a new
bulb with the same features.
6. Insert the bulb holder in the number
Advice
plate light and turn in the opposite di-
rection of arrow 2 until it stops.
7. Plug the connector into the bulb holder.
Note
Operation
Depending on how equipped the vehicle is,
the number plate lights may be LEDs. LEDs
have an estimated life that exceeds than that
of the car. If a light with LEDs fails, go to an
authorised workshop for replacement.
Emergencies
Safety
109
Operation
110
Controls and displays
Technical data
– Windscreen wipers and washer . . 150 – Connectivity Box/Wireless Charg-
– Wipe and wash system . . . . . . . . . . 150 er* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Controls and displays – Storage compartment
– On-board computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Depending on equipment fitted: ra- 18 Gear lever for:
General instrument panel 10
dio or display for Easy Connect – Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
1 Door release lever (navigation, radio, TV/video) . . . . . . 118 – Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Advice
2 Central locking switch . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 11 Depending on the equipment, but- 19 Rotating control(Driving Experience
3 Control for the electric adjustment tons for: button) for driving modes . . . . . . . . . 237
of the exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 – Start-Stop system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 20 Auto Hold switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
4 Air outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 – Park assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 21 Electronic parking brake switch . . . 181
5 Control lever for: – Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . 146 22 Starter button (Keyless Access lock-
Operation
– Turn signals and main beam – Tyre pressure switch . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 ing and ignition system) . . . . . . . . . . 178
headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 – Airbag off display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 23 Driver's seat heating control . . . . . . 155
– Lane Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 12 Depending on the equipment, 24 Ignition lock (vehicles without Key-
– Main beam assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 glove compartment with: . . . . . . . . . 158 less Access) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
– Cruise control system (CCS) . . . . . 204 – CD player* and/or SD card* 25 Steering column adjustment lev-
Emergencies
6 Depending on equipment fitted: ››› Booklet Radio er . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
– Driver airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
15 Passenger seat heating control . . . . 155 28 Headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Safety
– Heating and ventilation system or
navigation and speech dialogue
system ››› Booklet Radio manual air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . 51, 50 Note
– Automatic air conditioner . . . . . . . 48 ● Some of the equipment listed in this sec-
– Paddle levers for tiptronic gear-
Depending on the equipment: tion is only fitted on certain models or are op-
shift (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . . 190 17
tional extras. »
8 Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 – USB/AUX-IN input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
111
Operation
● A separate Instructions Manual is enclosed ● The arrangement of switches and controls ››› page 110. However, the symbols used to
if the vehicle is equipped with a factory-fitted on right-hand drive models* may be slightly identify the controls are the same.
radio, CD player, AUX IN connection or navi- different from the layout shown in
gation system.
Details of the instruments ››› Fig. 117: 1 Revolution counter (with the engine run- The beginning of the red zone of the rev
ning, in hundreds of revolutions per mi- counter indicates the maximum speed in
nute). any gear after running-in and with the
112
Instruments and warning/control lamps
engine hot. However, it is advisable to Rev counter For the sake of the environment
Technical data
change up a gear or move the selector
lever to D (or lift your foot off the acceler- The rev counter indicates the number of en- Changing up a gear early will help you to save
fuel and minimise emissions and engine
ator) before the needle reaches the red gine revolutions per minute ››› Fig. 117 1 .
noise.
zone ››› .
Together with the gear-change indicator, the
2 Engine coolant temperature display rev counter offers you the possibility of using
››› page 115. the engine of your vehicle at a suitable Indications on the display
3 Displays on the screen ››› page 113. speed.
Advice
4 Adjuster button and display The start of the red zone on the dial indicates A variety of information can be viewed on the
››› page 115. the maximum engine speed which may be instrument panel display ››› Fig. 117 3 , de-
used briefly when the engine is warm and af- pending on the vehicle equipment:
5 Speedometer.
ter it has been run in properly. Before reach-
6 Fuel gauge ››› page 116. ● Bonnet, rear lid and doors open
ing this range, you should change to a higher
gear for vehicles with a manual gearbox or for
››› page 38.
Operation
WARNING ● Warning and information messages
automatic gearboxes put the selector lever in
Any distraction may lead to an accident, with “D” or take your foot off the accelerator ped- ››› page 38.
the risk of injury. al. ● Distance travelled ››› page 115.
● Do not operate the instrument panel con-
We recommend that you avoid high revs and ● Time ››› page 114.
trols when driving.
that you follow the recommendations on the ● Navigation instructions.
Emergencies
gear-change indicator. Consult the additional
● Outside temperature ››› page 39.
CAUTION information in ››› page 39, Gear-change
indicator. ● Compass ››› page 114.
● To prevent damage to the engine, the rev
counter needle should only remain in the red ● Shift lever position ››› page 188.
zone for a short period of time. CAUTION
● Recommended gear (manual gearbox)
● When the engine is cold, avoid high revs Never allow the rev counter needle 1 ››› page 39.
and heavy acceleration and do not make the ››› Fig. 117 to go into the red zone on the ● Multifunction display (MFD) and menus
engine work hard. scale for more than a very brief period, other-
Safety
wise there is a risk of engine damage.
with different setting options ››› page 34.
● Service interval display ››› page 40.
For the sake of the environment
● Second speed display ››› page 34.
Changing up a gear in time reduces fuel con-
sumption and noise. ● Speed warning function ››› page 40. »
113
Operation
● Start-Stop system status display ton down to scroll through the numbers This option cannot be deactivated in models
››› page 200. quickly. destined for countries in which the second
● Active cylinder management display ● Press the button 4 again in order to finish speed must always be visible.
(ACT®)* ››› page 196 setting the time. The second speed display can be adjusted in
● Signs recognised by the traffic signal de- the Easy Connect system via the button
The time can also be set via the button
tection system ››› page 240 and the SETTINGS function button
and the SETTINGS function button in the Easy
››› page 118.
● Low consumption driving status (ECO) Connect system ››› page 118.
››› page 114
Speed warning
● Identifying letters on engine (MKB). Compass
When the speed setting is exceeded, this will
With the ignition on and the navigation sys-
Distance travelled be indicated on the instrument panel display.
tem on, the cardinal point corresponding to
This is very useful, for example when using
The odometer registers the total distance the direction of travel of the vehicle is dis-
winter tyres that are not designed for driving
travelled by the car. played on the instrument panel.
at the maximum speed of the vehicle
The odometer (trip) shows the distance ››› page 40.
Selector lever position
travelled since the last odometer reset. The The speed warning settings can be adjusted
last digit of the trip recorder indicates distan- The selected gear is displayed on the side of
in the Easy Connect system via the button
ces of 100 metres or one tenths of a mile. the selector lever and on the instrument pan-
and the SETTINGS function button
el display. In positions D and S, and with the
● Briefly press the button ››› Fig. 117 4 to re- Tiptronic, the corresponding gear is also dis-
››› page 118.
set the trip recorder to 0. played.
Start-Stop operating display
● Keep the button 4 pressed for about 3
seconds and the previous value will be dis- Recommended gear (manual gearbox) Updated information relating to the status is
played. displayed on the instrument panel
The recommended gear in order to save fuel
is displayed on the instrument panel while
››› page 200.
Time you are driving ››› page 39.
Low consumption driving status (ECO)*
● To set the time, keep the button ››› Fig. 117
4 pressed for more than 3 seconds to select Second speed display (mph or km/h) Depending on the equipment, when driving,
the hour or minute display. the “ECO” display appears on the instrument
In addition to the speedometer, the speed
panel when the vehicle is in low consump-
● To continue setting the time, press the up- can also be displayed in a different unit of
tion status due to active cylinder manage-
per or lower part of the button 4 . Hold but- measurement (in miles or in km per hour).
ment (ACT®)* ››› page 196.
114
Instruments and warning/control lamps
Identifying letters on engine (MKB) ● When several warnings are active at the used to measure short trips. The last digit of
Technical data
Hold the button ››› Fig. 117 4 down for more same time, the symbols are shown succes- the trip recorder indicates distances of 100
than 15 seconds to display the identifying sively for a few seconds and will stay on until metres or tenths of a mile.
letters of the vehicle engine (MKB). To do the fault is rectified.
The trip recorder can be set to zero by press-
this, the ignition must be switched on and ing 0.0/SET ››› Fig. 118.
the engine switched off.
Odometer Fault display
WARNING
If there is a fault in the instrument panel, the
Advice
Observe the safety warnings ››› in Warning letters DEF will appear in the trip recorder
and control lamps on page 117. display. Have the fault repaired immediately,
as far as is possible.
WARNING
Even though outside temperatures are above
freezing, some roads and bridges may be icy. Coolant temperature gauge
Operation
● At outside temperatures above +4°C
(+39°F), even when the “ice crystal” symbol
For vehicles with no coolant temperature
is not visible, there may still be patches of ice gauge, a control lamp appears for high
on the road. coolant temperatures ››› page 299. Please
Fig. 118 Instrument panel: odometer and re- note ››› .
● Do not rely on the outside temperature in- set button.
Emergencies
dicator! The coolant temperature gauge 2
The distance covered is displayed in “kilome- ››› Fig. 117 only works when the ignition is
Note tres” or miles “m”. It is possible to change switched on. In order to avoid engine dam-
the measurement units (kilometres age, please read the following notes for the
● Different versions of the instrument panel
“km”/miles “m”) in the radio/Easy Connect*. different temperature ranges.
are available and therefore the versions and
Please refer to the Easy Connect* Instructions
instructions on the display may vary. In the
case of displays without warning or informa-
Manual for more details. Engine cold
tion texts, faults are indicated exclusively by If only the diodes in the lower part of the
Safety
the warning lamps. Odometer/trip recorder scale light up, this indicates that the engine
● Depending on the equipment, some set- The odometer shows the total distance cov- has not yet reached operating temperature.
tings and instructions can also be carried out ered by the vehicle. Avoid high revs and heavy acceleration and
in the Easy Connect system.
The trip recorder shows the distance that has
do not make the engine work hard. »
been travelled since it was last reset. It is
115
Operation
Normal temperature moving. If the spoiler is damaged this can re- CAUTION
If in normal operations, the diodes light up duce the cooling effect, which could cause
Never run the fuel tank completely dry. An ir-
until the central zone, it means that the en- the engine to overheat. Seek specialist assis-
regular fuel supply could cause misfiring. In
gine has reached operating temperature. At tance.
this way the unburned fuel can reach the ex-
high outside temperatures and when making haust system, which could cause the catalytic
the engine work hard, the diodes may contin- converter to overheat resulting in damage.
ue lighting up and reach the upper zone. This Fuel level
is no cause for concern, provided the control
lamp does not light up on the instrument
panel digital display. Control lamps
Heat range Warning and control lamps
When the diodes light up in the upper area of
Read the additional information carefully
the display and the control lamp appears
››› page 43.
on the instrument panel display, the coolant
temperature is excessive ››› page 299. The control and warning lamps are indicators
of warnings, ››› , faults ››› or certain func-
CAUTION tions. Some control and warning lamps come
● To ensure a long useful life for the engine,
Fig. 119 Fuel gauge. on when the ignition is switched on, and
avoid high revs, driving at high speed and switch off when the engine starts running, or
making the engine work hard for approxi- The display 6 ››› Fig. 117 only works when while driving.
mately the first 15 minutes when the engine the ignition is switched on. When the display
reaches the reserve mark, the lower diode Depending on the model, additional text
is cold. The phase until the engine is warm al-
so depends on the outside temperature. If lights up in red and the control lamp ap- messages may be viewed on the instrument
necessary, use the engine oil temperature* pears ››› page 112. When the fuel level is very panel display. These may be purely informa-
››› page 39 as a guide. low, the lower diode flashes in red. tive or they may be advising of the need for
● Additional lights and other accessories in
action ››› page 112, Instruments.
The distance to empty fuel level is displayed
front of the air inlet reduce the cooling effect on the instrument panel 3 ››› Fig. 117. Depending upon the equipment fitted in the
of the coolant. At high outside temperatures vehicle, instead of a warning lamp, some-
and high engine loads, there is a risk of the The capacity of the fuel tank of your vehicle is times a symbol may be displayed on the in-
engine overheating. given in the Technical data section strument panel.
● The front spoiler also ensures proper distri- ››› page 53.
bution of the cooling air when the vehicle is When certain control and warning lamps are
lit, an audible warning is also heard.
116
Instruments and warning/control lamps
WARNING
Technical data
If the warning lamps and messages are ignor-
ed, the vehicle may stall in traffic, or may
cause accidents and severe injuries.
● Never ignore the warning lamps or text
messages.
● Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible.
● Park the vehicle away from traffic and en-
Advice
sure that there are no highly flammable ma-
terials under the vehicle that could come into
contact with the exhaust system (e.g. dry
grass, fuel).
● A faulty vehicle represents a risk of acci-
dent for the driver and for other road users. If
Operation
necessary, switch on the hazard warning
lamps and put out the warning triangle to ad-
vise other drivers.
● Before opening the bonnet, switch off the
engine and allow it to cool.
● In any vehicle, the engine compartment is a
Emergencies
hazardous area and could cause severe inju-
ries ››› page 295.
CAUTION
Failure to heed the control lamps and text
messages when they appear may result in
faults in the vehicle.
Safety
117
Operation
118
Communications and multimedia
Technical data
Steering wheel controls*
Operating the audio system + telephone with voice control
Advice
Operation
Fig. 120 Controls on the steering wheel.
The steering wheel includes a multifunction the audio, telephone and radio/navigation
module from where it is possible to control functions without needing to distract the
driver.
Emergencies
Button Radio Media (except AUX) AUX Telephonea) Navigationa)
Turn: Turn volume up/down Turn: Turn volume up/down Turn: Turn volume up/down Turn: Turn volume up/down Turn: Turn volume up/down
A
Press: Mute Press: Mute Press: Mute Press: Mute Press: Mute
Safety
B
ela). ela). ela). Hold down: reject an incoming ela).
Hold down: rediala) Hold down: rediala) Hold down: rediala) call/switch to private/redial Hold down: rediala)
mode
Change menu on instrument Change menu on instrument Change menu on instrument Change menu on instrument Change menu on instrument
E , F
panela) panela) panela) panela) panela)
G Enable/disable voice controla) Enable/disable voice controla) Enable/disable voice controla) No functionb) Enable/disable voice control
Turn: Acts upon the dash panel Turn: Acts upon the dash panel Turn: Acts upon the dash panel
Turn: Next/previous presetc) Turn: Next/previous songc) menu depending on where it is menu depending on where it is menu depending on where it is
Press: Acts on the MFD or con- Press: Acts on the MFD or con- located located located
H firms the menu option of the firms the menu option of the Press: Acts on the MFD or con- Press: Acts on the MFD or con- Press: Acts on the MFD or con-
dash panel depending on the dash panel depending on the firms the menu option of the firms the menu option of the firms the menu option of the
menu option menu option dash panel depending on the dash panel depending on the dash panel depending on the
menu option menu option menu option
a) According to the vehicle's equipment package.
b) When a call is being made, radio/media functionality (except AUX).
c) Only if the dash panel is in audio menu.
120
Communications and multimedia
Multimedia Connectivity Box* / Wireless Charger* With the Wireless Charger you only have the
Technical data
wireless charging function if your mobile de-
vice has Qi technology.
USB/AUX-INPort
The Connectivity Box/Wireless Charger is in
the storage compartment area of the centre
console ››› Fig. 123.
The operating description is located in the re-
Fig. 122 Related video spective Instruction Manuals of the audio
Advice
system or the navigation system.
Note
Your mobile device must support the Qi wire-
less inductive charging interface standard for
proper operation.
Operation
Fig. 121 Centre console: USB/AUX-IN input.
Emergencies
storage compartment area of the centre con-
sole ››› Fig. 121. Depending on the features and the country,
the vehicle may have one of these two op-
The operating description is located in the re- tions: Connectivity Box or Wireless Charger.
spective Instruction Manuals of the audio
system or the navigation system. With the Connectivity Box you can charge
your mobile device wirelessly with Qi1) tech-
nology, while also reducing the radiation in
Safety
the vehicle and getting better reception.
phone wirelessly.
121
Operation
Opening and closing The vehicle is unlocked again when the igni-
tion key is removed. Alternatively, the vehicle
the alarm from being triggered accidentally
››› page 133.
can also be unlocked via the central locking
Central locking system switch or by pulling one of the inside door Turn signals
handles. The Auto Lock function can be
The turn signals will flash twice when the ve-
Description switched on and off on the sound system or
hicle is unlocked and once when the vehicle
on the Easy Connect* system ››› page 125.
is locked.
Read the additional information carefully
››› page 13 In the event of an accident in which the air-
If it does not flash, this indicates that one of
bags inflate, the doors will be automatically
the doors, the rear lid or the bonnet is not
The vehicle can be locked and unlocked via unlocked to facilitate access and assistance.
closed correctly.
the central locking system. There are several
methods, depending on the vehicle equip- Anti-theft alarm system*
ment: Accidental lock-out
If the anti-theft alarm system senses interfer-
The central locking system prevents you from
● key with remote control ››› page 124, ence with the vehicle it triggers an audible
being locked out of the vehicle in the follow-
and visible alarm.
● lock on driver door (emergency opening ing situations:
››› page 13) or The anti-theft alarm system is automatically
● If the driver door is open, the vehicle can-
● interior central locking switch ››› page 125. switched on when locking the vehicle. It
switches off when the vehicle is unlocked not be locked with the central locking switch
from a distance. ››› page 125.
Unlocking one side of the vehicle only
When you lock the vehicle with the key, the When the driver door is unlocked with the Lock the vehicle with the remote control key,
doors and the rear lid are locked. When you key, you should switch on the ignition within when all the doors and the rear lid have been
open the door, you can either unlock only the 15 seconds. Otherwise the alarm will be trig- closed. This prevents the accidental locking
driver door, or all the vehicle doors. To select gered. On some export versions, the alarm is of the vehicle.
the required option, use Easy Connect* triggered immediately when you open a door.
››› page 125. WARNING
To deactivate the alarm, press the button
on the remote control key, or switch on the Do not leave anyone (especially children) in
Automatic locking (Auto Lock)* ignition. After a certain time, the alarm will the vehicle if it is locked from the outside and
automatically switch off. the anti-theft security system* is enabled, as
The Auto Lock function locks the doors and the doors and windows cannot then be
the rear lid when the vehicle exceeds a speed Switch off the vehicle interior monitoring and opened from the inside. Locked doors could
of about 15 km/h (9 mph). tow-away protection if you wish to prevent delay assistance in an emergency, potentially
putting lives at risk.
122
Opening and closing
Technical data
eral times, such as in convenience opening.
● Never leave any valuable items in the vehi-
cle unattended. Even a locked vehicle is not a If the vehicle key control lamp does not light
safe. up when the button is pressed, replace the
● If the diode on the driver door sill lights up key's battery ››› page 130.
for about 30 seconds when the vehicle is
locked, the central locking system or anti- Unfolding and folding the key shaft
theft alarm* is not working properly. You
Press button 1 ››› Fig. 124 or ››› Fig. 125 to
Advice
should have the fault repaired at a SEAT Offi-
unlock and unfold the key shaft.
cial Service or specialised workshop.
● The vehicle interior monitoring of the anti- Fig. 125 Vehicle key with alarm button. To fold the shaft away, press button 1 and
theft alarm* system will only function as in- fold the key shaft in until it locks in place.
tended if the windows and the sunroof* are Vehicle key
closed. With the vehicle key the vehicle may be Alarm button*
Operation
locked or unlocked remotely ››› page 122. Only press alarm button 2 in the event of an
The vehicle key includes an emitter and bat- emergency! When the alarm button is press-
Car key tery. The receiver is in the interior of the vehi- ed, the vehicle horn is heard and the turn sig-
cle. The range of the vehicle key with remote nals are switched on for a short time. When
control and new battery is several metres the alarm button is pressed again, the alarm
around the vehicle. is switched off.
Emergencies
If it is not possible to open or close the vehi- Spare key
cle using the remote control key, this should
be re-synchronised ››› page 131 or the bat- To obtain a spare key and other vehicle keys,
tery changed ››› page 130. the vehicle chassis number is required.
Different keys belonging to the vehicle may Each new key contains a microchip which
be used. must be coded with the data from the vehicle
electronic immobiliser. A vehicle key will not
Safety
Fig. 124 Vehicle key Control lamp on the vehicle key work if it does not contain a microchip or the
microchip has not been encoded. This is also
When a button on the vehicle key is pressed, true for keys which are specially cut for the
the control lamp flashes ››› Fig. 124 (arrow) vehicle. »
once briefly, but if the button is held down for
123
Operation
The vehicle keys or new spare keys can be against overloading. The vehicle is then un- ● Other functions of the remote control key
obtained from a SEAT Official Service, a spe- locked. Lock it if necessary. ››› page 137, Convenience opening/closing.
cialised workshop or an approved key service
qualified to create this kind of key.
New keys or spare keys must be synchron- Unlocking/Locking by remote control Selective unlocking system
ised before use ››› page 131.
Read the additional information carefully The selective unlocking system allows you to
CAUTION ››› page 13 only unlock the driver door and the fuel tank
All of the vehicle keys contain electronic com- flap. All other doors and the rear lid remain
The vehicle will be locked again automatical-
ponents. Protect them from damage, impacts locked.
ly if you do not open one of the doors or the
and humidity. rear lid within 30 seconds after unlocking the
Unlocking the driver door and tank flap
car. This function prevents the vehicle from
Note remaining unlocked if the unlocking button is – Press (once) the button on the remote
pressed by mistake. This does not apply if control key or turn the key once in the
● Only use the key button when you require
you press the button for at least one sec- opening direction.
the corresponding function. Pushing the but-
ton unnecessarily could accidentally unlock ond.
the vehicle or trigger the alarm. It is also pos- Unlocking all the doors, the rear lid and the
In vehicles with a security central locking
sible even when you are outside the radius of tank flap simultaneously.
feature (selective unlocking of side doors)
action. ››› page 124, when the button is pressed – Within 5 seconds, press (twice) the but-
● Key operation can be greatly influenced by once, only the driver door and the fuel tank ton on the remote control key, or turn the
overlapping radio signals close to the vehicle flap are unlocked. When the button is press- key twice within 5 seconds in the opening
working in the same range of frequencies, for ed a second time, all the vehicle doors are direction.
example, radio transmitters or mobile tele- unlocked.
phones. The anti-theft security system* and the anti-
● Obstacles between the remote control and WARNING theft alarm* are immediately disabled if you
the vehicle, bad weather conditions and dis- unlock only the driver door, without unlock-
charged batteries can considerably reduce Observe the safety warnings ››› in Descrip- ing the other doors.
the range of the remote control. tion on page 122.
In vehicles with Easy Connect*, you can pro-
● If the buttons of the vehicle key are press-
gramme the security central locking system
ed ››› Fig. 124 or ››› Fig. 125 or one of the cen- Note
directly ››› page 125.
tral locking buttons ››› page 125 is pressed ● Do not use the remote control key until the
repeatedly in short succession, the central vehicle is visible.
locking briefly disconnects as protection
124
Opening and closing
Programming the central locking sys- when you unlock the vehicle. In all the op- ● You can open the doors individually from
Technical data
tem tions, the fuel tank flap is also unlocked. the inside by pulling the inside door handle.
With the Driver setting, when you press the ● In the event of an accident in which the air-
You can use Easy Connect* to select which button on the remote control key only the bags inflate, doors locked from the inside will
doors are unlocked with the central locking door on the driver's side is unlocked. If that be automatically unlocked to facilitate access
system. Using the radio or the Easy Connect* button is pressed twice, the rest of the doors and assistance.
system, you can select whether the vehicle and the rear lid will be unlocked.
automatically closes with the “Auto Lock” WARNING
programme at speeds of more than 15 km/h In vehicles with a conventional key, turn the
Advice
● The central locking switch also operates
(9 mph). key in the door lock, in the direction of open-
ing, twice within 2 seconds. when the ignition is switched off and auto-
matically locks all the vehicle doors when the
Programming the unlocking of the doors (ve- If the button is pressed, all the vehicle button is pressed.
hicles with Easy Connect) doors are locked. At the same time, a confir- ● The central locking switch does not operate
– Select: button > SETTINGS function mation signal* is heard. if the vehicle is locked from the outside and
Operation
button > Opening and closing > Cen- Auto Lock/Locking while driving. If the anti-theft security system is switched on.
tral locking > Unlocking doors. you select on, all the vehicle doors are ● Locked doors could delay assistance in an
locked at speeds above 15 km/h (9 mph). emergency, potentially putting lives at risk.
Programming the Auto Lock (vehicles with Do not leave anyone, especially children, in
radio) the vehicle.
– Select: SETUP button > control button Central locking switch
Emergencies
Central locking > Locking while Note
driving. Read the additional information carefully Your vehicle will lock automatically when it
››› page 13 reaches a speed of about 15 km/h (9 mph)
Programming the Auto Lock (vehicles with (Auto Lock) ››› page 122. You can unlock the
Easy Connect) Please note the following when using the vehicle again using button on the central
central locking switch to lock your vehicle: locking switch.
– Select: button > SETTINGS function
button > Opening and closing > Cen- ● It is not possible to open the doors or the
Safety
tral locking > Locking while rear lid from the outside (for safety reasons,
driving. e.g. when stopped at traffic lights).
● The LED in the central locking switch lights
Unlocking doors You can choose to un-
lock all the doors or only the driver door up when all the doors are closed and locked.
125
Operation
126
Opening and closing
It does not matter where you carry the key, for ● Press & Drive: keyless starting of the en- On vehicles without a “Safe” security sys-
Technical data
instance whether it is in your jacket pocket or gine with the starter button ››› page 176. tem: shutting and locking doors (Keyless-Ex-
in a briefcase. it)
The central locking and locking systems oper-
Once the doors have been locked, they can- ● Switch the ignition off.
ate in the same way as a normal locking and
not be opened again immediately. This will unlocking system. Only the controls change. ● Close the driver's door.
enable you to check that the doors are prop- ● Touch (once) the locking sensor surface B
erly closed. Unlocking the vehicle is confirmed with a
double flash of the indicator lights; locking (arrow) on one of the front door handles. The
If you wish, when unlocking, you can unlock by a single flash. door that is used must be closed.
Advice
only the corresponding door or the entire ve-
hicle. The necessary adjustments can be per- If the vehicle is locked and then all doors and On vehicles with a “Safe” security system:
formed in vehicles with a driver information the rear lid are closed leaving the last key shutting and locking doors (Keyless-Exit)
system ››› page 31. used inside the vehicle and none outside,
the vehicle will not lock immediately. All the ● Switch the ignition off.
General information vehicle's indicator lights will flash four times. ● Close the driver's door.
Operation
The vehicle will lock again after a few sec- ● Touch (once) the sensor surface B (arrow)
If a valid key is in the proximity of the car, onds if you fail to open any door or the rear
››› Fig. 127 the Keyless Access locking and on one of the front door handles. The vehicle
lid. locks with the “Safe” ››› page 129 system.
starting system gives the key entry as soon
as one of the sensor surfaces on the door If you unlock the vehicle but fail to open any The door that is used must be closed.
handles is touched or the softtouch/handle door or the rear lid, the vehicle will lock again ● Touch (twice) the sensor surface B (arrow)
after a few seconds. of one of the front door handles to lock the
Emergencies
on the rear lid is operated. The following fea-
tures are then available without having to vehicle without activating the “Safe” security
use the vehicle key actively: Unlocking and opening the doors (Keyless- system ››› page 129.
Entry)
● Keyless-Entry: unlocking the vehicle using Unlocking and locking the rear lid
● Grip one of the front door handles. In doing
the handles of the front doors or the soft-
this, the sensor surface ››› Fig. 128 A (arrow) When the vehicle is locked, the rear lid auto-
touch/handle on the rear lid.
on the handle is touched and the vehicle un- matically unlocks on opening if ››› Fig. 127
● Keyless-Exit: locking the vehicle using the locks. there is a valid vehicle key in the proximity.
Safety
sensor of the driver or passenger door han- ● Open the door.
dle. Open or close the rear lid normally.
● Easy Open: opening the rear lid moving On vehicles with selective opening or info- After closing, the rear lid locks automatically.
one foot below the rear bumper. tainment system configuration, pulling the If the complete vehicle is unlocked, the rear
door handle twice will unlock all doors. lid will not lock automatically after closing it. »
127
Operation
Opening the rear lid with sensor-controlled While the rear lid is in motion (either opening order to enable engine ignition, the button
opening (Easy Open) or closing), it can be stopped with another on the key inside the vehicle needs to be
If there is a valid vehicle key in the proximity foot movement similar to the opening one pressed.
of ››› Fig. 127 the rear lid, it is possible to (provided a valid vehicle key is in the proxim-
unlock and open or close it moving one foot ity of the rear lid). Automatically disabling sensors
in the area of the sensors ››› Fig. 127 loca- The Easy Open feature is not available or only If the vehicle is not locked or unlocked for a
ted under the rear bumper. has limited availability in the following situa- long period of time, the proximity sensors on
tions (examples): the passenger doors are automatically disa-
● Switch the ignition off.
bled.
● Stand in front of the rear bumper, in the ● If the rear bumper is very dirty.
If one of the sensor surfaces on the door han-
middle. ● If the rear bumper is wet with salt water,
dles is often activated in an unusual manner
● With a brisk movement, bring your foot and e.g. after having driven on gritted roads. with the vehicle locked (e.g. by the branches
lower leg as close as you can to the bumper. ● If the electrical unlocking tow hitch is not of a bush rubbing against it), all proximity
The lower part of the leg needs to be close to covered. sensors are disabled for a certain period of
the upper sensor area and your foot to the ● If the vehicle has been equipped at a later time.
lower sensor area ››› Fig. 127 1 .
time with a tow bracket. Sensors will again be enabled:
● Quickly remove your foot and lower leg
from the sensor areas ››› Fig. 127 2 . The In the event of heavy rain, the Easy Open fea- ● After a time.
rear lid opens automatically. ture may take a little longer to open the boot
● OR: if the vehicle is unlocked with the but-
● If the rear lid fails to open, repeat the pro-
or automatically disable to avoid the boot
opening by accident, e.g. when the rain falls. ton on the key.
cedure after a few seconds. ● OR: if the rear lid is open.
The Easy Open function can be connected
The third brake light flashes once to show the and disconnected permanently in the info- ● OR: if the vehicle is unlocked manually with
boot has opened with the Easy Open func- tainment system by pressing the button the key.
tion. and the SETTINGS and the Opening and closing
The rear lid can be closed with another foot function buttons ››› page 31. Keyless Access temporary disconnection
movement similar to the opening one (provi- function
ded a valid vehicle key is in the proximity of What happens when locking the vehicle with There is a sequence of actions to be followed
the rear lid). a second key if you wish to temporarily deactivate Keyless
If there is a vehicle key inside the vehicle and Access. First of all, lock the vehicle with the
When closed, the rear lid automatically locks
it is locked from the outside with a second key. As of this moment, you have 5 seconds
if the vehicle has been locked beforehand
vehicle key, the key inside the vehicle is to perform the second locking action through
and there is no valid key inside.
blocked for engine ignition ››› page 176. In the door handle sensor.
128
Opening and closing
If this second action is performed more than ● Therefore, always make sure that there is ● If the message Keyless access system
Technical data
5 seconds after the vehicle is locked with the no unsupervised valid key in the area near faulty is displayed on the screen of the
key, it will not be possible to deactivate Key- the rear lid. dash panel, abnormalities may occur in the
less Access. ● Before carrying out any maintenance or re- operation of the Keyless Access system. Con-
pair work on the vehicle, always disable the tact a specialised workshop. SEAT recom-
Once Keyless Access has been temporarily
Easy Open feature on the infotainment sys- mends visiting a SEAT dealership for this.
deactivated, the vehicle can only be unlocked
using the key. The Keyless Access function tem. ● Depending on the function set on the info-
● Before washing the vehicle, always disable tainment system for the mirrors, the exterior
will be reactivated once it has been unlocked.
the Easy Open feature on the infotainment mirrors will unfold and the surround lighting
Advice
system. will come on when unlocking the vehicle us-
Convenience functions ing the sensor surface on the driver and pas-
● Before attaching a bicycle rack or a trailer
To close all the electric windows using the senger door handles ››› page 152.
››› page 267, always disable the Easy Open
convenience function, keep a finger on the feature on the information system. ● If there is no valid key inside the vehicle or
locking sensor surface ››› Fig. 128 B (arrow) the system fails to detect one, a warning will
of the door handle for a few seconds until the display on the dash panel screen. This could
Operation
windows have closed. CAUTION happen if any other radio frequency signal in-
The sensor surfaces on the door handles terferes with the key signal (e.g. from a mo-
The doors opened by touching the sensor bile device accessory) or if the key is covered
could engage if hit with a water jet or high
surface of the door handle depend on the by another object (e.g. an aluminium case).
pressure steam if there is a valid vehicle key
settings that have been activated in the info- ● If the sensors are very dirty, e.g. have a lay-
in the proximity. If at least one of the electric
tainment system with the button and the windows is open and the sensor surface B er of salt, the correct functioning of the sen-
Emergencies
SETTINGS and Opening and closing function but-
(arrow) on one of the handles is activated sors on the door handles may be affected. In
tons. continuously, all windows will close. this case, clean the vehicle.
● If the vehicle is equipped with an automatic
WARNING gearbox, it may only be locked in the gear
Note
If there is a valid key in the proximity of the stick is in position P.
● If the vehicle battery has little or no charge,
rear lid, in some cases the Easy Open func-
tion may be accidentally turned on and the or the vehicle key battery is almost or entire-
rear lid will open, for example, when sweep- ly out of charge, you will probably not be able
Anti-theft security system (Safelock)*
Safety
ing under the rear bumper, when directing a to lock or unlock the vehicle with the Keyless
water jet or high pressure steam to the area Access system. The vehicle can be unlocked
or when carrying out maintenance work or re- or locked manually ››› page 95. The following message is displayed on the in-
pairs in that area. If accidentally opened, the ● To control the proper locking of the vehicle, strument panel to remind the driver that
rear lid could injure somebody situated in its the release function is disabled for approx. 2 when the vehicle is closed from the outside,
area of operation or cause material damage. seconds. the anti-theft security system is switched on. »
129
Operation
Do not forget the Safelock. Replacing the battery Changing the battery
Please see Instruction Manual. The ● Unfold the vehicle key blade ››› page 123.
vehicle cannot be opened from inside. This
● Remove the cover from the back of the ve-
makes it more difficult for unauthorised per-
sons to break into the vehicle ››› in De- hicle key ››› Fig. 129 in the direction of the ar-
scription on page 122. row ››› .
● Extract the battery from the compartment
The anti-theft security system can be switch-
using a suitable thin object ››› Fig. 130.
ed off each time the vehicle is locked:
● Place the new battery in the compartment
● Turn the key a second time to the lock posi- as shown ››› Fig. 130, pressing in the oppo-
tion, in the door lock, within two seconds. If site direction to that shown by the arrow
necessary, remove the protective cover on ››› .
the driver door handle ››› page 13 or Fig. 129 Vehicle key: opening the battery ● Fit the cover as shown ››› Fig. 129, pressing
● Press on the remote control key for a compartment. it onto the vehicle key casing in the opposite
second time within 2 seconds. direction to that shown by the arrow until it
clicks into place.
The flashing frequency of the diode in the
door sill immediately confirms the process. CAUTION
Initially, the diode flashes in a fast sequence
● If the battery is not changed correctly, the
for a brief period, then it stops for approxi-
mately 30 seconds and, lastly continues vehicle key may be damaged.
flashing slowly. ● Use of unsuitable batteries may damage
the vehicle key. For this reason, always re-
place the dead battery with another of the
same voltage, size and specifications.
● When fitting the battery, check that the po-
Fig. 130 Vehicle key: removing the battery.
larity is correct.
SEAT recommends you ask a specialised
workshop to replace the battery. For the sake of the environment
The battery is located to the rear of the vehi- Please dispose of your used batteries correct-
cle key, under a cover. ly and with respect for the environment.
130
Opening and closing
Synchronising the vehicle key The childproof lock prevents the rear doors The childproof lock can be activated or deac-
Technical data
from being opened from the inside. This sys- tivated by inserting the key in the groove
If the button is pressed frequently outside tem prevents minors from opening a door ac- when the door is open, as described above.
of the vehicle range, it is possible that the ve- cidentally while the vehicle is running.
hicle can no longer be locked or unlocked us-
This function is independent of the vehicle
ing the key. In this case, the key must be re-
synchronised as described below:
electronic opening and locking systems. It Anti-theft alarm system*
only affects rear doors. It can only be activa-
● Unfold the vehicle key blade ››› page 123. ted and deactivated manually, as described Description
Advice
below:
● If necessary, remove the cover from the
driver door lever ››› page 13. The anti-theft alarm makes it more difficult to
Activating the childproof lock break into the vehicle or steal it.
● Press the button on the vehicle key. For
– Unlock the vehicle and open the door in The anti-theft alarm is automatically turned
this, it must remain with the vehicle.
which you wish to activate the childproof on when the vehicle is locked with the key.
● Open the vehicle within one minute using
lock.
Operation
the key blade. The key has been synchron- ● The turn signal light will flash twice on
ised. – With the door open, rotate the groove in
opening and deactivating the alarm.
the door using the ignition key, clockwise
● If necessary, fit the cap.
for the left hand side doors ››› Fig. 131 and ● The turn signal light will flash once on clos-
anti-clockwise for the right hand side ing and activating the alarm.
doors.
Childproof lock When does the system trigger an alarm?
Emergencies
Deactivating the childproof lock The anti-theft alarm siren will be triggered for
– Unlock the vehicle and open the door about 30 seconds accompanied by sound
whose childproof lock you want to deacti- and optical (flashing) warning signals and
vate. will be repeated about ten times when the
vehicle is locked and the following unauthor-
– With the door open, rotate the groove in
ised actions are attempted:
the door using the ignition key, anti-clock-
Safety
wise for the left hand side doors ››› Fig. 131 ● Opening a door that is mechanically un-
and clockwise for the right hand side locked using the vehicle key without switch-
doors. ing on the ignition in the next 15 seconds (in
certain markets, such as the Netherlands,
Fig. 131 Childproof lock on the left hand side
Once the childproof lock is activated, the there is no 15 second waiting time and the »
door. door can only be opened from the outside.
131
Operation
alarm is activated immediately on opening for a long period of time. The alarm system Activation
the door). remains activated. – It is automatically switched on when the
● A door is opened. ● If, after the audible warning goes off, an- anti-theft alarm is activated.
● The bonnet is opened. other monitored area is accessed (e.g. the
rear lid is opened after a door has been Deactivation
● The rear lid is opened.
opened), the alarm is triggered again.
● When the ignition is switched on with a – Open the vehicle with the key, either me-
● The anti-theft alarm is not activated when
non-authorised key. chanically or by pressing the button on
the vehicle is locked from within using the
the remote control. The time period from
● When the vehicle battery is disconnected. central locking button .
when the door is opened until the key is in-
● Movement inside the vehicle (in vehicles ● If the driver door is unlocked mechanically serted in the contact should not exceed 15
with interior monitoring ››› page 133). with the key, only the driver door is unlocked, seconds, otherwise the alarm will be trig-
the rest of the doors remain locked. Only
● When the vehicle is towed (in vehicles with gered.
when the ignition has been turned on will the
anti-tow system ››› page 133). other doors be available - but not unlocked - – Press the button on the remote control
● When the vehicle is raised (in vehicles with and the central locking button will be activa- twice. The volumetric sensor and tilt sen-
anti-tow system ››› page 133). ted. sors will be deactivated. The alarm system
● When the vehicle is transported on a ferry ● If the vehicle battery is run down or flat remains activated.
then the anti-theft alarm will not operate cor-
or by rail (vehicles with an anti-tow system or The vehicle interior monitoring and the anti-
rectly.
vehicle interior monitoring ››› page 133). tow system are automatically switched on
● Vehicle monitoring remains active even if
● When a trailer connected to the anti-theft again next time the vehicle is locked.
the battery is disconnected or not working for
alarm system is disconnected. any reason. The vehicle interior monitoring and anti-tow
● The alarm is triggered immediately if one of sensor (tilt sensor) are automatically switch-
How to turn OFF the alarm the battery cables is disconnected while the ed on when the anti-theft alarm is switched
Unlock the vehicle with the unlocking button alarm system is active. on. In order to activate it, all the doors and
on the key or turn on the ignition with a valid the rear lid must be closed.
key.
If you wish to switch off the vehicle interior
Vehicle interior monitoring and anti- monitoring and the anti-tow system, it must
Note
tow system* be done each time that the vehicle is locked;
● After 28 days, the indicator light will be if not, they will be automatically switched on.
switched off to prevent the battery from ex- It is a monitoring or control function incorpo-
hausting if the vehicle has been left parked rated in the anti-theft alarm* which detects The vehicle interior monitoring and the anti-
unauthorised vehicle entry by means of ultra- tow system should be switched off if animals
sound. are left inside the locked vehicle (otherwise,
132
Opening and closing
their movements will trigger the alarm) or ● The vibration of a mobile phone left inside tion are switched off until the next time the
Technical data
when, for example, the vehicle is transported the vehicle may cause the vehicle interior door is opened.
or has to be towed with only one axle on the monitoring alarm to trigger, as both sensors
ground. react to movements and shakes inside the ve- If the anti-theft security system (Safelock)*
hicle. ››› page 129 is switched off, the vehicle interi-
False alarms or monitoring and the tow-away protection
● If on activating the alarm, any door or the
Interior monitoring will only operate correctly are automatically switched off.
rear lid is open, only the alarm will be activa-
if the vehicle is completely closed. Please ob- ted. The vehicle interior monitoring and the
serve related legal requirements. anti-tow system will only be activated once WARNING
Advice
all the doors are closed (including the rear Observe the safety warnings ››› in Descrip-
The following cases may cause a false alarm: lid). tion on page 122.
● Open windows (partially or fully).
● Panoramic/tilting sunroof open (partially or
Deactivating the vehicle interior moni-
completely).
toring and anti-tow systems*
Rear lid (luggage compart-
Operation
● Movement of objects inside the vehicle, ment)
such as loose papers, items hanging from When the vehicle is locked, the alarm will be
the rear vision mirror (air fresheners), etc. triggered if movements are detected in the Related video
interior (e.g. by animals) or if the vehicle's in-
Note clination is changed (e.g. during transport).
You can prevent the alarm from being trig-
Emergencies
● If the vehicle is relocked and the alarm is
activated without the volumetric sensor func- gered accidentally by switching off the vehi-
tion, relocking will activate the alarm with all cle interior monitoring and/or tow-away pro-
its functions, except the volumetric sensor. tection.
This function is reactivated when the alarm is
switched on again, unless it is deliberately ● To switch off the interior monitoring and Fig. 132 Handsfree
switched off. tow-away protection, switch off the ignition
● If the alarm has been triggered by the volu- and, using the Infotainment system, select:
Safety
metric sensor, this will be indicated by a button > SETTINGS function button > Open-
flashing of the warning lamp on the driver ing and closing > Central locking > Switch off
door when the vehicle is opened. The flash is alarm.
different to the flash indicating the alarm is ● When the vehicle is locked now, the vehicle
activated.
interior monitoring and the tow-away protec-
133
Operation
Rear lid with electric opening and the handle of the rear lid. The rear lid is un- ● OR: move the rear lid with the hand in the
closing* locked if an authorised key in the proximity of direction of closing until it closes automati-
the vehicle is recognised. cally.
● OR: press the button on the centre console ● The rear lid goes down automatically to the
for at least one second ››› Fig. 134. The but- final position and also closes automatically
ton also works when the ignition is switched ››› .
off.
● OR: press and hold the vehicle key but- Interrupting opening or closing
ton for approx. 1 second. If the vehicle is After beginning to open or close the rear lid,
locked, unlock the rear lid only (the doors re- the action can be halted by pressing one of
main locked). the buttons.
● OR: on vehicles with Keyless Access and
Continue opening or closing the rear lid by
controlled opening sensors you can open the hand. To do this, some force will have to be
Fig. 133 Rear lid open: button to close the rear lid by moving one foot in the area of the
rear lid immediately. used.
sensors located below the rear bumper (Easy
Open). The rear lid opens automatically. If you press one of the buttons again, the
rear lid will move again in the exit direction.
Closing luggage lid If the rear lid finds resistance or an obstacle
● Briefly press the button on the rear lid during the automatic opening or closing,
››› Fig. 133 ››› . opening or closing will be interrupted imme-
● OR: press the button located on the
diately. For the closing process, the rear lid
opens again slightly.
centre console until the rear lid is closed
››› Fig. 134. ● Check why it has not been possible to open
● OR: on vehicles with Keyless Access, press or close the rear lid.
and hold the vehicle key button until the ● Try to open or close the rear lid again.
Fig. 134 Centre console: button to open and rear lid is closed or move one foot in the area
● If necessary, the rear lid can be opened or
close rear lid. of the sensors located below the rear bumper
closed by hand using reasonable force.
(Easy Open) ››› page 126. The vehicle key
Open rear lid must not be further than approx. 1.5 m from
Special feature for pulling a trailer
● Unlock the vehicle ››› page 122 and briefly the luggage compartment and should not be
press the handle of the rear lid. On vehicles in the vehicle. If the factory-fitted towing bracket is electri-
with Keyless Access you can directly press cally connected to a trailer ››› page 267, the
134
Opening and closing
electric rear lid can only be opened or closed ● Release the rear lid and open it to the or, after opening, it may lower by itself due to
Technical data
with the keys available within it. memorised height. the extra weight and cause serious injury.
● Lift the rear lid by hand until it stops. To do ● Never open the rear lid when there is a lot
Acoustic warnings this, some force will have to be used. of snow on it or when carrying a load (e.g. on
Throughout the process of opening or closing ● Press the ››› Fig. 133 button available in a rack).
the rear lid, audible warnings can be heard. the rear lid for at least 3 seconds. ● Before opening the rear lid, remove the
Exception: when the rear lid is opened man- ● This resets and memorises the factory-set
snow or the load.
ually using the handle or the Easy Open func-
opening angle. Memorisation is indicated by
tion with the movement of the foot or closed
Advice
blinking of the hazard warning lights and an WARNING
using the button available within it
audible warning. If the rear lid is closed incorrectly or without
››› Fig. 133.
due care, it could result in serious injury.
Automatic protection against overheating ● Never leave the vehicle unattended or allow
Modifying and memorising the opening an-
gle If the system is operated repeatedly in a children to play inside or next to it, especially
short space of time, it automatically switches if the rear lid is open. Children could enter
Operation
If the space behind or above the vehicle is the luggage compartment, close the rear lid
off to prevent overheating.
less than the travel area of the rear lid, you and become trapped. A locked vehicle can
can change the opening angle of the rear lid. Once the system is cool again, the function reach extremely high and low temperatures,
can be reused. Until then the rear lid can only depending on the time of year, thus causing
To memorise a new opening angle, the rear
be opened and closed by hand using reason- serious injuries, illness or even death.
lid must be open at least halfway.
able force.
Emergencies
● Interrupt the opening process in the de- If with the rear lid open the vehicle battery is CAUTION
sired position. disconnected ››› page 302 or the corre- Before opening or closing the rear lid, make
● Press the ››› Fig. 133 button available in sponding fuse burns out ››› page 100, the sure that there is enough space to open or
the rear lid for at least 3 seconds. system will have to be reset. This requires close it, e.g. when pulling a trailer or in a ga-
closing the rear lid completely once. rage.
The opening angle is memorised. Memorisa-
tion is indicated by blinking of the hazard Emergency unlocking
Safety
warning lights and an audible warning.
››› page 15 Tailgate automatic lock
Resetting and memorising the opening angle
WARNING Where the vehicle has been locked by press-
For the rear lid to reopen completely, the ing the button on the remote control with
If a lot of snow builds up on the rear lid or it
opening angle must be reset and memorised the rear lid open, the rear lid will lock auto-
is heavily loaded, the rear lid may not open
again. matically when closed. »
135
Operation
The automatic tailgate locking time extension ● Ensure the rear lid is locked after closing it. Read the additional information carefully
function can be activated. Where this func- If not, it may open unexpectedly while driv- ››› page 16
tion is activated and once the rear lid has ing. The front and rear electric windows can be
been unlocked by pressing the button on ● Closing the rear lid without observing and operated by using the controls on the driver
the remote control key ››› page 124, the rear ensuring it is clear could cause serious injury door. The other doors each have a switch for
lid can be re-opened for a certain length of to you and to third parties. Make sure that no their own window.
time. one is in the path of the rear lid.
Where required, the automatic tailgate lock- ● Never drive with the rear lid open or half- Always close the windows fully if you park
ing time extension function can be activated closed, exhaust gases may penetrate into the the vehicle or leave it unattended ››› .
or deactivated at an Authorised SEAT Service, interior of the vehicle. Danger of poisoning!
You can use the electric windows for approx.
which will provide all the necessary informa- ● If you only open the rear lid, do not leave 10 minutes after switching off the ignition if
tion. the key inside. The vehicle cannot be opened neither the driver door nor the front passen-
if the key is left inside. ger door has been opened and the key has
Before the vehicle locks automatically, there
is a risk of intruders getting into the vehicle. not been removed from the ignition.
Therefore, we recommend you always lock
the vehicle by pressing the button on the Electric windows Safety switch *
remote control or by using the central locking Safety switch 5 on the driver door can be
button. Electric opening and closing of win- used to disable the electric window buttons
dows in the rear doors.
WARNING
Safety switch not pressed: buttons on rear
Observe the safety warnings ››› in Intro- doors are activated.
duction on page 95.
● Always close the rear lid properly. Risk of Safety switch pressed: buttons on rear doors
accident or injury. are deactivated.
● The rear lid must not be opened when the The safety control symbol lights up in yel-
reverse or rear fog lights are lit. This may low if the buttons on the rear doors are
damage the tail lights. switched off.
● Do not close the rear lid by pushing it down
with your hand on the rear window. The glass WARNING
could smash. Risk of injury! Observe the safety warnings ››› in Intro-
Fig. 135 Detail of the driver door: controls for duction on page 95.
the windows.
136
Opening and closing
● Incorrect use of the electric windows can Roll-back function Convenience opening/closing
Technical data
result in injury.
● Never close the rear lid without observing
The roll-back function reduces the risk of in- Use the convenience opening/closing func-
and ensuring it is clear, to do otherwise could jury when the electric windows close. tion to easily open/close all the windows
cause serious injury to you and third parties. from the outside.
● If a window is obstructed when closing au-
Make sure that no one is in the path of a win-
tomatically, the window stops at this point Convenience open function
dow.
and lowers immediately ››› .
● If the ignition is switched on, the electric – Press and hold the button on the remote
equipment could be activated with risk of in- ● Next, check why the window does not close
control key until all the windows have
Advice
jury, for example, in the electric windows. before attempting it again.
reached the desired position, or
● The doors can be locked using the remote ● If you try within the following 10 seconds
– First unlock the vehicle using the button
control key. This could become an obstacle and the window closes again with difficulty
for assistance in an emergency situation. or there is an obstruction, the automatic clos- on the remote control key and then keep
ing will stop working for 10 seconds. the key in the driver door lock until all the
● Therefore always take the key with you
windows have reached the required posi-
Operation
when you leave the vehicle. ● If the window is still obstructed, the win- tion.
● The electric windows will work until the ig- dow will stop at this point.
nition has been switched off and one of the ● If there is no obvious reason why the win- Convenience close function
front doors has been opened. dow cannot be closed, try to close it again by – Press and hold the button on the remote
● If necessary, use the safety switch to disa- pulling the tab within ten seconds. The win-
ble the rear electric windows. Make sure that control key until all the windows are closed
dow closes with maximum force. The roll-
››› , or
Emergencies
they have been disabled. back function is now deactivated.
● If more than 10 seconds pass, the window – Lock the driver's door with the key and hold
Note will open fully when you operate one of the the key in the <zitat>lock</zitat> position un-
buttons. One-touch closing is reactivated. til all the windows are closed
If the window is not able to close because it
is stiff or because of an obstruction, the win-
dow will automatically open again WARNING Programming convenience opening in the
››› page 137. If this happens, check why the Easy Connect*
Observe the safety warnings ››› in Electric
Safety
window could not be closed before attempt- – Select: button > SETTINGS function
opening and closing of windows on page 136.
ing to close it again. button > Opening and closing > Open-
● The roll-back function does not prevent fin-
ing the window by holding down
gers or other parts of the body getting
pinched against the window frame. Risk of button or > Front window on/off. »
accident.
137
Operation
138
Opening and closing
Note door and the front passenger door are not Stopping the automatic operation by adjust-
Technical data
opened. ing the tilted position of the sunroof or by
● Leaves and other loose objects that accu-
closing the sunroof
mulate on the sunroof rails should be regular- The sun blind automatically opens along with
ly cleaned away either by hand or with a vac- the sunroof if completely closed or if in front ● Press button A or B again.
uum. of the sunroof. The sun blind remains in the
● If the sunroof does not work correctly, the previous position and does not automatically Opening the sunroof
anti-trap function will not work either. Con- close with the sunroof. The sun blind can on- ● Press button C backwards to the first lev-
tact a specialised workshop. ly be closed completely once the sunroof has el.
Advice
● Some settings can be saved in user ac- been closed.
● Automatic operation to comfort position:
counts of the personalisation function The button ››› Fig. 136 has two levels. The briefly press button C backwards to the sec-
››› page 31. first level switches the sunroof to the tilted ond level.
position, opening or closing it fully or partial-
ly. Closing the sunroof
Opening and closing the sunroof
Operation
On the second level, the sunroof automatical- ● Press button D forwards to the first level.
ly moves to the corresponding final position ● Automatic operation: briefly press button
after briefly pressing the button. Activating D forwards to the second level.
the button again stops the automatic func-
tion.
Stopping the automatic operation during the
opening or closing
Emergencies
Adjusting the tilt position of the sunroof
● Press button C or D again.
● Press the rear part of the button B to the
first level.
● Automatic operation: briefly press the rear
part of button B to the second level.
Fig. 136 On the interior roof lining: sunroof
button. Closing the sunroof from a tilted position
Safety
● Press the front part of the button A to the
The sunroof only works when the ignition is
first level.
switched on. Once the ignition has been
switched off, you can still open or close the ● Automatic operation: briefly press the front
sunroof for a few minutes provided the driver part of the button A to the second level.
139
Operation
Opening and closing the sun blind minutes provided the driver door and the ● Check why the sunroof or sun blind do not
front passenger door are not opened. close.
● Try to close the sunroof or sun blind again.
Opening the sun blind
● If the sunroof or sun blind cannot be closed
● Press button 1 to the first level. due to an obstacle or some resistance, it
● Automatic operation: briefly press button stops at the corresponding position and then
1 to the second level. opens. For automatic closing, a new closing
attempt might take place.
Closing the sun blind ● If the sunroof or sun blind is still unable to
● Press button 2 to the first level. close, close it without the anti-trap function.
● Automatic operation: briefly press button
Closing the sunroof or sun blind without the
Fig. 137 On the interior roof lining: switches 2 to the second level.
for the sun blind. anti-trap function
Stopping the automatic operation during the ● Sunroof: within approx. 5 seconds of hav-
The electrical sun blind works when the igni- opening or closing ing activated the anti-trap function, press the
tion is switched on. button ››› Fig. 136 to the second level in
● Press button 1 or 2 again.
When the sunroof is in its most tilted posi- the direction of arrow ››› Fig. 136 D until the
tion, the sun blind automatically goes into a sunroof closes completely.
Note
ventilation position. The sun blind remains in ● Sun blind: within approx. 5 seconds of hav-
When the sunroof is open, the electric sun
this position also with the sunroof closed. ing activated the anti-trap function, press
blind can only be closed to the front edge of
button ››› Fig. 137 2 until the sun blind
Buttons ››› Fig. 137 1 and 2 have two lev- the sunroof.
closes completely.
els. The first level opens or closes the sun
blind fully or partially. ● The sunroof or sun blind close without the
anti-trap function intervening!
By briefly pressing the button to the second Anti-trap function of the panoramic
● If the sunroof or sun blind will still not
level, the sun blind automatically moves to sliding sunroof and the sun blind
close, visit a specialised workshop.
the corresponding final position. Activating
the button again stops the automatic func- The anti-trap function can reduce the risk of
injury when closing the sunroof and the sun WARNING
tion.
blind ››› . If the sunroof or sun blind en- Closing the sunroof or sun blind without the
Once the ignition has been switched off, you counter resistance or an obstacle when clos- anti-trap function can cause serious injuries.
can still open or close the sun blind for a few ing, they reopen immediately.
140
Lights and visibility
Technical data
and sun blind. ● When the light switch is in position or
● No person should ever remain in the way of .
the sunroof or sun blind, especially when
Lights
closing without the anti-trap function. WARNING
● The anti-trap function does not prevent fin-
Related video
The side lights or daytime running lights are
gers or other parts of the body from becom- not bright enough to illuminate the road
ing trapped against the roof frame and inju- ahead and to ensure that other road users are
ries occurring.
Advice
able to see you.
● Always use your dipped beam head lights if
it is raining or if visibility is poor.
Operation
If the headlights are set too high and not
used correctly, there is a risk of dazzling or
Side light and dipped beam headlight distracting other road users. This could result
in a serious accident.
Read the additional information carefully ● Always make sure that the headlights are
››› page 28 correctly adjusted.
The driver is personally responsible for the
Emergencies
correct use and adjustment of the lights in all Note
situations.
The legal requirements regarding the use of
vehicle lights in each country must be ob-
Audible warnings to advise the driver that
served.
the lights have not been switched off
If the key is not in the ignition and the driver
door is open, an audible warning signal is
Safety
heard in the following cases: this is a remind-
er to turn off the lights.
141
Operation
Daytime running lights Turn signal and main beam lever ● As soon as you have finished changing
lane, overtaking or turning, switch the turn
The daytime running lights consist of individ- Read the additional information carefully signal off.
ual lights, integrated in the front headlights. ››› page 29
By connecting the daytime running lights,
Push the lever all the way down to turn off WARNING
these lights are switched on1) ››› .
the corresponding function. Incorrect use of the headlights may cause ac-
The daytime running lights switch on every cidents and serious injury, as the main beam
time the ignition is switched on, if the switch Convenience turn signals may distract or dazzle other drivers.
is in positions or , according to the level
For the convenience turn signals, move the
of exterior lighting.
lever as far as possible upwards or down- Note
When the light switch is in position , a wards and release the lever. The turn signal
● If the convenience turn signals are operat-
light sensor automatically switches dipped will flash three times.
ing (three flashes) and the other convenience
beam on and off (including the control and turn signals are switched on, the active part
The convenience turn signals are activated
instrument lighting) or the daytime running stops flashing and only flashes once in the
and deactivated in the Easy Connect system
lights depending on the level of exterior new part selected.
via the button and the SETTINGS function
lighting.
button ››› page 118. ● The turn signal only works when the igni-
tion is switched on. The hazard warning
WARNING In vehicles that do not have the correspond- lights also work when the ignition is switch-
● Never drive with daytime lights if the road
ing menu, this function can be deactivated in ed off.
is not well lit due to weather or lighting con- a specialised workshop.
● If a trailer turn signal malfunctions, the
ditions. Daytime lights do not provide control lamp will stop flashing (trailer turn
enough light to illuminate the road properly WARNING
signals) and the vehicle turn signal will flash
or be seen by other road users. Improper or lack of use of the turn signals, or at double speed.
● On vehicles with rear lights with bulbs, forgetting to deactivate them can confuse ● The main beam headlights can only be
when activating the daytime running light other road users. This could result in a seri- switched on if the dipped beam headlights
the rear lights are not switched on. A vehicle ous accident. are already on.
which does not have the rear lights on may ● Always give warning when you are going to ● In cold or damp weather conditions, the
not be visible to other drivers in the dark- change lane, overtake or when turning, acti- headlights, tail lights and turn signals may
ness, in the case of heavy rain or in condi- vating the turn signal in good time. mist up inside temporarily. This is normal and
tions of poor visibility.
in no way effects the useful life of the vehicle there are no changes in brightness, and not, Switching the main beam assist on and off
Technical data
lighting system. for example when it is foggy.
Func- Use
tion
Automatic dipped beam control * Main beam assist* – Switch the ignition on and turn the light
switch to position .
Activate: – From the base position, move the main
The automatic dipped beam control is merely Main beam assist (Light Assist)
beam and turn signal lever forwards
intended as an aid and is not able to recog- The main beam assist acts within the limits ››› page 142. When the warning lamp is
Advice
nise all driving situations. of the system and depending on environmen- displayed on the instrument panel display,
tal and traffic conditions. Once switched on, the main beam assist is switched on.
When the light switch is in position , the
the system is activated as of a speed of
vehicle lights and the instrument panel and – Switch off the ignition.
about 60 km/h (37 mph) and is deactivated – OR: turn the light switch to a different po-
switch lighting switch on and off automatical-
below about 30 km/h (18 mph) ››› . sition to ››› page 141.
ly in the following situations ››› in Daytime
To switch – OR: with main beam on, move the main
running lights on page 142: When the system is activated and the camera
Operation
system beam and turn signal lever backwards.
detects other vehicles that may be dazzled, off: – OR: move the main beam and turn the
Automatic switching Automatic switching the main beam is automatically switched off. signal lever forwards to manually switch
on off Otherwise, the main beam is automatically the main beam on. The main beam assist
switched on. will then be deactivated.
The photo sensor detects When adequate lighting is
darkness, for example, detected. The main beam assist generally detects illu-
Emergencies
when driving through a minated areas and deactivates the main Malfunctions
tunnel. beam when passing through a town, for ex- The following conditions may prevent the
The rain sensor detects When the windscreen wip- ample. main beam headlight control from turning off
rain and activates the ers have been inactive for the headlights in time or from turning off al-
windscreen wipers. a few minutes. together:
● In poorly lit towns with highly reflective
WARNING
signs.
Safety
If the road is not well lit and other road users
● Other insufficiently lit road users (such as
cannot see the vehicle well enough or at all,
accidents may occur. pedestrians or cyclists).
● The automatic dipped beam control () ● On tight bends and steep slopes (bumps)
only switches on the dipped beam when and when oncoming vehicles are partially ob-
scured. »
143
Operation
● When the drivers of other oncoming vehi- cle lighting system, for example, if additional Fog lights
cles (such as a truck) can see over a guard headlights are installed.
rail in the centre of the road.
● If the camera is damaged or the power sup- CAUTION
ply is cut off.
To avoid affecting the operation of the sys-
● In fog, snow and heavy rain. tem, take the following points into considera-
● With dust and sand turbulence. tion:
● With loose gravel in the field of vision of ● Clean the field of vision of the camera regu-
the camera. larly and make sure it is free of snow and ice.
● When the field of vision of the camera is ● Do not cover the field of vision of the cam-
era.
misted up, dirty or covered by stickers, snow,
ice, etc. ● Check that the windscreen is not damaged Fig. 139 Dash panel: light control.
in the area of the field of vision of the camera.
WARNING The warning lamps or also show, on the
Note light switch or instrument panel, when the
The convenience features of the main beam
assist should not encourage the taking of
fog lights are on.
Main beam and headlight flasher can be
risks. The system is not a replacement for turned on and off manually at any time with ● Switching on front fog lights* : pull the
driver concentration. the turn signal and main beam lever light switch to the first point ››› Fig. 139 1 ,
● You are always in control of the main beam ››› page 142. from positions , or .
and adapting it to the light, visibility and traf-
● Switching on the rear fog light : com-
fic conditions.
pletely pull the light switch 2 from position
● It is possible that the main beam headlight
, or .
control does not recognise all driving situa-
tions and is limited under certain circumstan- ● To switch off the fog lights, press the light
ces. switch or turn it to position .
● When the field of vision of the camera is
dirty, covered or damaged, operation of the
main beam control may be affected. This also
applies when changes are made to the vehi-
144
Lights and visibility
Note Vehicle with halogen headlights ● Switch off the engine and remove the key
Technical data
In the “Coming Home” function, the daytime from the ignition.
The rear fog light can dazzle drivers behind
you. You should use the rear fog light only running lights (DRL), the rear side lights and ● Activate the headlight flashers for approxi-
when visibility is very poor. For this reason, if the licence plate lights are turned on. mately 1 second.
you exceed approximately 60 km/h (38 mph), ● Activated for any position of the rotary light
the instrument panel will display the follow- Vehicle with full-LED headlights switch.
ing warming: Switch off the fog
In the “Coming Home” function, the dipped ● When the car door is opened, the “Coming
light!
beams, the daytime running lights (DRL), the Home” lighting comes on. The headlights are
Advice
rear side lights, the number plate lights and turned off 60 seconds after the vehicle door
the courtesy lights in the rear view mirror is opened.
Cornering lights*1) (“Welcome Light”) switch on.
Deactivation
When turning slowly or on very tight bends, Automatic* activation of “Coming Home” ● If no door has been closed, they go out au-
the cornering lights are activated automati- For vehicles with a light and rain sensor (rota- tomatically after 60 seconds.
Operation
cally. The cornering lights may be integrated ry light switch in position ).
in the fog lights and are switched on only at ● After the last door has been closed, the
speeds of less than 40 km/h (25 mph). ● Switch off the engine and remove the key headlights will be switched off after the
from the ignition with the rotary light switch “Coming Home” delay (as established in the
When reverse gear is engaged, the cornering radio menu) has elapsed.
lights on both sides of the vehicle switch on, in position ››› page 28.
● The automatic “Coming Home” function is ● On turning the light switch to position
in order to better illuminate the area for park-
Emergencies
ing. only active when the light sensor detects ››› page 28.
darkness. ● When the ignition is switched on (when
● When the car door is opened, the “Coming starting the engine).
Function “Coming home” Home” lighting comes on.
Safety
Home” and/or “Leaving Home” delay time
ry light switch without position ).
may also be set (default: 30 sec).
Function “Leaving Home” ● When the vehicle is locked using the re- 2. Press the button to switch on the hazard
mote control. warning lights ››› .
The “Leaving Home” function is only availa- ● When the light control is switched into a 3. Switch the ignition off.
ble for vehicles with a light and rain sensor position other than .
(rotary light switch in position ). 4. Apply the handbrake.
● With the ignition is switched on.
This function may be connected/disconnec- 5. For a manual gearbox, engage 1st gear;
ted through the radio menu. The “Leaving for an automatic gearbox, move the gear
Home” function switch-off delay may also be Hazard warning lights lever to P.
set (default: 30 sec).
6. Use the warning triangle to draw the atten-
tion of other road users to your vehicle.
Vehicle with halogen headlights
7. Always take the vehicle key with you when
In the “Leaving Home” function, the daytime
you leave the vehicle.
running lights (DRL), the rear side lights and
the licence plate lights are switched on. All turn signals flash simultaneously when
the hazard warning lights are switched on.
Vehicle with full-LED headlights The two turn signal turn signal lamps
In the “Leaving Home” function, the dipped and the turn signal lamp in the switch will
beams, the daytime running lights (DRL), the flash at the same time. The simultaneous
rear side lights, the number plate lights and hazard warning lights also work when the ig-
the courtesy lights in the rear view mirror Fig. 140 Dash panel: switch for hazard warn- nition is switched off.
(“Welcome Light”) switch on. ing lights.
Emergency braking warning
Read the additional information carefully
Activation If the vehicle brakes suddenly and continu-
››› page 29
● When the vehicle is unlocked using the re- ously at a speed of more than 80 km/h (50
mote control. The hazard warning lights are used to draw mph), the brake light flashes several times
the attention of other road users to your vehi- per second to warn the vehicles driving be-
● The “Leaving Home” function is only activa-
cle in emergencies. hind. If you continue braking, the hazard
ted when the rotary light switch is in position
If your vehicle breaks down: warning lights will come on automatically
and the light sensor detects darkness.
when the vehicle comes to a standstill. They
1. Park your vehicle at a safe distance from switch off automatically when the vehicle
Deactivation moving traffic. starts to move again.
● When the “Leaving Home” delay period
ends (default: 30 sec).
146
Lights and visibility
WARNING Parking light on both sides When a car that is manufactured in a country
Technical data
that drives on the right travels to a country
● The risk of an accident increases if your ve-
With the ignition switched off and the light that drives on the left (or vice versa), it is nor-
hicle breaks down. Always use the hazard
switch in position , when locking the vehi- mally necessary to cover part of the headlight
warning lights and a warning triangle to draw
the attention of other road users to your sta-
cle from the outside, the parking lights on bulbs with stickers or to change the adjust-
tionary vehicle. both sides of the vehicle light up. In doing ment of the headlights to avoid dazzling oth-
so, only the side lights of both headlights er drivers.
● Due to the high temperatures that the cata-
light up, and additionally the tail lights will
lytic converter can reach, never park in an In such cases, the regulations specify certain
do so partially.
area where the catalytic converter could come
Advice
light values that must be complied with for
into contact with highly inflammable materi- designated points of the light distribution.
als, for example dry grass or spilt petrol. This This is known as “Tourist light”.
could start a fire. Motorway light*
The light distribution of the halogen and full-
The motorway light is available on vehicles LED headlights allows the specific “tourist
Note
equipped with full-LED lights. light” values to be met without the need for
Operation
● The battery will run down if the hazard stickers or changes in the settings.
warning lights are left on for a long time, The function is connected/disconnected via
even if the ignition is switched off. the corresponding Easy Connect system Note
● The use of the hazard warning lights de- menu.
“Tourist light” is only allowed temporarily. If
scribed here is subject to the relevant statu- ● Activation: when going above 110 km/h you are planning a long stay in a country that
tory requirements. drives on the other side, you should take the
(68 mph) for more than 30 seconds, the dip-
Emergencies
ped beam raises slightly to increase the driv- vehicle to an Authorised Technical Service to
er's visibility distance. change the headlights.
Parking lights ● Deactivation: when reducing the speed of
the car below 100 km/h (62 mph), the dip-
When the parking light is switched on, (right
ped beam returns to its normal position.
or left turn signal), the front side light and
the rear light on the corresponding side of
Safety
the vehicle stay lit. The parking lights can on-
ly be activated with the ignition switched off Driving abroad
and the turn signal and main beam lever in
the central position, before being triggered. The light beam of the dipped beam lights is
asymmetric: the side of the road on which
you are driving is lit more intensely.
147
Operation
All seats occupied, luggage compartment Heavy objects in the vehicle may mean that
2 full. With trailer and minimum drawbar the headlights dazzle and distract other driv-
load. ers. This could result in a serious accident.
● Adjust the light beam to the vehicle load
Driver only, luggage compartment full With
3 status so that it does not blind other drivers.
trailer and maximum drawbar load.
a) If the vehicle load does not correspond to those shown in the
table, it is possible to select intermediary positions.
Lighting of the instrument panel,
OR: screens and controls
Using the radio menu (see Easy Connect Depending on the model, the lighting of the
Fig. 141 Next to the steering wheel: Head- > Adjusting Lights > Headlamp
light range control instrument panel and controls can be adjus-
height adjustment ››› page 31). ted in the Easy Connect system, using the
The headlight range control ››› Fig. 141 is button and the SETTINGS function button
Two front occupants, luggage compart- ››› page 31.
modified according to the value of the head- Setting 0
ment empty
light beam and the vehicle load status. This With the ignition on and without light activa-
offers the driver optimum visibility and the All seats occupied, luggage compart-
Setting 1 tion, the instrument panel lighting remains
headlights do not dazzle oncoming drivers ment empty
activated in daytime light conditions. The
››› . All seats occupied, luggage compart- lighting is reduced as the exterior light di-
Setting 2 ment full. With trailer and minimum minishes. In some cases, e.g. when driving
The headlights can only be adjusted when
drawbar load. through a tunnel without the function
the dipped beam is switched on.
Driver only, luggage compartment full active, the instrument panel lighting may
To reset, turn switch ››› Fig. 141: even switch off. The objective of this function
Setting 3 Driving with trailer and minimum draw-
bar load. is to provide the driver with a visual indica-
Value Vehicle load statusa) tion that he or she should activate the dip-
Two front occupants, luggage compart- Dynamic headlight range control ped beam.
–
ment empty
The control is not mounted in vehicles with
All seats occupied, luggage compartment dynamic headlight range control. The head-
1
empty light range is automatically adjusted accord-
ing to the vehicle load status when they are
switched on.
148
Lights and visibility
Interior and reading lights1) Connect > Light Settings > Inte- Options for adjusting driver and front pas-
Technical data
rior lighting ››› page 31). senger sun visors:
Read the additional information carefully ● Lower the sun visor towards the wind-
››› page 29 Note screen.
The reading lights switch off when the vehi- ● The sun visor can be pulled out of its
Glove compartment and luggage compart- cle is locked using a key or after several mi-
ment lighting* mounting and turned towards the door
nutes if the key is removed from the ignition.
This prevents the battery from discharging.
››› Fig. 142
1 .
When opening and closing the glove com-
● Swing the sun visor towards the door, lon-
partment on the front passenger side and the
Advice
gitudinally backwards.
rear lid, the respective light will automatically
switch on and off.
Visibility Vanity mirror light
Footwell lighting* There may be a vanity mirror, with a cover, on
Sun visors the rear of the sun visor. When the cover is
The lights in the footwell area below the dash
Operation
opened 2 a light comes on.
(driver and front passenger sides) will switch
on when the doors are opened and will de- The lamp goes out when the vanity mirror
crease in intensity while driving. The intensity cover is closed or the sun visor is pushed
of these lights can be adjusted using the ra- back up.
dio menu (see Easy Connect > Light
Settings > Interior lighting WARNING
Emergencies
››› page 31). Folded sun blinds can reduce visibility.
● Always store sun blinds and visors in their
Ambient light* »
housing when not in use.
The ambient light lights up the area of the
centre console and the footwell area and, de- Fig. 142 Sun visor
pending on the version, the front door panels
as well. The intensity of these lights can be
Safety
adjusted using the radio menu (see Easy
Note windscreen wipers while dry can cause dam- Windscreen wiper performance in different sit-
age. uations
The light above the sun visor automatically
switches off after a few minutes in certain ● In icy conditions, always check that the
The air conditioner comes on for
conditions. This prevents the battery from wiper blades are not frozen to the glass be-
approximately 30 seconds in air
discharging. fore using the wipers. In cold weather, it may During automatic recirculation mode to prevent the
help to leave the vehicle parked with the wip- wipe smell of the windscreen washer
ers in service position ››› page 68. fluid entering the inside the vehi-
cle.
Windscreen wiper and window Note Intervals between wipes depend
wiper systems ● The windscreen and window wipers only For the interval wipe
on the vehicle's speed. The high-
function when the ignition is switched on and er the vehicle speed the shorter
the intervals.
Window wiper lever the bonnet or rear lid, respectively, are
closed.
Read the additional information carefully ● The interval wipe speed varies according to Heated windscreen washer jets*
››› page 30 the vehicle speed. The faster the vehicle is The heating only thaws the frozen jets, it
moving, the more often the windscreen is does not thaw the water in the washer hoses.
CAUTION cleaned. When the ignition is switched on the heated
If the ignition is switched off with the wind- ● The rear wiper is automatically switched on windscreen washer jets automatically adjust
screen wipers active, they complete their when the windscreen wiper is on and the car the heat depending on the ambient tempera-
wipe before returning to the rest position. is in reverse gear. ture.
When switching the ignition back on, the
windscreen wiper will continue to operate at Headlight wash/wipe system*
the same wiping level. Ice, snow and other
Windscreen wiper functions The headlight washers/wipers clean the
obstacles on the windscreen may damage the
wiper and the windscreen wiper motor. headlight lenses.
● If necessary, remove snow and ice from the
Windscreen wiper performance in different sit-
After the ignition is switched on, the first and
windscreen wipers before starting your jour-
uations
every fifth time the windscreen washer is
ney. The activated position provision- switched on, the headlights are also washed.
If the vehicle is at a
● Carefully lift the frozen windscreen wipers
standstill
ally changes to the previous posi- Therefore, the windscreen wiper lever should
from the glass. SEAT recommends a de-icer tion. be pulled towards the steering wheel when
spray for this operation. the dipped beam or main beam are on. Any
● Do not switch on the windscreen wipers if incrusted dirt (such as insects) should be
the windscreen is dry. Cleaning with the cleaned regularly (e.g. when refuelling).
150
Lights and visibility
To ensure the headlight washers work cor- Rain sensor modified behaviour
Technical data
rectly in winter, any snow which has got into Possible causes of faults and mistaken read-
the bumper jet supports should be cleaned ings on the sensitive surface ››› Fig. 144 of
away. If necessary, remove snow with an anti- the rain sensor include:
icing spray.
● Damaged blades: a film of water on the
Note damaged blades may lengthen the activation
The wiper will try to wipe away any obstacles time, reduce the washing intervals or result
that are on the windscreen. The wiper will in a fast and continuous wipe.
Advice
stop moving if the obstacle blocks its path. ● Insects: insects on the sensor may trigger
Remove the obstacle and switch the wiper Fig. 144 Rain sensor sensitive surface the windscreen wiper.
back on again.
● Salt on roads: in winter, salt spread in the
The rain sensor controls the frequency of the roads may cause an extra long wipe when the
windscreen wiper intervals, depending on windscreen is almost dry.
Rain sensor* the amount of rain ››› . The sensitivity of the
Operation
● Dirt: dry dust, wax, coating on glass (Lotus
rain sensor can be adjusted manually. Man-
ual wipe ››› page 150. effect) or traces of detergent (car wash) may
reduce the effectiveness of the rain sensor or
Move the lever to the required position make it react more slowly, later or not at all.
››› Fig. 143: ● Cracked windscreen: the impact of a stone
will trigger a single wipe cycle with the rain
Emergencies
0 Rain sensor off.
sensor on. Next the rain sensor detects the
1 Rain sensor on; automatic wipe if neces-
reduction in the sensitive surface area and
sary.
adapts accordingly. The behaviour of the sen-
A Setting sensitivity level of rain sensor sor will vary with the size of the damage
– Set control to the right: highly sensi- caused by the stone.
Fig. 143 Windscreen wiper lever: adjusting tive.
WARNING
the rain sensor A – Set control to the left: less sensitive.
Safety
The rain sensor may not detect enough rain
When the ignition is switched off and then to switch on the wipers.
back on, the rain sensor stays on and starts ● If necessary, switch on the wipers manually
operating again when the windscreen wipers when water on the windscreen obstructs visi-
are in position 1 and the vehicle is travel- bility. »
ling at more than 16 km/h (10 mph).
151
Operation
Note may leak. This could cause irritation to the Adjusting the exterior rear view mir-
● Clean the sensitive surface of the rain sen- skin, eyes and respiratory organs. If you rors
come into contact with this liquid, it must be
sor regularly and check the blades for dam-
rinsed with large quantities of water. If neces-
age ››› Fig. 144 (arrow).
sary, get medial help.
● To remove wax and coatings, we recom-
mend a window cleaner containing alcohol.
CAUTION
In the event that an automatic anti-dazzle
rear vision mirror breaks, an electrolyte fluid
Mirror may leak. This liquid attacks plastic surfaces.
Clean it with a wet sponge as soon as possi-
Anti-dazzle rear view mirror ble.
It is dangerous to drive if you cannot see Note Fig. 145 Driver door: control for the exterior
clearly through the rear window. mirror.
● If the light incident in the interior rear vi-
sion mirror is obstructed (e.g. with the sun Read the additional information carefully
Rear view mirror with automatic anti-dazzle
blind*), the anti-dazzle rear vision mirror with ››› page 18
function* automatic setting will not operate perfectly.
The anti-dazzle function is activated every ● When the interior lights are on or reverse Synchronized regulation of the exterior mir-
time the ignition is switched on. gear engaged, the mirrors do not darken with rors
When the anti-dazzle function is enabled, the automatic adjustment for anti-dazzle posi- ● In the Settings - Convenience menu,
tion.
interior rear vision mirror will darken auto- select whether or not the exterior mirrors
matically according to the amount of light it should move in synchronisation.
receives. The anti-dazzle function is cancel- ● Turn the knob to position L1).
led if reverse gear is engaged.
● Adjust the left-hand exterior mirror. The
WARNING right exterior mirror will be adjusted at the
same time (synchronised).
In the event that an automatic anti-dazzle
rear vision mirror breaks, an electrolyte fluid
rical.
152
Seats and head restraints
● If necessary the right exterior mirror adjust- CAUTION Seats and head restraints
Technical data
ment may need correcting. turn the control to
● If one of the mirror housings is knocked out
position R1).
● In the Easy Connect system the exterior mir-
of position (e.g. when parking), the mirrors Adjusting the seats and headr-
must first be fully retracted with the electric
rors can be adjusted using the button control. Do not readjust the mirror housing by ests
and the SETTINGS function button. hand, as this will interfere with the mirror ad-
juster function. Manual adjustment of seats
Fold in the exterior mirrors after parking ● Before washing the vehicle in an automatic
(convenience function)* Read the additional information carefully
Advice
car wash, please make sure to retract the ex-
The Easy Connect system, the button and terior mirrors to prevent them from being ››› page 16
damaged. Electrically retractable exterior
the function buttons SETUP and
mirrors must not be folded in or out by hand. WARNING
Mirrors and windscreen wipers can be used to
Always use the electrical power control.
have the exterior mirrors fold in when the ve- The safe driving chapter contains important
hicle is parked ››› page 118. information, tips, suggestions and warnings
Operation
Note that you should read and observe for your
When the vehicle is locked with the remote own safety and the safety of your passengers
control, by pressing for more than approxi- If the electrical adjustment should fail to op-
erate, both of the mirrors can be adjusted by
››› page 70.
mately 1 second the exterior mirrors are fol-
hand by lightly pressing the edge of the mir-
ded in automatically. When the vehicle is
ror glass. WARNING
opened with the remote control, the exterior
mirrors are deployed automatically. ● Adjust the front seats only when the vehi-
Emergencies
cle is stationary. Failure to follow this instruc-
tion could result in an accident.
WARNING
● Be careful when adjusting the seat height.
Convex or wide-angle* exterior mirrors give a Careless or uncontrolled adjustment can
larger field of vision. However, they make ob- cause injuries.
jects look smaller and further away than they ● The front seat backrests must not be re-
really are. If you use these mirrors to esti-
clined for driving. Otherwise, seat belts and
mate the distance to vehicles behind you
Safety
the airbag system might not protect as they
when changing lane, you could misjudge the
should, with the subsequent danger of injury.
distance. Risk of accident!
rical.
153
Operation
Electric driver's seat adjustment* Adjusting the front head restraints Adjusting the head restraints
– To set the head restraint higher, grasp the
Read the additional information carefully Read the additional information carefully sides with both hands and move it up-
››› page 17 ››› page 17 wards, until you see it engage.
Adjust the head restraint ››› page 17 so – To set the head restraint lower down, press
WARNING
that as far as possible the top of the head re- the 1 ››› Fig. 146 button and move it
● If the electric front seats are used negli- straint is level with the top of your head. downwards.
gently or without paying due attention, it can When this is not possible, try to get as close
cause serious injury. as possible to this position.
Removing the head restraint
● The front seats can also be electrically ad-
justed when the ignition is switched off. Nev- To remove the head restraint, the correspond-
er leave a child or any other person who may ing backrest must be partially folded forward.
Adjusting the rear head restraints
need help in the vehicle.
– Unlock the backrest ››› page 156.
● In the event of an emergency, electrical ad-
justment can be stopped by pressing any – Move the head restraint upwards until it ar-
control. rives to the top.
– Press button 1 ››› Fig. 146, while simulta-
CAUTION neously pressing on the security hole 2
To avoid damaging the electrical components ››› Fig. 146 with a flat screwdriver a maxi-
of the front seats, please refrain from kneel- mum of 5 mm wide, and remove the head
ing on the seat or applying sharp pressure at restraint.
a single point to the seat cushion and back- – Move the backrest until it engages properly
rest.
››› .
Fig. 146 Rear centre head restraint: release
Note point. Fitting the head restraint
● It may not be possible to electrically adjust To mount the external head restraints, the
When transporting people in the back seat,
the seat if the vehicle battery is very low. corresponding backrest must be partially fol-
place the head restraints of the occupied
● If the engine is started while the seats are seats at a minimum of the next socket up ded forward.
being electrically adjusted, the adjustment ››› . – Unlock the backrest ››› page 156.
will stop.
– Insert the head restraint bars into the
guides until they perceptibly engage. It
154
Seats and head restraints
should not be possible to remove the head Seat heating Adjusting the heating output
Technical data
restraint from the backrest. Press the button or repeatedly until the
– Move the backrest until it engages properly desired intensity level is reached.
››› .
Deactivating
WARNING Press the button or until all warning
● Please observe the general notes lamps switch off.
››› page 74.
Advice
● Remove the rear head restraints only when WARNING
it is necessary for the placement of a child Children and people who cannot perceive
seat ››› page 87. After removing a child seat, pain or temperature because of medications,
remount the head restraint immediately. paralysis or chronic diseases (e.g. diabetes)
Fig. 147 In the centre console: front seats
Travelling with the head restraints removed or have a limited perception of these, may
or improperly adjusted increases the risk of heating switch
suffer burns to the back, buttocks or legs
Operation
severe injuries. when using seat heating, an occurrence that
The seat cushions can be heated electrically
may entail a very lengthy recovery period or
when the ignition is switched on. The back-
from which it may not be possible to recover
rest is also heated in some versions. fully. Seek medical advice if you have doubts
Seat functions The seat heating should not be engaged in regarding your health.
any of the following conditions: ● People with limited pain and temperature
Emergencies
Introduction thresholds must never use seat heating.
● The seat is unoccupied.
● If an abnormality in the device's tempera-
WARNING ● The seat has a covering. ture control is detected, have it checked by a
Inappropriate use of the seat functions can ● There is a child seat installed in the seat. specialist workshop.
cause severe injuries. ● The seat cushion is wet or damp.
● Assume the proper sitting position before ● The indoor or outdoor temperature is great-
WARNING
your trip and remain in it throughout. This al- If the fabric of the cushion is wet, this can ad-
er than 25°C (77°F).
Safety
so applies to the other occupants. versely affect the operation of the seat heat-
● Always keep hands, fingers, feet and other ing, increasing the risk of burns.
Activate
parts of the body away from the operating ra- ● Make sure the seat cushion is dry prior to
Press the button or . Seat heating is
dius and the adjustment of seats.
switched on fully.
using the seat heater. »
155
Operation
● Do not sit on the seat with clothing that is – To return the armrest to the starting posi-
wet or damp. tion, remove the armrest from the upper
● Do not leave clothing that is wet or damp
fixed position and lower it.
on the seat. The armrest can be moved backwards and
● Do not spill liquid on the seat. forwards.
CAUTION
● To avoid damaging the heating elements of Folding down and lifting the rear seat
the seat heaters, please do not kneel on the backrest
seat or apply sharp pressure to a single point Fig. 149 In the luggage compartment: levers
on the seat cushion or backrest. for remote release of the left part 1 and right
● Liquids, sharps objects and insulating ma- part 2 of the rear seat backrest.
terials (e.g. covers or child seats) can damage
the seat heating. The rear seat backrest is split and each part
● In the event of smells, switch off the seat be lowered separately to extend the luggage
heating immediately and have it inspected by compartment.
a specialised workshop.
When the rear seat backrest is lowered no-
body else can travel in the corresponding
For the sake of the environment seats (not even a child).
The seat heating should remain on only when Fig. 148 On the rear seat backrest: release
needed. Otherwise, it is an unnecessary fuel Lowering the rear seat backrest with the un-
catch 1 ; red mark 2 .
waste. lock button
● Lower the head restraint properly.
● Push the unlock button ››› Fig. 148 1 for-
Front centre armrest wards and at the same time lift the backrest.
● The rear seat backrest is not engaged when
The centre armrest can be adjusted to various
the red marking of the button 2 is visible.
levels.
Lowering the rear seat backrest with the re-
Adjusting the centre armrest
mote release lever
– To adjust the tilt, lift the armrest from the
● Lower the head restraint properly.
starting position so that it is engaged.
156
Transport and practical equipment
● Open the rear lid. must be properly engaged. This is particular- Transport and practical
Technical data
● Pull the remote release lever of the left part ly important in the case of the centre rear
››› Fig. 149 1 or right part 2 of the backrest seat. If someone is seated in a seat whose equipment
in the direction of the arrow. The released backrest is not properly engaged they will fly
forward, along with the backrest, during an
part of the rear seat backrest is folded auto-
accident or a sudden driving or braking ma-
Storage compartments
matically down and forwards.
noeuvre.
● If this occurs, close the rear lid.
● A red signal on the button 2 warns that
Storage areas under the front seats*
The rear seat backrest is not engaged when the backrest is not engaged. Always check
Advice
the red marking of the button ››› Fig. 148 2 that the red marking is not visible when the
backrest is in the upright position.
is visible.
● When the rear seat backrest is lowered or is
Folding up the rear seat backrest not properly engaged nobody else can travel
in the corresponding seats (not even a child).
● Lift the backrest and press it firmly into the
Operation
lock until it engages ››› .
CAUTION
● It should not be possible to see the red
mark of the unlock button 2 . Serious damage can be caused to the vehicle
and other objects if the rear seat backrest is
● The backrest must be properly engaged. lowered or lifted without due care and atten- Fig. 150 Storage compartment under the
tion. front seats.
Emergencies
WARNING ● Before lowering the rear seat backrest, al-
Serious injuries can be caused if the rear seat ways adjust the front seats so that neither There is a storage compartment with a cover
backrest is lowered or lifted without due care the head restraints nor the cushions of the under each front seat.
and attention. rear backrest can hit them.
The drawer* is opened by pulling on the han-
● Never lower or lift the rear seat backrest
dle of the cover ››› Fig. 150.
while driving.
● Do no trap or damage the seat belt when To close the drawer, press the cover until it
raising the rear seat backrest. locks into position.
Safety
● When lowering or lifting the rear seat back-
rest, keep your hands, fingers, feet and other WARNING
body parts out of its path. ● The drawers will hold a maximum weight of
● For the rear seat belts to offer the necessa- 1.5 kg. »
ry protection all the parts of the rear backrest
157
Operation
● Do not drive with the drawer cover open. ● Do not use hard china cups or glasses. Depending on the vehicle equipment, the CD
There is an injury risk for passengers if the These could cause injury in the event of an player is located in the glove compartment.
cargo is released in case of sudden braking or accident. Separate operating instructions are enclosed
an accident. for this equipment in the corresponding In-
struction Manual.
CAUTION
You should avoid putting open drinks con- WARNING
Drink holders tainers in the drink holders. The drinks could
otherwise spill over and cause damage to e.g. The cover of the glove compartment should
the electrical equipment or the seat covers. always be closed while driving. Failure to fol-
low this instruction could result in an acci-
dent.
Glove compartment
Other storage compartments
You will find more object holders, compart-
ments and supports in other parts of the ve-
hicle:
Fig. 151 Centre console: front drink holders. ● In the top of the glove compartment in ve-
hicles that do not have a CD reader. The load
Front drink holders
of the compartment should not exceed
– Place drinks in the holder ››› Fig. 151. 1.2 kg.
Placement of two drinks is possible. There ● In the centre console under the centre arm-
is also the possibility of placing larger plas- Fig. 152 Glove compartment rest*.
tic bottles in the trims of the doors.
● Coat hooks in the door frames ››› .
Opening/closing
WARNING ● Other storage compartments are found in
– To open the glove compartment, pull the
● Do not place any hot drinks in the drink the rear seat, to the left and the right of the
handle in the direction of the arrow. seats.
holder while the vehicle is moving. Hot drinks
could spill and cause burns, which may cause – To close the glove compartment, move the
an accident. cover upwards until it engages.
158
Transport and practical equipment
WARNING ted to each power socket must not exceed a – Distribute the load evenly in the luggage
Technical data
power rating of 120 Watt. compartment.
● Please make sure that any items of clothing
hanging from the coat hooks do not obstruct – Place heavy objects as far forward as possi-
WARNING
your view to the rear. ble in the luggage compartment.
● The coat hooks should only be used for The power socket works only when the igni-
tion is on. Improper use may cause serious – Place the heavy objects first.
lightweight clothing. Do not leave any heavy
or sharp objects in the pockets. injury or even fire. Children should therefore – Secure heavy objects to the fitted fastening
not be left in the vehicle unattended if the rings ››› page 162.
● Do not use clothes hangers to hang up the button is also left behind. Otherwise there is
Advice
clothing, as this could interfere with the func- a possibility that they may be injured.
tion of the head-protection airbags. WARNING
● Loose luggage and other objects in the lug-
CAUTION gage compartment could cause serious inju-
Always use the correct type of plugs to avoid ries.
Socket
damaging the sockets. ● Always stow objects in the luggage com-
Operation
partment and secure them on the fastening
Note rings.
● Use suitable straps to secure heavy ob-
The use of electrical appliances with the en-
jects.
gine switched off will cause a battery dis-
charge. ● During sudden manoeuvres or accidents,
loose objects can be thrown forward, injuring
Emergencies
vehicle occupants or passers-by. This in-
creased risk of injury will be further increased
Storing objects if a loose object is struck by an inflating air-
bag. If this happens, objects may shoot out-
ward like a missile. Risk of fatal injury.
Fig. 153 Centre console: 12 volt socket Loading the luggage compartment
● Please note that the centre of gravity may
All luggage and other loose objects must be shift when transporting heavy objects; this
● Remove the cap located on the centre con-
may affect vehicle handling and lead to an ac-
Safety
sole of the socket ››› Fig. 153. safely secured in the luggage compartment.
cident. Therefore, it is essential to adjust
● Insert the plug of the electrical appliance
Unsecured objects which shift back and forth
your speed and driving style accordingly, to
could impair the driving safety or driving avoid accidents. »
into the power socket.
characteristics of the vehicle by shifting the
Electrical equipment can be connected to the centre of gravity.
12 volt power socket. The appliances connec-
159
Operation
● Never exceed the allowed axle weights or Luggage compartment cover Removing
allowed maximum weight. If said weights are ● Detach the cord loops ››› Fig. 154 B from
exceeded, the driving characteristics of the their hooks A .
vehicle may change, leading to accidents, in-
● Remove the rear shelf from the side sup-
juries and damage to the vehicle.
ports ››› Fig. 155 by pulling it upwards and
● Never leave your vehicle unattended, espe-
then take it out.
cially when the rear lid is open. Children
could climb into the luggage compartment, If necessary, the rear shelf can be stored un-
closing the door behind them; they will be der the luggage compartment double floor
trapped and run the risk of death.
››› page 161.
● Never allow children to play in or around
the vehicle. Close and lock all the doors and Fitting
rear lid when you leave the vehicle. Before
Fig. 154 In the luggage compartment: remov- ● Insert the cover horizontally so that the “re-
you lock the vehicle, make sure that there are
ing and installing the rear shelf.
no adults or children in the vehicle. cess” fits onto the axis of the supports
››› Fig. 155 and press down until it engages.
Note ● Hook the loops ››› Fig. 154 B to the rear
lid.
● Air circulation in the vehicle helps reduce
fogging of the windows. Used air escapes
through ventilation slits in the side trim of WARNING
the luggage compartment. Ensure that the ● The luggage compartment cover must al-
ventilation slots are never covered. ways be fixed properly (risk of accident).
● Straps for securing the load to the fasten- ● The luggage compartment cover should not
ing rings are commercially available. be used as a storage shelf. Articles placed on
this cover could cause injury to vehicle occu-
Fig. 155 In the luggage compartment: remov- pants in an accident or if the brakes are ap-
ing and installing the rear shelf. plied suddenly.
160
Transport and practical equipment
Storing the rear shelf ● Press the rear shelf until it engages in its On the rear seat, behind the central armrest,
Technical data
housing ››› Fig. 157. there is a tailboard for transporting long
● Put the left and right covers in their original items in the interior, such as skis.
position. To avoid soiling the interior, dirty objects
should be wrapped (e.g. in a blanket) before
they are inserted through the tailboard.
Tailboard for transporting long items* When the armrest is down, nobody may trav-
el in the centre rear seat.
Advice
Opening the tailboard
● Lower the centre armrest.
Fig. 156 In the luggage compartment: covers ● Pull the release lever in the direction of the
for storing the rear shelf. arrow and push the tailboard cover
Operation
››› Fig. 158
1 down and forwards.
● Open the rear lid.
● Insert the long objects through the gap
from the luggage compartment.
Fig. 158 On the rear seat backrest: opening
the tailboard. ● Secure the objects with the seatbelt.
Emergencies
● Close the rear lid.
Safety
The rear shelf can be stored under the lug- ● Lift the centre armrest if necessary.
gage compartment variable floor.
● Remove the left and right covers Note
››› Fig. 156. Fig. 159 In the luggage compartment: open- The tailboard can also be opened from the
ing the tailboard. luggage compartment. To do so, press the »
161
Operation
release lever down, in the direction of the ar- ● Always use belts or retaining straps that Retaining hooks
row, and the cover upwards ››› Fig. 159. are suitable and in a good condition.
● Belts and retaining straps should be se-
curely fastened to the fastening rings.
Fastening rings* ● Objects in the luggage compartment that
are unsecured could move suddenly and mod-
ify the handling of the vehicle.
● Secure all objects, little and large.
● Never exceed the maximum tensile load of
the fastening ring when securing objects.
● Never secure a child seat to the fastening
rings.
Fig. 161 In the luggage compartment: retain-
ing hooks
Note
● The maximum tensile load that the fasten-
At the rear of the luggage compartment, on
ing rings can support is 3.5 kN. the left and right, there are fixed retaining
Fig. 160 In the luggage compartment: fasten-
hooks ››› Fig. 161.
ing rings ● Belts and securing systems for the appro-
priate load can be obtained from specialised The retaining hooks have been designed to
In the front and rear part of the luggage com- dealerships. SEAT recommends visiting a secure light shopping bags.
partment there are fastening rings to secure SEAT dealership for this.
the luggage ››› Fig. 160. ● The fastening rings are rendered unusable WARNING
for versions with a spare wheel. Never use the retaining hooks as fastening
In order to use the front fastening rings, they
must be lifted beforehand. rings. In case of sudden braking or an acci-
dent, the hooks could break.
WARNING
If unsuitable or damaged belts or retaining CAUTION
straps are used, they could break in the event Each hook is designed for a maximum load of
of braking or an accident. Objects could then 2.5 kg.
be launched across the passenger compart-
ment and cause serious or fatal injuries.
162
Transport and practical equipment
Net bag* Hooking the net bag into the luggage com- ● Always secure the net hooks properly so
Technical data
partment floor that they do not suddenly release from the
● As applicable, lift the front fastening rings fastening rings when hooking or unhooking
››› Fig. 162 2 . them.
● On hooking or unhooking them, protect
● Secure the net hooks to the fastening rings
your eyes and face in case the hooks are re-
2 ››› . The bag zip should be facing up- leased suddenly.
wards.
● Always hook up the net bag hooks in the
● Secure the net hooks to the fastening rings
described order. If a hook is unexpectedly re-
Advice
1 . leased the risk of injury is increased.
Operation
be facing upwards.
● Secure the straps in the bag hooks 2 .
Emergencies
● Remove the hooks and the net bag straps
from the fastening rings and from the bag
hooks.
● Store the net bag in the luggage compart-
ment.
Fig. 163 In the luggage compartment: rings
1 and hooks 2 for attaching the net bag.
WARNING
Safety
The luggage compartment prevents light lug- To secure the elastic net bag on the fastening
gage from moving. The net bag has a zip and rings it must be stretched out. Once hooked
can be used to store small objects. up it is taut. If the net bag is hooked up or un-
hooked incorrectly the hooks could cause in-
The net bag can be hooked up to the luggage juries.
compartment in different ways.
163
Operation
Luggage compartment variable floor ● Move the floor forward over the supports as downward pressure so that the moving part
far as the rear seat backrest and then lower of the floor is flush with the backs of the rear
the floor with the handle 1 . seats.
Roof carrier ● Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres. Attach the cross bars and the roof car-
Technical data
● Adapt your speed and driving style at all rier system
Introduction times to suit visibility, weather, road and traf-
fic conditions.
The vehicle roof has been designed to opti-
mise aerodynamics. For this reason, cross CAUTION
bars or conventional roof carrier systems can-
● Remove the cross bars and the roof carrier
not be secured to the roof water drains.
system before entering a car wash.
Advice
As the roof water drains are integrated in the ● Vehicle height is increased by the installa-
roof to reduce air resistance, only SEAT-ap- tion of cross bars or a roof carrier system and
proved cross bars and roof carrier systems the load secured on them. For this purpose,
can be used. check that your vehicle's height does not sur-
pass the headspace limit, for example, for un-
Cases in which cross bars and the roof carri- derpasses or for entering garage doors.
Operation
er system should be disassembled. ● Cross bars, the roof carrier system and the Fig. 166 Attachment points for the roof rail-
● When they are not used. load secured on them should not interfere ings for the roof carrier system.
with the roof aerial or hamper the path of the
● When the vehicle is washed in a car wash.
panoramic sun roof and the rear lid. The crossbars are the basis of a series of spe-
● When the vehicle height exceeds the maxi- ● On opening the rear lid make sure that it cial roof carrier systems. For safety reasons,
mum height, for example, in some garages. does not knock into the roof load. special fixtures must be used to safely trans-
Emergencies
port luggage, bicycles, skis, surf boards or
WARNING boats on the roof. Suitable accessories can
For the sake of the environment
When heavy or bulky loads are transported be acquired at SEAT dealerships.
on the roof carrier system, car driving per- When cross bars and a roof carrier system are
installed, the increased air resistance means Always secure the crossbars and the roof car-
formance is affected, as the centre of gravity
that the vehicle uses more fuel. rier system properly. Always take the assem-
shifts and there is greater wind resistance.
bly instructions that come with the crossbars
● Always secure the load properly using belts
and the roof carrier system in question into
Safety
or retaining straps that are suitable and in a account.
good condition.
● Bulky, heavy, long or flat loads have a neg- The crossbars are assembled on the roof rail-
ative effect on aerodynamics, the centre of ings. The distance between crossbars
gravity and driving performance. ››› Fig. 166 A should be between 70 and 90
cm and the distance between the crossbars »
165
Operation
and the brackets of the roof railings B must Loading the roof carrier system ney and subsequently with a certain frequen-
be 15 cm. cy.
The load can only be secured if the crossbars
WARNING and the roof carrier system are properly in- WARNING
Incorrect attachment and use of the cross- stalled ››› . Exceeding the maximum authorised roof load
bars and the roof carrier system may cause can result in accidents and considerable vehi-
the whole system to detach from the roof and Maximum authorised roof load cle damage.
cause an accident and injuries. The maximum permissible roof load is 75 kg. ● Never exceed the maximum authorised
● Always take the manufacturer assembly in- This figure comes from the combined weight load on the roof and on the axles or the vehi-
structions into account. of the roof carrier, the cross bars and the load cle's maximum authorised weight.
● Use only crossbars and the roof carrier sys- itself on the roof ››› . ● Never exceed the load capacity of the cross
tem when they are in perfect condition and bars and the roof carrier system, even if the
Always check the weight of the roof carrier
are properly secured. maximum authorised roof load has not been
system, the cross bars and the weight of the reached.
● Secure the crossbars and the roof carrier
load to be transported and weigh them if
system properly. necessary. Never exceed the maximum au-
● Secure heavy items as far forward as possi-
● Check threaded joints and attachments ble and distribute the vehicle load uniformly.
thorised roof load.
travelling and if necessary tighten them after
you have travelled a short distance. When If you are using cross bars and a roof carrier
WARNING
making long trips, check the threaded joints with a lower weight rating, you will not be
whenever you stop for a rest. able to carry the maximum authorised roof If the load is loose or not secured, it could fall
load. In this case, do not exceed the maxi- from the roof carrier system or cause acci-
● Always fit the special roof carrier systems
mum weight limit for the roof carrier which is dents and injuries.
correctly for wheels, skis and surfboards, etc.
listed in the fitting instructions. ● Always use belts or retaining straps that
● Do not modify or repair the crossbars or
are suitable and in a good condition.
roof carrier system.
Distributing a load ● Secure the load properly.
166
Air conditioning
Technical data
Reduced visibility through the windows in- ● To replace the pollen filter, always visit a
Heating, ventilation and cool- creases the risk of serious accidents. service centre.
● Always ensure that all windows are free of ● Switch the air conditioner off if you think it
ing ice and snow, and that they are not fogged, may be broken. This will avoid additional
so as to maintain good visibility of everything damage. Have the air conditioner checked by
Introduction outside. a specialised workshop.
● The maximum heat output required to de- ● Repairs to the air conditioner require spe-
Read the additional information carefully
Advice
frost windows as quickly as possible is only cialist knowledge and special tools. SEAT rec-
››› page 48 available when the engine has reached its ommends visiting a SEAT Official Service.
normal running temperature. Only drive when
Viewing Climatronic information you have good visibility.
Note
On the screen of Climatronic control unit and ● Always ensure that you use the heating
● When the cooling system is turned off, air
on the screen of the factory-fitted Easy Con- system, fresh air system, air conditioner and
Operation
the heated rear window to maintain good visi- coming from the outside will not be dried. To
nect system, the theoretical values of the
bility to the outside. prevent fogging of the windows, SEAT recom-
temperature zones are shown.
mends leaving the cooling system (compres-
● Never leave the air recirculation on for a
The unit of temperature measurement can be sor) turned on. To do this, press the button
long period of time. If the cooling system is . The button lamp should light up.
changed in the Easy Connect system. switched off and air recirculation mode
● The maximum heat output required to de-
switched on, the windows can mist over very
Dust and pollen filter frost windows as quickly as possible is only
Emergencies
quickly, considerably limiting visibility.
available when the engine has reached its
The dust and pollen filter with its activated ● Switch air recirculation mode off when it is
normal running temperature.
charcoal cartridge serves as a barrier against not required.
● Keep the air intake slots in front of the
impurities in the air taken into the vehicle in-
windscreen free of snow, ice and leaves to en-
terior. WARNING sure heating and cooling are not impaired,
The dust and pollen filter must be changed Stuffy or used air will increase fatigue and re- and to prevent the windows from misting
regularly so that air conditioner performance duce driver concentration possibly resulting over.
Safety
is not adversely affected. in a serious accident.
If the filter loses efficiency prematurely due ● Never leave the fresh air fan turned off or
to use in areas with very high levels of air use the air recirculation for long periods of
pollution, the filter must be changed more time; the air in the vehicle interior will not be
frequently than stated in the Service Sched- refreshed.
ule.
167
Operation
Operating the Climatronic through the Function button: Function and temperatures over +22°C (+72°F) with
Easy Connect system* red arrows.
The air conditioning settings submenu is
3 Applies to vehicles with a Media System opened. It is possible to make the follow- To switch a function on or off, or to select a
Touch/Colour. ing adjustments: submenu, you must press the corresponding
Function button Air conditioning profile. : to function button.
In the Easy Connect system it is also possible adjust the level of the fan in AUTO mode.
to perform various adjustments to the Clima- You can choose between low, medium
SETUP Function button: Function
tronic. and high.
Function button Automatic air recirculation to Air condi- Adjust the fan level in AUTO mode. You
Open the air conditioner menu switch on and off automatic air recircula- tioning pro- can choose between low, medium and
tion ››› page 170. file high.
● Press the button on the Climatronic BACK function button to close the sub-
control panel. menu. OFF Climatronic is switched off.
● OR: press the MENU button in Easy Con- ON Climatronic is switched on.
nect. With the rotating switch select the air
conditioner menu and open it. Operating the Climatronic through the The air conditioning settings submenu
is opened. The following settings can al-
Easy Connect system* so be adjusted:
On the touch screen you can see and change
the current settings, for example, the temper- 3 Applies to vehicles with Media System Plus / Navi
Automatic auxiliary heater : to activate/deac-
System / Navi System Plus.
ature set for the driver and passenger sides, tivate the automatic activation of the
the air distribution and the fan speed. With In the Easy Connect system it is also possible auxiliary heating for colder countries
button the driver and passenger side (only for engines with auxiliary heating).
to perform various adjustments to the Clima- With the option deactivated, depending
temperatures are synchronised ››› Book- tronic. on the outside temperature the heating
let Media System Touch/Colour, chapter Air may need more time than normal to
SETUP
conditioning. Open the air conditioner menu reach a comfortable temperature.
To switch a function on or off, or to select a ● Press the button in the Climatronic Automatic windscreen heating *: to switch
submenu, you must press the corresponding control panel. the automatic windscreen heating on
function button. and off ››› page 171.
On the top of the screen you can see and
For more information about functions Automatic air recirculation : to switch auto-
change the current settings, such as, for ex-
››› page 118. ample, the temperature set for the driver side
matic air recirculation on and off
››› page 170.
and for that of passenger. Temperatures up
Function button: Function to +22°C (+72°F) are shown with blue arrows, BACK : to close the submenu.
OFF Switch off and switch on the Climatronic.
168
Air conditioning
Air conditioning user instructions menu on the instrument panel ● Another fault in the vehicle. Have the air
Technical data
››› page 34. conditioner checked by a specialised work-
The interior cooling system only works when shop.
the engine is running and fan is switched on. The cooling system cannot be activated
The air conditioner operates most effectively If the air conditioning system cannot be Special Characteristics
with the windows and the panoramic sliding switched on, this may be caused by the fol- If the humidity and temperature outside the
sunroof closed. However, if the vehicle has lowing: vehicle are high, condensation can drip off
heated up after standing in the sun for some the evaporator in the cooling system and
● The engine is not running. form a pool underneath the vehicle. This is
time, the air inside can be cooled more quick-
Advice
ly by opening the windows and the panoram- ● The fan is switched off. normal and does not indicate a leak!
ic sliding sunroof briefly. ● The air conditioner fuse has blown.
Note
● The outside temperature is lower than ap-
Climatronic: change the temperature unit on After starting the engine, any residual humid-
proximately +3°C (+38°F).
the screen of the radio or on the factory-fit- ity in the air conditioner could mist over the
● The air conditioner compressor has been
Operation
ted navigation system windscreen. Switch on the defrost function as
temporarily switched off because the engine soon as possible to clear the windscreen of
Changing the temperature display from Cel-
coolant temperature is too high. condensation.
sius to Fahrenheit on radio or on the factory-
fitted navigation system is done using the
Emergencies
Safety
169
Operation
Air outlets
Functioning mode of automatic air recircula- ● If the cooling system is switched off and air ● Press the SETTINGS function button on the
Technical data
tion (air conditioning menu) recirculation mode switched on, the windows infotainment system.
With the automatic air recirculation mode ac- can mist over very quickly, considerably limit- ● Switch the automatic windscreen heating
tivated, the entry of fresh air into the cabin ing visibility. on or off by pressing the
interior is enabled. If the system detects a ● Switch air recirculation mode off when it is Automatic windscreen heating function button.
high concentration of hazardous substances not required.
in the ambient air, air recirculation mode is Manual activation
switched on automatically. When the level of CAUTION ● Press the button in the Climatronic
impurities drops to within a normal range, re-
Advice
Do not smoke when air recirculation is control panel.
circulation mode is switched off.
switched on in vehicles with an air condition- ● Press the function button to switch the
The system is unable to detect unpleasant er. The smoke taken in could lie on the cool- windscreen heating on or off.
smells. ing system vaporiser and on the activated
charcoal cartridge of the dust and pollen fil-
The air recirculation will not connect auto- ter, leading to a permanently unpleasant
matically in versions without humidity sensor
Operation
smell.
and in the following external conditions:
● The outside temperature is lower than +3°C Note
(+38°F). Climatronic: air recirculation mode is activa-
● The cooling system is switched off and the ted to prevent exhaust gas or unpleasant
outside temperature is below +10°C (+50°F). odours from entering the vehicle interior
Emergencies
when it is in reverse and while the automatic
● The cooling system is switched off, the out-
windscreen wiper is working.
side temperature is below +15°C (+59°F) and
the windscreen wipers are switched on.
Safety
It activates automatically depending on the
WARNING humidity inside the vehicle and if the condi-
Observe the safety warnings ››› in Intro- tions set by the Climatronic are met.
duction on page 167.
● Press the button in the Climatronic
control panel.
171
Operation
Auxiliary heater (additional ● If you suspect that someone may have suitable for use by the air coming from the
swallowed a battery, seek immediate medical vents.
heater)* attention.
Introduction Note
WARNING
After switching the engine on with a 12-volt
The auxiliary heater runs on fuel from the ve- The auxiliary heater exhaust fumes contain battery that is heavily discharged or newly
hicle's tank and can be used while you are carbon monoxide, an odourless and colour- changed or after a jump start some system
driving and when the vehicle is stationary. less toxic gas. Carbon monoxide can cause settings (such as the time, the date, the per-
people to lose consciousness. It can also sonalised comfort settings and the program-
The auxiliary heater can be switched on using cause death. ming) might be altered or deleted. Check and
the fast heating button of the air condition- correct these settings once the battery is suf-
● Never switch on the auxiliary heater or
ing controls, with the remote control or by ficiently charged.
leave it running in enclosed spaces or areas
previously programming a departure time in with no ventilation.
the auxiliary heater menu of the infotainment
● Never programme the auxiliary heater so
system.
that it switches itself on and is running in an Switching on and off the auxiliary
In winter, with the auxiliary heater switched enclosed space or an area with no ventila- heater
on, you can defog the windscreen and leave tion.
it free of ice and snow (if it is a thin layer) be-
Switching the auxiliary heater on:
fore you start driving. WARNING
Manually with the fast heating button of the air
If the outside temperature is very high, the The components of the auxiliary heater are
vehicle interior can be ventilated with the en- extremely hot and could cause a fire.
conditioner controls. The control lamp of the
button will light up ››› page 167.
gine off using the auxiliary heater. ● Always park your vehicle so that no part of
the exhaust system can come in contact with Manually with the remote control ››› page 173.
WARNING easily flammable materials that might be be-
Automatically by programming and activating a
Swallowing a battery with a 20 mm diameter low the vehicle, such as dried grass.
departure time ››› page 174.
or any other button battery can cause serious
and even fatal injuries within a very short CAUTION
time. Switching the auxiliary heater off:
Never place food, medicines or other temper-
● Always keep the remote control, keyrings Manually with the fast heating button of the air
ature-sensitive objects close to the air vents.
with batteries, the spare batteries, button conditioner controls. The control lamp of the
Food, medicines and other objects sensitive
batteries and all other batteries over 20 mm
to heat or cold may be damaged or made un- button goes off ››› page 167.
out of reach of children.
Manually with the remote control ››› page 173.
172
Air conditioning
Switching the auxiliary heater off: Fig. 168 Meaning Control lamp 1 Meaning
Technical data
Automatically once the programmed departure Switch the auxiliary heater on The auxiliary heater is
time has arrived or after the programmed oper- It flashes green quickly for locked.
ating time has elapsed ››› page 174. Switch the auxiliary heater off approximately 2 seconds Possible causes: The fuel
(approximately 10 times tank is almost empty, the
Automatically when the control lamp (fuel 1 Control lamp per second). 12-volt battery charge is
level indicator) ››› page 289 lights up. too low or there is a fault.
If the buttons of the remote control are press-
Automatically when the 12-volt battery charge It flashes orange for ap-
ed unnecessarily, it could switch on the auxil-
Advice
is too low ››› page 302. proximately 2 seconds No offa) signal has been
iary heater involuntarily, even when it is out (approximately 4 times per received.
of range or when the control lamp is flashing. second).
Special feature
Control lamp on the remote control The remote control battery
Once switched off, the auxiliary heater will It will light for about 2 sec-
is almost flat. However,
onds in orange, then
continue to operate for a short period of time When the buttons are pressed, the control the on or off signal has
green or red.
Operation
in order to burn the fuel remaining in the sys- lamp on the remote control provides the user been received.
tem and also to expel the exhaust fumes. with different information: It will light for about 2 sec- The remote control battery
onds in orange, then it is almost flat. No on or off
Control lamp 1 Meaning flashes green or red. signal has been received.
Remote control The auxiliary heater has The remote control battery
It will light for about 2 sec- It flashes orange for ap-
been switched on using is flat. No on or off signal
Emergencies
onds in green. proximately 5 seconds.
the button. has been received.
The auxiliary heater has a)The remote control is out of range. In this case it will be nec-
It will light for about 2 sec-
been switched off using essary to get closer to the vehicle and press the corresponding
onds in red. button again.
the button.
Safety
second). control, control lamp 1 flashes orange for
approximately 5 seconds or it does not
switch on, the remote control battery will
Fig. 168 Auxiliary heater: remote control.
need replacing. »
173
Operation
The battery is located beneath a cover on the For the sake of the environment Function button: function
back of the remote control.
● Please dispose of your used batteries cor- Heat , Ventilate : Set to heat or ventilate the vehicle interi-
● To open the cover, lift it slightly at the bot- rectly and with respect for the environment. or when the auxiliary heater is switched on. By pressing
tom and slide it down. ● The remote control battery may contain the function button , you can select the desired
perchlorate. Observe the legal provisions re- mode.
● Remove the old battery.
garding disposal.
● Insert the new battery. When doing so, take Set : Opens the Auxiliary heater menu.
● Care should be taken so as not to operate
into account the polarity and use batteries of Departure time 1 , Departure time 2 , Departure time 3 :
the remote control unintentionally so as to
the same type ››› . Three different departure times (hh.mm) may be
prevent the auxiliary heater being switched
● Replace the battery cover by inserting the on accidentally. programmed. If the auxiliary heater should only
be switched on a certain day of the week, this can
tabs at the top and pressing the bottom. also be selected.
Open the Auxiliary heater menu. The programmed departure time determines
CAUTION the approximate time it should take to reach
● Press the button in the Climatronic
● The radio frequency remote control con- the temperature set in the vehicle. The start
control panel.
tains electronic components. Therefore, avoid of the heating operation is determined auto-
getting it wet and exposing it to knocks or di- ● Press the function button. matically depending on the outside tempera-
rect sunlight. ture.
● The use of inappropriate batteries may Function button: function
damage the radio frequency remote control. Checking the programming
Switch off : The auxiliary heater is immediately switched
For this reason, always replace the used bat- off. When a departure time is activated and the
tery with another of the same voltage, size
and specifications.
ignition is switched off the control lamp of
the fast heating button lights up for ap-
proximately 10 seconds.
174
Air conditioning
WARNING auxiliary heater switches off automatically auxiliary heater is switched off again after a
Technical data
and cannot be switched on. This avoids prob- certain time.
Never programme the auxiliary heater so that lems when starting the engine.
it switches itself on and is running in an en-
closed space or an area with no ventilation. ● The heating must be activated every time
The auxiliary heater exhaust fumes contain you want to set off. Similarly, the departure
carbon monoxide, an odourless and colour- time must reactivate each time.
less toxic gas. Carbon monoxide can cause ● The control lamp (fuel level indicator)
people to lose consciousness. It can also
lights up.
cause death.
Advice
Note
● Noises will be heard while the auxiliary
Operating instructions heater is running.
● When the air humidity is high and the in-
The auxiliary heater exhaust system located
side temperature low, condensation from the
Operation
below the vehicle must be kept clear of snow,
heating and ventilating system may evapo-
mud and other objects. The exhaust fumes
rate when the auxiliary heater is switched on.
must be able to exit freely. The emissions In this case, steam may be released from un-
generated by the auxiliary heater are re- derneath the vehicle. This does not mean
moved via an exhaust pipe fitted underneath that there is a vehicle malfunction.
the vehicle.
● If the vehicle is tilted, e.g. if parked on a
Emergencies
On heating the vehicle interior, depending on slope, the operation of the auxiliary heater
the outside temperature, the warm air is first may be restricted if the fuel tank level is low
directed at the windscreen and then to the (just above the reserve level).
rest of the vehicle interior through the air ● If the auxiliary heater is used a number of
vents. Directing the diffusers – towards the times for a long period of time, the 12-volt
windows for example – can affect air distribu- battery will lose its charge. To recharge the
tion. battery, the vehicle must be driven for a num-
ber of kilometres from time to time. As a
Safety
guideline: The journey should last approxi-
When will the auxiliary heater not be activa-
mately as long as the heater was connected.
ted?
● At temperatures below +5°C (+41°F), the
● The auxiliary heater requires about as
auxiliary heater may switch itself on automat-
much power as the dipped beam headlights. ically when the engine is switched on. The
If the 12-volt battery charge is too low, the
175
Operation
WARNING in position “P” (parking lock). Next, the se- ● Never remove the key from the ignition if
Technical data
● Never run the engine in confined spaces, as
lector lever is locked. the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, the steer-
ing could suddenly lock, making it impossible
the exhaust gases are poisonous.
to steer the vehicle: risk of accident!
● Always take the key with you when you
CAUTION Switching off the engine with the key
leave the vehicle. This is particularly impor-
Avoid high engine speeds, full throttle and Switching off the engine tant if there are children in the vehicle, as
extreme load conditions until the engine has they might otherwise be able to start the en-
reached its normal operating temperature, – Stop the vehicle. gine or use power-operated equipment (e.g.
Advice
otherwise this can damage the engine. – Turn the ignition key to position 1 the electric windows), which could cause in-
juries.
››› Fig. 169.
For the sake of the environment
Engaging the steering wheel lock CAUTION
Do not warm up the engine by idling it. You
should drive off as soon as you start the en- In vehicles with automatic gearbox, the igni- If the engine has been running under high
Operation
gine. This will help avoid unnecessary ex- tion key can only be removed when the selec- load for a long time, there is a risk of heat
haust emissions. tor lever is in position P. building up in the engine compartment after
it has been switched off; this could cause en-
– Remove the key from the ignition in posi- gine damage. For this reason, you should idle
Note tion 1 ››› Fig. 169 ››› . the engine for approximately 2 minutes be-
● If it is difficult to turn the ignition key to fore you switch it off.
– Turn the steering wheel until you hear it en-
the position 2 , turn the steering wheel to
Emergencies
gage.
both sides to release the steering lock. Note
● When starting from cold, the engine may be Possible vehicle theft is prevented with the
steering lock engaged. After the engine is switched off the radiator
a little noisy for the first few seconds until oil
fan may run on for up to 10 minutes, even if
pressure has built up in the hydraulic valve
the ignition is switched off. It is also possible
lifters. This is quite normal, and no cause for WARNING
that the fan turns itself on once more if the
concern. ● Never switch the engine off until the vehi- coolant temperature increases due to the
● If the vehicle battery is disconnected and cle is stationary. The brake servo and power heat accumulated in the engine compartment
Safety
reconnected, the key must remain in the posi- steering functions will not be completely cov- or due to its prolonged exposure to solar ra-
tion 1 for around 5 seconds before starting ered under warranty. More force may also be diation.
up. needed to turn the steering wheel or to brake.
● Vehicles with automatic gearbox: after As you cannot steer and brake in the normal
switching off the ignition, you can only re- manner, there is a greater risk of accidents
move the ignition key if the selector lever is and serious injury.
177
Operation
Starter button* In vehicles with the Keyless Access ample, the battery of the vehicle key button
››› page 122 system, the engine can also be is very low or flat:
started with the key in the luggage compart-
ment. ● Immediately after pushing the starter but-
ton, keep the vehicle key next to the right
Opening the driver's door when exiting the trim of the steering column ››› Fig. 171, as
vehicle activates the electronic lock on the close as possible to the Kessy logo.
steering column if the ignition is disabled.
● The ignition connects and the engine starts
automatically.
Switching the ignition on/off manually
Briefly push the starter button without touch- Emergency disconnection
ing the brake or clutch pedal ››› .
If the engine does not switch off after briefly
Fig. 170 In the lower part of the centre con- For vehicles with both manual and automatic pressing the starter button, an emergency
sole: starter button. transmission, the starter button text disconnect will be required:
START ENGINE STOP flashes like a heartbeat
when the system is preset for switching the ● Press the starter button twice within 3 sec-
ignition on and off. onds or press it once for more than 1 sec-
ond ››› .
Automatic ignition switch-off ● The engine turns off automatically.
If the driver leaves the vehicle, taking the ve-
hicle key with them but leaving the ignition Engine restart feature
on, the ignition is not switched off automati- If no valid key is detected inside the vehicle
cally. The ignition is switched off automati- after the engine stops, you will only have 5
cally by pressing the lock button on the re- seconds to restart it. A warning will display
mote control or manually by pressing the on the dash panel screen.
Fig. 171 On the right of the steering column: sensor surface on the door lever ››› Fig. 128
emergency start. After this interval, it will not be possible to
start the engine without a valid key inside
The vehicle engine can be started with a Emergency starting function the vehicle.
starter button (Press & Drive). To do so, there If no valid key is detected inside the vehicle,
must be a valid key inside the vehicle in the an emergency start-up will be required. The
area of the front or rear seats. relevant message will appear in the dash
panel display. This may happen when, for ex-
178
Driving
Automatic deactivation of the ignition on ve- way, operate electronic equipment (e.g. the Starting the engine with the starter
Technical data
hicles with the Start-Stop system Step
windows). button ››› page 178 (Press & Drive).
The ignition is switched off automatically
In vehicles with a manual gearbox: press
when the vehicle is stopped and the auto- Note 1a. and hold the clutch down until the engine
matic engine shutdown is active, if: starts.
● Before leaving the vehicle, always discon-
● The driver's seat belt is not fastened, nect the ignition manually and, if appropri- Put the gearbox lever in neutral or the selec-
ate, take into account the instructions on the 2.
● the driver does not step on any pedal, tor lever in position P or N.
screen of the dash panel.
Advice
● the driver door is opened. ● If the vehicle is stationary for a long time Briefly press the starter button ››› Fig. 170
without pressing the accelerator. For the en-
with the ignition on, the vehicle battery
After automatically turning off the ignition, if might be discharged and it might not be pos-
gine to start there must be a valid key in the
the dipped beam is on, the side light re- 3. vehicle.
sible to start the engine. After starting the engine, the light of the
mains on for approx. 30 minutes (if the bat-
● In diesel vehicles, there may be a delay in START ENGINE STOP button changes to a fixed
tery is sufficiently charged). If the driver locks light indicating that the engine has started.
the engine starting if it requires preheating.
Operation
the vehicle or manually turns off the light, the
side light goes out. ● If during the STOP phase you press the If the engine does not start, stop and wait
START ENGINE STOPbutton, the ignition is for approx. 1 minute before trying again. If
4.
switched off and the button flashes. necessary, perform an emergency start
WARNING
● If the indication “Start-Stop system deacti- ››› page 178.
Any accidental movement of the vehicle could
vated: Start the engine manually” is dis- Disconnect the electronic parking brake
result in serious injury.
played on the dash panel display, the
Emergencies
5. when you are about to start driving
● When switching on the ignition, do not START ENGINE STOP button will blink. ››› page 181.
press the brake or clutch pedal, otherwise
the engine could start immediately.
WARNING
Starting the engine Never leave the vehicle with the engine run-
WARNING
3 Valid for vehicles: with Keyless Access ning, especially if a gear or gear range is en-
If vehicle keys are used negligently or with- gaged. The vehicle could then suddenly move
out due care, this may cause accidents and Starting the engine with the starter or something strange could happen that
Safety
serious injury. Step would cause damage, fire or serious injury.
button ››› page 178 (Press & Drive).
● Never leave any key inside the vehicle
when exiting. Otherwise, a child or unauthor- Press and hold the brake pedal until step 5
1.
is performed.
WARNING
ised person could lock the vehicle, start the
engine or connect the ignition and, in this Cold start sprays could explode or cause a
sudden increase in the engine speed. »
179
Operation
● Never use sprays to cold start the engine. Stopping the engine ● Power steering does not work when the en-
3 Valid for vehicles: with Keyless Access gine is not running. You need more strength
to steer when the engine is switched off.
CAUTION
Switch off the engine with the starter ● If the ignition is switched off, the steering
● The starter motor or the engine may be Step
button ››› page 178. column could be locked, making it impossible
damaged if you try to start the engine while to control the vehicle.
driving or if you restart it immediately after 1. Stop the vehicle completely ››› .
switching it off.
● If the engine is cold, avoid high engine
Press and hold the brake pedal until the step CAUTION
2.
4 is performed.
speeds, pushing the engine too hard and rap- If the engine is made to work hard for a long
id acceleration. If you are driving an automatic vehicle, place time, it may overheat after being switched
3.
● Do not start the engine by pushing the ve- the selector lever in position P. off. To prevent damage to the engine before
hicle or towing it. Unburnt fuel could enter switching it off, leave it idle for approx. 2 mi-
Connect the electronic parking brake nutes in neutral.
the catalytic converter and damage it. 4.
››› page 181.
Briefly press the start-up button ››› Fig. 170. Note
Note The START ENGINE STOP button blinks again. If
5. After switching off the engine, the cooling fan
● Do not wait until the engine warms up with the engine fails to switch off, perform an
the vehicle stationary; if you have good visi- emergency disconnect ››› page 178. may continue to operate in the engine com-
bility through the windows, start driving im- partment for a few more minutes, even with
If the vehicle is equipped with a manual the ignition off. The radiator fan is automati-
mediately. This helps the engine reach oper- 6.
gearbox, put it into 1st or reverse. cally switched off.
ating temperature faster and reduces emis-
sions.
WARNING
● Electrical components with a high power
consumption are switched off temporarily Never switch off the engine while the vehicle “My Beat” Function
when the engine starts. is moving. This could cause loss of control of
the vehicle, accidents and serious injury. For vehicles with a convenience key there is
● When starting with a cold engine, noise
levels may briefly increase. This is quite nor- ● The airbags and belt tensioners do not the “My Beat” function. This feature provides
mal, and no cause for concern. work when the ignition is switched off. an additional indication of the vehicle igni-
● When the outside temperature is below ● The brake servo does not work with the en- tion system.
+5°C (+41°F), if the engine is diesel, some gine off. Therefore, you need to press the When accessing the vehicle, e.g. by opening
smoke may appear under the vehicle when break pedal harder to brake the vehicle.
the doors with the remote control, the
the fuel-operated auxiliary heater is on. START ENGINE STOP button flashes, calling at-
tention to the relevant starter system button.
180
Driving
Upon switching the ignition on/off, the light Braking and parking Releasing the electronic parking brake
Technical data
of the START ENGINE STOP button flashes. With ● Switch the ignition on.
the engine switched off, after a few seconds,
Electronic parking brake ● Press the button ››› Fig. 172. At the same
the STOP ENGINE START button stops flashing
and goes out. time step hard on the brake pedal or, if the
engine is running, press the accelerator ped-
With the engine running, the al slightly.
START ENGINE STOP button light stays on, indi-
● The control light of the ››› Fig. 172 button
cating that the engine is running. The time
(arrow) and the red control light of the dis-
Advice
that lapses between the moment the user
play in the dash panel go out.
starts the engine with the START ENGINE STOP
button and the lighting changes from flash-
Automatic release of the electronic parking
ing to fixed will depend on specific engine
brake on starting the engine
size characteristics. Upon switching the igni-
tion off with the START ENGINE STOP button, it The electronic parking brake is automatically
Operation
starts flashing again. Fig. 172 In the lower part of the centre con-
switched off when starting if, after the driv-
sole: electronic parking brake button. er's door is closed and the driver's seat belt
In vehicles with the Start-Stop system, the
fastened, any of the following situations take
“My Beat” function also offers additional in-
The electronic parking brake replaces the place:
formation:
handbrake. ● On vehicles with an automatic gearbox: A
● When the engine stops during the Stop
gear range is engaged or the vehicle is
Emergencies
phase, the light of the START ENGINE STOPbut- Activating the electronic parking brake
switched to another one and the accelerator
ton stays on, since, even though the engine The electronic parking brake can be activated pedal is lightly pressed.
is off, the Start-Stop system is active. whenever the vehicle is at a standstill, even ● In vehicles with a manual gearbox: The
● When the engine cannot be stated again when the ignition is switched off. Activate it clutch pedal is pressed fully before starting
with the Start-Stop system, ››› page 200, and whenever you leave or park the vehicle. off and the accelerator is pedal lightly press-
needs to be started manually, the
● Pull and hold the ››› Fig. 172 button. ed.
START ENGINE STOP button flashes to indicate
● To facilitate certain manoeuvres there are
Safety
this fact. ● The parking brake is activated when the
control light of the ››› Fig. 172 button (arrow) exceptions that allow the automatic parking
and the red control light of the display in brake to be released without the driver's seat
the dash panel are on. belt being fastened.
● Release the button. The parking brake can be prevented from be-
ing automatically released by continuously »
181
Operation
pulling up the ››› Fig. 172 switch when WARNING some time elapses without the electronic
starting off. parking brake being used.
The improper use of the electronic parking
The electronic parking brake is not discon- brake can cause accidents and serious injury.
nected until the button is released. This ● Never use the electronic parking brake to
can facilitate starting off when a heavy load stop the vehicle, unless it is an emergency. Parking
is towed ››› page 267. Braking distances can be considerably lon-
ger, since, under certain circumstances, only The electronic parking brake should always
Automatic activation of the electronic park- the rear wheels brake. Always use the foot be applied when the vehicle is parked.
ing brake when exiting the vehicle incorrect- brake.
Always note the following points when park-
ly ● Never accelerate from the engine when a
ing the vehicle:
In vehicles with automatic transmission, the gear range or a gear is engaged and the en-
gine is running. The vehicle could move, even – Use the brake pedal to stop the vehicle.
electronic parking brake is activated auto-
if the electronic parking brake is activated.
matically when exiting the vehicle incorrectly – Apply the electronic parking brake.
if:
– Put it in 1st gear.
CAUTION
● The selector lever is in the D/S or R posi- – Switch the engine off and remove the key
To prevent the vehicle from unintentionally
tion or in the Tiptronic selection track. from the ignition. Turn the steering wheel
moving when parking it, first apply the elec-
● AND: the vehicle is stationary. tronic parking brake and then remove your slightly to engage the steering lock.
● AND: the driver door is open. foot from the brake pedal. – Never leave a vehicle key in the vehicle.
182
Driving
● Secure the vehicle as usual by applying the first. However, you can compensate for the The effectiveness of the brakes can also be
Technical data
electronic parking brake firmly and putting it slightly reduced braking effect by applying temporarily reduced if the vehicle is driven
in 1st gear. more pressure on the brake pedal. Avoid for some distance without using the brakes
overloading the brakes while running them when there is a lot of salt on the road in win-
WARNING in. ter. The layer of salt that accumulates on the
● Take measures to reduce the risk of injury discs and pads can be removed by gently ap-
when you leave your vehicle unattended. Wear plying the brakes a few times.
● Never park where the hot exhaust system The rate of wear on the brake pads depends
a great deal on how you drive and the condi- Corrosion
Advice
could ignite inflammable materials, such as
dry grass, low bushes, spilt fuel etc. tions in which the vehicle is operated. This is There may be a tendency for corrosion to
● Never allow vehicle occupants to remain in a particular problem in urban traffic and form on the discs and dirt to build up on the
the vehicle when it is locked. They would be short stretches, or with very sporty driving. brake pads if the vehicle is used infrequently
unable to open the vehicle from the inside, or the brakes are not used very often.
Depending on the speed, the braking force
and could become trapped in the vehicle in
an emergency. In the event of an emergency,
and the environmental conditions (for exam- If the brakes are not used frequently, or if
Operation
locked doors will delay assistance to vehicle ple, the temperature, air humidity, etc.) rust has formed on the disks, it is advisable
occupants. noises may be produced on braking. to clean off the pads and disks by braking
● Never leave children alone in the vehicle.
firmly a few times at a moderately high speed
They could set the vehicle in motion, for ex- Wet roads or road salt ››› .
ample, by releasing the electronic parking In certain situations (for example, on driving
brake or the gearshift lever, which would Fault in the brake system
Emergencies
through flooded areas, in severe downpours
cause the vehicle to move, but uncontrolla- or after washing the vehicle) the braking ac- If the brake pedal travel should ever increase
bly. tion could be delayed if the discs and pads suddenly, this may mean that one of the two
● Depending on weather conditions, it may are damp, or frozen in winter. In this case the brake circuits has failed. Drive immediately
become extremely hot or cold inside the vehi- brakes should be “dried” by pressing the to the nearest specialised workshop and
cle. This can be fatal. brake pedal several times. have the fault repaired. Drive there slowly
and remember that you will have to apply
At high speed and with the windscreen wip-
more pressure on the brake pedal and allow
ers activated, the brake pads will briefly
»
Safety
Information on the brakes for longer stopping distances.
touch the brake discs. This takes place, al-
though unnoticeable to the driver, at regular
New brake pads
intervals to improve the response time of the
For the first 400 km (250 miles), new brake brakes when they are wet.
pads have not yet reached their maximum
braking capacity, and need to be “run in”
183
Operation
Low brake fluid level and relieves the brakes. If you still have to traction control system (ASR), electronic dif-
Malfunctions can occur in the brake system if use the brakes, it is better to brake firmly at ferential lock (EDS), electronic torque control
the brake fluid level is too low. The brake flu- intervals than to apply the brakes continu- (XDS) and tractor-trailer sway mitigation*.
id level is monitored electronically. ously. ESC also helps stabilise the vehicle by chang-
ing the torque.
Brake servo Note
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
The brake servo increases the pressure you ● If the brake servo is out of action, for exam-
apply to the brake pedal. It works only when ple when the car is being towed, you will ABS prevents the wheels from locking up un-
the engine is running. have to press the brake pedal considerably der braking until the vehicle has reached a
harder than normal to make up for the lack of virtual standstill. You can continue to steer
WARNING servo assistance. the vehicle even when the brakes are on full.
● If you wish to equip the vehicle with acces- Keep your foot on the brake pedal and do not
● Apply the brakes heavily to clean the brake
sories such as a front spoiler or wheel covers, pump the brakes. You will feel the brake ped-
system only in a suitable traffic situation. Do al pulsate while the ABS is working.
it is important that the flow of air to the front
not put other road users in danger: there is
wheels is not obstructed, otherwise the
risk of causing an accident.
brakes can overheat. Hydraulic Brake Assist (HBA)
● Ensure the vehicle does not move while in
neutral, when the engine is stopped. Failure The brake assist system can reduce the re-
to follow this instruction could result in an quired braking distance. The braking force is
accident. Hydraulic Brake Assist (HBA) automatically boosted if you press the brake
● If the brake fluid loses its viscosity and is pedal quickly in an emergency. You must
subjected to heavy use, vapour bubbles can
Electronic stability control (ESC) keep pressing the brake pedal until the dan-
form in the brake system. This reduces the ef- The ESC helps to improve safety. It reduces ger has passed.
ficiency of the brakes. the tendency to skid and improves the stabil-
ity and roadholding of the vehicle. The ESC Traction control system (ASR)
CAUTION detects critical handling situations, such as In the event of wheelspin, the traction control
vehicle understeer or oversteer, or wheelspin system reduces the engine torque to match
● Never let the brakes “drag” by leaving your
on the driving wheels. It stabilises the vehi- the amount of grip available. This helps the
foot on the pedal when it is not necessary to
cle by braking individual wheels or by reduc- car to start moving, accelerate or climb a gra-
brake. This overheats the brakes, resulting in
longer stopping distances and greater wear.
ing the engine torque. The warning lamp will dient.
flash on the instrument panel when the ESC
● Before driving down a long, steep gradient,
is intervening . Electronic differential lock (EDL)
it is advisable to reduce speed and select a
lower gear. This makes use of engine braking The ESC includes the anti-lock brake system When the EDL detects wheelspin, it brakes
(ABS), the hydraulic brake assist (HBA), the the spinning wheel and directs the power to
184
Driving
the other driven wheel. This function is active The XDS system can detect and correct this tem’s braking pressure the vehicle will brake
Technical data
up to approximately 100 km/h (62 mph). effect via the sensors and signals of the ESC. automatically.
To prevent the disc brake of the braked wheel Via the ESC, the XDS will brake the inside ● Multi-collision braking will not be available
from overheating, the EDL cuts out automati- wheel and counter the excess driving torque if ESC is malfunctioning.
cally if subjected to excessive loads. The ve- of that wheel. This means that the driver's
hicle can still be driven. The EDL will switch desired trajectory is much more precise. WARNING
on again automatically when the brake has ● The ESC, ABS, ASR, EDS and the electronic
The XDS system works in combination with
cooled down. torque control system cannot exceed the lim-
the ESC and is always active, even when ASR
Advice
its imposed by the laws of physics. Always
traction control is disconnected, or the ESC in
Tractor-trailer sway mitigation* bear this in mind, especially on wet or slip-
Sport mode or disconnected. pery roads. If you notice the systems cutting
If the vehicle is pulling a trailer, it will control in, you should reduce your speed immediate-
the following: Tractor-trailers tend to sway. Multi-collision brake ly to suit the road and traffic conditions. Do
When the swaying of the trailer is felt by the not be encouraged to take risks by the pres-
In an accident, the multi-collision brake can
vehicle and detected by the ESC, it will auto- ence of more safety systems. If you do, an ac-
Operation
help the driver by braking to avoid the risk of
matically brake the towing vehicle within the cident may occur.
skidding during the accident, which could
limits of the system and mitigate the sway. ● Please remember that the accident risk al-
lead to further collisions.
Tractor-trailer sway mitigation is not available ways increases if you drive fast, especially in
in all countries. The multi-collision brake works for front, side corners or on a slippery road, or if you follow
or rear accidents, when the airbag control too close behind the vehicle in front of you.
Electronic torque management (XDS) unit records its activation level and the acci- The ESC, ABS, brake assist, EDS and the elec-
Emergencies
dent takes place at a speed of over 10 km/h tronic torque control system cannot prevent
When taking a curve, the driveshaft differen-
(6 mph). The ESC automatically brakes the accidents: risk of accidents!
tial mechanism allows the outer wheel to turn
vehicle, as long as the accident has not dam- ● Accelerate with caution on slippery surfa-
at a higher speed than the inner wheel. In
aged the ESC, the brake hydraulics or the on- ces (for example, icy or snow-covered). De-
this way, the wheel that is turning faster (out-
board network spite the control systems, the driven wheels
er wheel) receives less drive torque than the
could spin, affecting the stability of the vehi-
inner wheel. This may mean that in certain The following actions control automatic brak- cle: risk of accident!
situations the torque delivered to the inner ing during the accident:
Safety
wheel is too high, causing the wheels to
spin. On the other hand, the outer wheel is ● When the driver presses the accelerator, Note
receiving a lower drive torque than it could the automatic braking does not take place. ● The ABS and ASR will only operate correctly
transmit. This causes an overall loss of lateral ● When the braking pressure through press- if the four wheels have identical tyres. Any
grip on the front axle, resulting in understeer ing the brake pedal is greater than the sys- differences in the rolling radius of the tyres »
or “lengthening” of the trajectory.
185
Operation
can cause the system to reduce engine power Disable ASR Disable ESC “Sport” mode
when this is not desired. The Easy Connect system menu is used to Through the Easy Connect system menu
● The regulating processes of the systems switch off the ASR ››› page 118. The traction ››› page 118. The warning lamp will switch
can make noises when they intervene. control system will be disabled. off. For vehicles with a driver information sys-
● If the warning lamp lights up, or alter- tem* the driver will be informed that:
The control lamp lights up. For vehicles
natively, there could be a fault ››› page 116. with a driver information system* the driver Electronic Stability Control
will be informed that ASR is disabled. (ESC): On
Switching on/off the ESC and ASR Activate ASR ESC in “Offroad”1) mode
The Easy Connect system menu ››› page 118 Turn the Driving Experience button to select
The ESC is switched on automatically when
is used to switch on the ASR. The traction the Offroad mode and connect it
the engine is started, and only works when
control system will be enabled. ››› page 238. The interventions of the ESC, as
the engine is running and includes the ABS,
EDS and ASR systems. The control lamp switches off. For vehicles well as of the ASR, EDS and the ABS, adapt to
with a driver information system* the driver irregular terrain.
The ASR function should only be switched off
will be informed that ASR is enabled. The control lamp lights up.
in situations in which traction is insufficient,
including: In the following exceptional situations it may
ESC in “Sport” mode
make sense to activate the Offroad mode to
● When driving in deep snow or on surfaces Sport mode can be connected via the Easy allow the wheels to spin:
that are not very firm. Connect ››› page 118 system menu. The ac-
● To “free” the vehicle if it gets stuck. tion of the ESC and the ASR is limited ››› . ● When “swinging” the vehicle to get it un-
stuck.
Then switch the ASR function back on. The control lamp lights up. For vehicles
with a driver information system* the driver ● Driving in deep snow or on loose surfaces.
Depending on the finishes and versions, will be informed that: ● When driving on rough terrain with much of
there is the possibility of disconnecting only the car's weight is lifted off the wheels (axle
the ASR or activating the ESC Sport mode. Electronic Stability Control
articulation).
(ESC): sport. Warning! Limited
stability ● Steep descents with braking on unpaved
terrain.
For your safety we recommend that you turn WARNING Changing down gears
Technical data
off the Offroad mode when it is not absolute- While driving, changing down a gear must al-
ly necessary. You should only activate the Offroad Mode or
disable the ASR if the experience of the driver ways be done gradually, i.e. to the gear di-
and traffic conditions allow it. Danger of skid- rectly below and when the engine speed is
Disable the ESC Offroad mode ding! not too high ››› . Changing down while by-
Turn the Driving Experience button to select a ● With the Offroad mode activated, the stabi- passing one or various gears at high speeds
different driving mode ››› page 238. The lisation function is limited. In particular, if or at high engine speeds can damage the
warning lamp will switch off. the road is too smooth and slippery, the driv- clutch and the gearbox, even if the clutch
pedal remains depressed ››› .
Advice
ing wheels could spin and the vehicle could
ESC in “Snow” mode1) skid.
WARNING
Turn the Driving Experience button to select
the “Snow” mode and connect it. Note When the engine is running, the vehicle will
››› page 238 Traction control system (ASR) in- start to move as soon as a gear is engaged
If the ASR is disconnected or the ESC’s Sport
terventions adjust to the adhesion of snowy and the clutch released. This is also the case
mode is selected, cruise control* will be
Operation
roads. with the electronic parking brake switched
switched off.
on.
Disable the ESC “Snow” mode ● Never engage reverse gear when the vehi-
cle is moving.
Turn the Driving Experience button to select a
different driving mode ››› page 238.
Manual gearbox
WARNING
Emergencies
WARNING Changing gear If the gear is changed down inappropriately
by selecting a gear that is too low, you may
The ESC Sport mode should be activated only Read the additional information carefully lose control of the vehicle, causing an acci-
when traffic conditions and the ability of the ››› page 45 dent and serious injuries.
driver allow it. Danger of skidding!
● With ESC in Sport mode, the stabilising In some countries the clutch pedal must be
function will be limited to allow for a sportier fully pressed down for the engine to start. CAUTION
drive. The driving wheels could spin and the When travelling at high speeds or at high en-
Safety
vehicle could skid. Selecting reverse gear gine speeds, selecting a gear that is too low
● Engage reverse gear only when the vehicle can cause considerable damage to the clutch
is stopped. and the gearbox. This can also occur if the »
clutch pedal is pressed and held and it does The tiptronic system allows the driver to To move the selector lever to position R, the
not engage. change gears manually if desired interlock button must be pressed in and at
››› page 190, Changing gears in tiptronic the same time the brake pedal must be de-
mode*. pressed. The reverse lights come on when
CAUTION
the selector lever is in the R position with the
To prevent damage and avoid premature ignition on.
wear, please observe the following: Selector lever positions
● Do not rest your hand on the gear lever N – Neutral (idling)
while driving. The pressure applied by your Read the additional information carefully With the selector lever in this position, the
hand is transmitted to the gearbox selector ››› page 46 gear is in neutral.
forks.
The selector lever position engaged is high-
● Always ensure that the vehicle is complete-
lighted on the display in the instrument clus- D/S – Permanent drive (forward) position
ly stopped before engaging the reverse gear.
ter. With the selector lever in the manual The selector lever in the D/S position enables
● Always press the clutch to the floor when
gearbox positions G, D, E and S, the engaged the gears to be controlled in normal mode (D)
changing gears.
gear is also indicated on the display. or Sport (S). To select Sport mode (S), move
● Never hold the vehicle “on the clutch” on
the selector lever backwards. Moving the lev-
hills with the engine on. P – Parking lock er again will select normal mode (D). The se-
When the selector lever is in this position, lected driving mode is shown on the instru-
the driven wheels are locked mechanically. ment panel display.
Automatic gearbox/DSG auto- The parking lock must be engaged only when In normal mode (D), the gearbox automatical-
the vehicle is stationary ››› .
matic gearbox* ly selects the best gear ratio. This depends
The interlock button (the button on the selec- on the engine load, the road speed and the
tor lever handle) must be pressed in and si- dynamic gear control programme (DCP).
Introduction
multaneously the brake pedal must be de- Sport mode (S) must be selected for a sporty
Your vehicle is equipped with an electronical- pressed before moving the selector lever ei- driving style. This setting makes use of the
ly controlled manual gearbox. Torque be- ther in or out of position P. engine's maximum power output. When ac-
tween the engine and the gearbox is trans- celerating the gear shifts will be noticeable.
mitted via two independent clutches. They re- R – Reverse gear
place the torque converter found on conven- Press the brake pedal to move the selector
Reverse gear must be engaged only when the lever from N to D/S when the vehicle is sta-
tional automatic gearboxes and allow for vehicle is stationary and the engine is idling
smooth, uninterrupted acceleration of the ve- tionary or at speeds below 3 km/h (2 mph)
››› . ››› .
hicle.
188
Driving
Under certain circumstances (e.g. when driv- gaged. If you have to leave your vehicle while Selector lever lock
Technical data
ing in mountains) it can be advantageous to the engine is running, you must apply the
switch temporarily to tiptronic mode handbrake and engage the parking lock (P).
››› page 190, in order to manually select gear ● To avoid accidents, apply the handbrake
ratios to suit the driving conditions. and put the selector lever in position P before
opening the bonnet and working on the vehi-
WARNING cle with the engine running. Please always
● Take care not to accidentally press the ac- observe the important safety warnings
celerator pedal when the vehicle is stopped. ››› page 295, Work in the engine compart-
Advice
The vehicle could otherwise start moving im- ment.
mediately (in some cases even if the parking
brake is engaged) resulting in the risk of an Note
accident.
● If the selector lever is moved accidentally Fig. 173 Selector lever lock.
● Never move the selector lever to R or P
to N when driving, release the accelerator and
when driving. Failure to follow this instruc- The selector lever lock prevents gears from
Operation
let the engine speed drop to idling before se-
tion could result in an accident. lecting gear range D or S again. being engaged inadvertently, so that the ve-
● With selector lever in any position (except
● Should the power supply to the selector hicle is not set in motion unintentionally.
P) the vehicle must always be held with the lever be interrupted in position P, the selector
foot brake when the engine is running. This is The selector lever lock is released as follows:
lever will be locked. If this should happen the
because an automatic gearbox still transmits manual release can be used ››› page 46. – Switch the ignition on.
power even at idling speed, and the vehicle
Emergencies
tends to “creep”. The accelerator pedal must – Press the brake pedal and, at the same
on no account be pressed inadvertently when time, hold the lock button in the direction
a gear is engaged with the vehicle stationary. of the arrow ››› Fig. 173.
The vehicle could otherwise start moving im-
mediately (in some cases even if the parking Automatic selector lever lock
brake is engaged) resulting in the risk of an With the ignition switched on, the selector
accident. lever is locked in the positions P and N. The
● While you are selecting a gear and the vehi- brake pedal must be pressed to release the
Safety
cle is stopped with the engine running, do lever while pressing the release button if the
not accelerate. Failure to follow this instruc- selector lever is in the position P. As a re-
tion could result in an accident. minder for the driver, with the lever in posi-
● As a driver you should never leave your ve- tions P or N the following message will be
hicle if the engine is running and a gear is en- shown on the display: »
189
Operation
190
Driving
Changing gear manually with the selector When accelerating, the gearbox automatical- Stopping briefly
Technical data
lever ly shifts up into the next gear shortly before – Apply the foot brake to hold the vehicle
It is possible to change to tiptronic mode, the maximum engine speed is reached. briefly when stationary (for instance at traf-
both when the vehicle is stopped and while If you select a lower gear, the automatic gear- fic lights). Do not press the accelerator.
driving. box will not shift down until there is no risk of
– To switch to tiptronic mode, move the se- over-revving the engine. Stopping/Parking
lector lever from position D/S to the right. When the kick-down feature is used, the If the driver door is opened and the selector
As soon as the change is made the selector gearbox shifts down to a lower gear, depend- lever is not in position P, the vehicle could
Advice
level will be shown in the position M on the ing on road speed and engine speed. move. The driver message will be: Gear
instrument panel display (for example M4 change: selector lever in the
means that the fourth gear is engaged). drive position!. Additionally, a buzzer
Driving tips will sound.
– Move the selector lever forwards + to se-
lect a higher gear ››› Fig. 174. – Press and hold the brake pedal ››› .
The gearbox changes gear ratios automatical-
Operation
– Move the selector lever backwards – to ly as the vehicle moves. – Apply the handbrake.
select a lower gear. – Move the selector lever to position P.
The engine can only start with the selector
Changing gear manually with the gearshift lever in position P or N. At low temperatures,
below -10°C (50°F), the engine can only start Holding the car on a hill
paddles*
with the selector lever in position P. – Always apply the brake pedal firmly to pre-
The gearshift paddles can be used when the
Emergencies
vent the vehicle from “moving backwards;
selector lever is in the position D/S or M. Starting the vehicle if necessary, apply the handbrake” ››› .
– Press the gearshift paddle + to select a – Press and hold the brake pedal. Do not try to stop the vehicle “rolling back”
higher gear ››› Fig. 175. by increasing the engine speed when a
– Press and hold the interlock button (the gear is engaged (pressing the accelerator)
– Press the gearshift paddle – to select a button on the selector lever handle), move ››› .
lower gear. the selector lever to the desired position,
– With the selector lever in position D/S, if no for instance D ››› page 188, and release the Starting off uphill
Safety
paddle is operated during a short period of interlock button.
– Apply the handbrake.
time, the gearbox control system switches – Wait for the gearbox to engage the gear (a
back to automatic mode. To switch to per- – Once you have engaged a gear press the
slight movement can be felt).
manent manual gear change using the accelerator carefully and disengage the
gearshift paddles, move the selector lever – Release the brake and press the accelerator handbrake. »
from position D/S to the right. ››› .
191
Operation
Driving down hills: in some situations (on age the automatic gearbox. Apply the hand- cause the driving wheels to spin, which could
mountain roads or when towing a trailer or brake firmly or press the brake pedal in order result in skidding.
caravan) it can be advantageous to switch to prevent the vehicle from rolling back.
temporarily to the manual gearbox pro- ● If you allow the car to roll with the selector
gramme so that the gear ratios can be selec- lever in position N with the engine switched
ted manually to suit the driving conditions
Launch control programme
off, the automatic gearbox will be damaged
››› . as it will not be lubricated. 3 Valid for vehicles: with Launch-Control/6-Speed
DSG with diesel engines superior to 125 kW and pet-
On level ground it is sufficient to move the ● In certain driving situations or traffic condi- rol engines superior to 140 kW.
selector lever to position P. On slopes, first tions, such as frequently starting, prolonged
engage the parking brake and then put the “creeping” of the vehicle or traffic jams with The Launch control programme enables maxi-
selection lever into the P position. This continuous stoppages, the gearbox could mum acceleration.
overheat causing damage! If the warning
avoids overloading the locking mechanism Important: the engine must have reached op-
lamp lights up, stop the vehicle as soon as
and it will be easier to move the selector lev- erating temperature and the steering wheel
possible and wait for the gearbox to cool
er from position P. ››› page 195. must not be turned.
– When the engine is running, switch off the causing the vehicle to lose grip. Risk of acci- ble for the slope. The downhill speed control
Technical data
traction control (ASR)1). dent! function attempts to maintain the speed at
● After putting the vehicle into gear, the
which the vehicle was travelling when the
– Turn the selector lever to the position “S”
“sport” mode of the ESC should be deactiva- foot brake was applied (subject to the laws of
or tiptronic, or else select the sport driv-
ted again by briefly pressing the OFF but- physics and technical drive limitations). It
ing mode from the SEAT Drive Profile*
ton. may be necessary to adjust the speed again
››› page 237.
using the foot brake in certain situations. Giv-
– Press the brake pedal firmly with your left en that the downhill speed control can only
foot and hold it down for at least one sec- Note
change down to 3rd gear, on very steep de-
Advice
ond. ● After using the Launch control programme, scents the tiptronic mode may be required. In
the temperature in the gearbox may have in- this case, manually reduce the tiptronic to
– With your right foot, press the accelerator
creased considerably. In this case, the pro- 2nd or 1st gear to use the engine brake and
down to the full throttle or kick-down posi- gramme could be disabled for several mi- reduce the charge on the brakes.
tion. The engine speed will stabilise at nutes. The programme can be used again af-
about 3,200 rpm (petrol engine) or about ter the cooling phase. Downhill speed control is deactivated as
Operation
2,000 rpm (diesel engine). ● Accelerating with the Launch control pro- soon as the road levels out again or you
– Take your left foot off the brake pedal. gramme places a heavy load on all parts of press the accelerator pedal.
the vehicle. This can result in increased wear On vehicles with cruise control system*
WARNING and tear. ››› page 204, downhill speed control is acti-
● Always adapt your driving style to the traf- vated when you set a cruising speed.
fic conditions.
Emergencies
● Only use the launch control programme
Downhill speed control* WARNING
when road and traffic conditions permit, and The downhill speed control cannot defy the
make sure your manner of driving and accel-
The downhill speed control function helps laws of physics. Therefore, speed cannot be
erating the vehicle does not inconvenience or the driver when driving down steep gradi- maintained constant in all situations. Always
endanger other road users. ents. be prepared to use the brakes!
● Make sure that the ESC remains switched Downhill speed control is activated when the
on. Please note that when the ASR and ESC selector lever is in D/S and the driver applies
Safety
are deactivated, the wheels may start to spin, the foot brake. The automatic gearbox auto-
matically engages a lower gear that is suita-
Inertia mode the need for fuel) facilitates improved fuel If all the positions of the selector lever are
consumption and emission balance. shown over a light background on the instru-
The inertia mode enables the kinetic energy ment panel display, there is a system fault
of the vehicle to be harnessed enabling cer- WARNING and the automatic gearbox will operate in
tain stretches to be driven without using the ● If the inertia mode has been switched on, with the backup programme. When the back-
accelerator. This enables fuel to be saved. take into account, when approaching an ob- up programme is activated, it is possible to
Use the inertia mode to “let the vehicle roll” stacle and releasing the accelerator pedal, drive the vehicle, however, at low speeds and
before, for example, arriving in a town. that the vehicle will not decelerate in the usu- within a selected range of gears. In some ca-
al manner: risk of accident! ses driving in reverse gear may not be possi-
Switching on inertia mode ● When using inertia mode while travelling ble.
Important: selector lever must be in position down hills, the vehicle can increase speed:
risk of accident! CAUTION
D, gradients below 12 %.
● If other users drive your vehicle, warn them If the gearbox operates with the backup pro-
– Select, in SEAT Drive Profile*, Eco mode
about inertia mode. gramme, take the vehicle to a specialised
››› page 237. workshop and have the fault repaired without
– Take your foot off the accelerator. delay.
Note
The driver message Inertia will be dis- ● Inertia mode is only available in eco (SEAT
played. At speeds higher than 20 km/h (12 Drive Profile*) driving mode.
mph), the gearbox will automatically disen- Clutch
● The driver message Inertia is only dis-
gage and the vehicle will roll freely, without played with the current consumption. In iner- Clutch overheating! Please
the effect of the engine brake. While the vehi- tia mode the gear will no longer be displayed stop!
cle rolls, the engine runs at idling speed. (for example “E” will appear instead of “E7”).
● On downhill sections with gradients above The clutch has overheated and could be dam-
Stopping inertia mode 15 %, the inertia mode will automatically be aged. Stop the vehicle and wait for the gear-
– Press the brake or the accelerator pedal. switched off temporarily. box to cool with the engine at idling speed
and the selector lever in position P. When the
To make use of the braking force and switch warning lamp and the driver message switch
off the engine again, simply press the brake off, have the fault corrected by a specialised
pedal briefly. Backup programme workshop without delay. If the warning lamp
and the driver message do not switch off, do
Applying both the inertia mode (= prolonged A backup programme is in place if a fault
not continue driving. Seek specialist assis-
section with less energy) and the switching should occur in the control system.
tance.
off using inertia (= shorter section without
194
Driving
Gearbox malfunctions Gearbox: press the brake and You should also avoid driving with the engine
Technical data
engage a gear again. speed too low. Change down to a lower gear
Gearbox: Fault! Stop the ve- when the engine no longer runs “smoothly”.
If the fault was caused by a gearbox with a
hicle and place the lever in the If the engine revs too much, cut fuel injection
high temperature, this driver message will be
position P. to protect the engine.
displayed when the gearbox has cooled
There is a fault in the gearbox. Stop the vehi- again.
cle in a safe place and do not continue driv-
ing. Seek specialist assistance. Environmental compatibility
Advice
Gearbox: System fault! You Run-in and economical driving Environmental protection is a top priority in
may continue driving. the design, choice of materials and manufac-
Have the fault corrected by a specialised Running-in the engine ture of your new SEAT.
workshop without delay.
A new vehicle should be run in over a dis- Constructive measures to encourage recy-
Gearbox: System fault! You tance of 1500 km (1000 miles). For the first cling
Operation
can continue driving with re- 1,000 km the engine speed should not ex- ● Joints and connections designed for easy
strictions. Reverse gear disa‐ ceed 2/3 of the maximum permissible engine
bled dismantling.
speed. In doing so, do not accelerate at full
● Modular construction to facilitate disman-
Take the vehicle to a specialised workshop throttle and do not drive with a trailer! From
1000 to 1500 km (600 to 1000 miles) you tling.
and have the fault repaired without delay.
can gradually increase the engine rpm and ● Increased use of single-grade materials.
Emergencies
Gearbox: System fault! You road speed. ● Plastic parts and elastomers are marked in
can continue driving in D until
switching off the engine During its first few hours of running, the in- accordance with ISO 1043, ISO 11469 and
ternal friction in the engine is greater than ISO 1629.
Stop the vehicle in a safe place well away later on when all the moving parts have bed-
from moving traffic. Seek specialist assis- ded down. Choice of materials
tance.
How the vehicle is driven for the first 1,500 ● Use of recycled materials.
Gearbox: too hot. Adapt your
Safety
km influences the future engine perform- ● Use of compatible plastics in the same part
driving accordingly ance. Subsequently, also drive at a moderate if its components are not easily separated.
Continue driving at moderate speeds. When rate, especially when the engine is still cold: ● Use of recycled materials and/or materials
the warning lamp switches off, you can con- this will lead to less engine wear and tear originating from renewable sources. »
tinue driving in a normal manner. and will prolong its useful life.
195
Operation
● Reduction of volatile components, includ- pends largely on driving style. Fuel consump- Changing gear to save energy
ing odour, in plastic materials. tion can be reduced by 10-15% with an eco- An effective way of saving is to change in ad-
● Use of CFC-free coolants. nomical driving style and proper anticipation vance to a higher gear. Running the engine at
of traffic conditions. The following section high rpm in the lower gears uses an unneces-
Ban on heavy metals, with the exceptions gives you some tips on lessening the impact sary amount of fuel.
dictated by law (Annex II of ELV Directive on the environment and reducing your oper-
2000/53/EC): cadmium, lead, mercury, hexa- ating costs at the same time. Manual gearbox: shift up from first to second
valent chromium. gear as soon as possible. In any case, we rec-
Active cylinder management (ACT®)* ommend that you change to a higher gear
Manufacturing methods upon reaching 2,000 rpm. Choosing the right
Depending on vehicle equipment, the active gear enables fuel savings. Select the highest
● Reduction of the quantity of thinner in the cylinder management (ACT®) may automati- possible gear appropriate for the driving sit-
protective wax for cavities. cally deactivate some of the engine cylinders uation (the engine should continue function-
● Use of plastic film as protection during ve- if the driving situation does not require too ing with cyclical regularity).
hicle transport. much power. When it is switched off, no fuel
is injected into these cylinders, hence total Automatic gearbox: accelerate gradually and
● Use of solvent-free adhesives. without reaching the “kick-down” position.
fuel consumption may be reduced. The num-
● Use of CFC-free coolants in cooling sys- ber of active cylinders can be seen on the in-
tems. strument panel display ››› page 35. Avoid driving at high speed
● Recycling and energy recovery from resi- Avoid travelling at top speed, whenever pos-
dues (RDF). Foresight when driving sible. Fuel consumption, emission of harmful
● Improvement in the quality of waste water. Acceleration causes the vehicle to consume gases and noise pollution multiply dispropor-
● Use of systems for the recovery of residual more fuel. If you think ahead when driving, tionately as speed is increased. Driving at
you will need to brake less and thus acceler- moderate speeds will help to save fuel.
heat (thermal recovery, enthalpy wheels,
etc.). ate less. Wherever possible, let the car roll
slowly to a stop, with a gear engaged (for in- Reduce idling time
● The use of water-soluble paints.
stance when you can see that the next traffic In vehicles with the Start-Stop system idling
lights are red). This takes advantage of the is automatically reduced. In vehicles without
engine braking effect, reducing wear on the the Start-Stop system it is worth switching off
Economical and environmentally- brakes and tyres. Emissions and fuel con- the engine, for example, at level crossings
friendly driving sumption will drop to zero due to the overrun and at traffic lights that remain red for long
fuel cut-off. periods of time. When an engine has reached
Fuel consumption, environmental pollution operating temperature, and depending on
and wear to the engine, brakes and tyres de- the cylinder capacity, keeping it switched off
196
Driving
for a minimum of about 5 seconds already Check tyre pressure Engine management and ex-
Technical data
saves more than the amount of fuel necessa- Always make sure the tyres are inflated to the
ry for restarting. haust gas purification system
correct pressures ››› page 305 to save fuel. If
The engine takes a long time to warm up the pressure is below half bar, fuel consump-
tion may increase by 5%. Due to the greater
Introduction
when it is idling. Mechanical wear and pollu-
tant emissions are also especially high dur- rolling resistance, under-inflation also increa-
ses tyre wear and impairs handling. WARNING
ing this initial warm-up phase. It is therefore
best to drive off immediately after starting ● Because of the high temperatures which
Do not use winter tyres all year round as they
can occur in the exhaust purification system
Advice
the engine. Avoid running the engine at high increase fuel consumption by up to 10%.
speed. (catalytic converter or diesel particulate fil-
ter), do not park the vehicle where the ex-
Avoid carrying unnecessary loads haust can come into contact with flammable
Regular maintenance
Given that every kilo of extra weight will in- materials under the car (e.g. on grass or at
Regular servicing helps in saving fuel even crease the fuel consumption, it is advisable the forest edge). Fire hazard!
before the engine is started. A well-serviced to always check the luggage compartment to ● Do not apply wax underneath the vehicle
Operation
engine gives you the benefit of improved fuel make sure that no unnecessary loads are be- around the area of the exhaust system: Fire
efficiency as well as maximum reliability and ing transported. hazard!
an enhanced resale value. A badly serviced
engine can consume up to 10% more fuel Since the luggage rack increases the aerody-
namic drag of the vehicle, you should remove Note
than necessary.
it when not needed. At speeds of 100-120 While the control lamps , , or re-
Emergencies
Avoid short journeys km/h (62-75 mph), this will save 12% of fuel. main lit, there may be engine problems, fuel
consumption may increase and the engine
The engine and catalytic converter need to may lose power.
Save electrical energy
reach their optimal operating temperature in
order to minimise fuel consumption and The engine drives the alternator, thereby gen-
emissions. erating electricity. This implies that any in-
crease in power consumption also increases Catalytic converter
A cold engine consumes a disproportionate fuel consumption! For this reason, switch off 3 Applies to vehicles with petrol engine
amount of fuel. The engine reaches its work-
Safety
any unneeded electrical devices. Devices that
ing temperature after about four kilometres use a lot of electricity includes the blower at The vehicle must only be used with unleaded
(2.5 miles), when fuel consumption will re- a high setting, the rear window heating or petrol, otherwise the catalytic converter will
turn to a normal level. the seat heating*. be irreparably damaged. »
197
Operation
Never drive until the tank is empty; an irregu- to a specialised workshop to rectify the prob- drive carefully to the nearest specialised
lar supply of fuel can cause faulty combus- lem. workshop to have the engine checked.
tion. In these cases, unburned fuel reaches
the exhaust system, which can overheat and
damage the catalytic converter. Engine management* Engine pre-heating/fault system*
This warning lamp monitors the engine man- The warning lamp lights up to show that the
Diesel particulate filter agement system for petrol engines. glow plugs are preheating the diesel engine.
3 Applies to vehicles with diesel engine The warning lamp (Electronic Power Con-
The control lamp lights up
trol) lights up when the ignition is switched
The diesel engine particulate filter eliminates on while system operation is being verified. It If the control lamp lights up when the en-
most of the soot from the exhaust gas sys- should go out once the engine is started. gine is started it means that the glow plugs
tem. Under normal driving conditions, the fil- are preheating. The engine can be started
ter cleans itself. The diesel particulate filter is If there is a fault in the electronic engine
straight away when the lamp switches off.
cleaned automatically without need for indi- management system while you are driving,
cation by the warning lamp . This may be this warning lamp will light up. Take the vehi-
Control lamp flashes
noticed because the engine idle speed in- cle to a specialised workshop as soon as
creases and an odour may be detected. possible and have the engine checked. If a fault develops in the engine management
system while you are driving, the glow plug
If automatic filter purification cannot be car- system lamp will flash . Take the vehicle to
ried out (because only short trips are taken, a specialised workshop as soon as possible
for example), soot will accumulate on the fil- Emission control system*
and have the engine checked.
ter and the Diesel particulate filter warning
Control lamp flashes:
lamp will switch on.
When there is misfiring that can damage the
Facilitate the automatic filter cleaning proc-
ess by driving in the following manner: drive
catalytic converter. Reduce speed and drive Driving tips
carefully to the nearest specialised workshop
for approximately 15 minutes at a minimum to have the engine checked.
speed of 60 km/h (37 mph) in 4th or 5th gear Driving on flooded roads
(automatic gearbox: gear S). Maintain the en-
The control lamp lights up: To prevent damage to the vehicle when driv-
gine speed at approximately 2,000 rpm. The
If a fault has developed during driving which ing through water, for example, along a floo-
rise in temperature causes the soot on the fil-
has reduced the quality of the exhaust gas ded road, please observe the following:
ter to burn. On completion of the cleaning
the warning lamp will switch off. If the warn- (e.g. lambda probe fault). Reduce speed and ● The water should never come above the
ing lamp does not switch off, go immediately lower edge of the bodywork.
198
Driving
Technical data
WARNING
After driving through water, mud, sludge,
etc., the braking effect can be delayed slight-
ly due to moisture build-up on the discs and
brake pads. Applying the brakes carefully
several times will remove the moisture and
restore the full braking effect.
Advice
CAUTION
● Driving through flooded areas may severely
damage vehicle components such as the en-
gine, transmission, running gear or electrical
Operation
system.
● Whenever driving through water, the Start-
Stop system* must be switched off
››› page 200.
Note
Emergencies
● Check the depth of the water before enter-
ing the flooded zone.
● Do not stop in the water, drive in reverse, or
stop the engine in any situation.
● Note that vehicles travelling in the opposite
direction may splash water that could exceed
the maximum permitted water height for your
Safety
vehicle.
● Avoid driving through salt water (corro-
sion).
199
Operation
Driver assistance systems ● The bonnet must be closed. Stopping/Starting the engine
● The engine must have reached a minimum
service temperature. Vehicles with a manual gearbox
Start-Stop System* – Before stopping the vehicle or when it is
● The reverse gear must not be engaged.
stopped, put it into neutral and release the
Description and operation ● The vehicle must not be on a very steep
clutch pedal. The engine will switch off. The
slope.
warning lamp will appear on the instru-
The Start-Stop system helps save fuel and re-
ment panel display. The engine may stop
duce CO2 emissions. WARNING
before the vehicle comes to a halt in the
In Start-Stop mode, the engine will automati- ● Never switch the engine off until the vehi- deceleration phase (at 7 km/h).
cally switch off when the vehicle stops or is cle is stationary. The brake servo and power
steering functions will not be completely cov- – When the clutch pedal is pressed the en-
stopping; for example when stopping at traf-
ered under warranty. More force may also be gine will start up again. The warning lamp
fic lights. The ignition remains switched on
needed to turn the steering wheel or to brake. will switch off.
during the stopping phase. The engine auto-
As you cannot steer and brake in the normal
matically switches back on when required. In
manner, there is a greater risk of accidents Vehicles with an automatic gearbox
this situation, the light of the and serious injury.
START ENGINE STOP button stays on1). – Use the foot brake to bring the vehicle to a
● Never remove the key from the ignition if
stop and keep the brake pedal pressed
As soon as the ignition is switched on, the the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, the steer- down with your foot. The engine will switch
Start-Stop function is automatically activa- ing could lock making it impossible to steer
off. The warning lamp will appear in the
ted. the vehicle.
display. The engine may stop before the ve-
● To avoid injury, make sure that the Start- hicle comes to a halt in the deceleration
Further information about the Start-Stop sys-
Stop system is switched off when working in phase (at 7 km/h or 2 km/h, depending on
tem can be found in the Easy Connect sys-
the engine compartment ››› page 202.
tem: by pressing the button in the Vehi- the vehicle’s gearbox).
cle status menu. – When you take your foot off the brake pedal
CAUTION
the engine will start up again. The warning
Basic requirements for the Start-Stop mode The Start-Stop system must always be lamp will switch off. In vehicles with the Au-
● The driver door must be closed. switched off when driving through flooded to Hold* system, when the system is active,
areas ››› page 202. the engine will not start if you remove your
● The driver must have their seat belt fas-
tened. foot from the brake pedal. The car starts
when you press the accelerator pedal.
Additional information related to the auto- again by immediately pressing the clutch The indication is shown on the instrument
Technical data
matic gearbox pedal. panel display, and in addition, the driver in-
The engine stops when the selector lever is in formation system* shows, .
the positions P, D, N and S, in addition to
when in manual mode. With the selector lev- The engine starts by itself
General notes
er in position P, the engine will also remain During a stopping phase the normal Start-
switched off when you take your foot off the The system can interrupt the Start-Stop mode Stop mode can be interrupted in the follow-
brake pedal. In order to start the engine up frequently for different reasons. ing situations: The engine restarts by itself
again the accelerator must be pressed, or an- without involvement from the driver.
Advice
other gear engaged or the brake released. The engine does not switch off
● The interior temperature differs from the
If the selector lever is placed in position R Before the stopping phase, the system veri- value selected on the air conditioner.
during the stopping phase, the engine will fies whether certain conditions are met. The
● Defrost function button activated
start up again. engine does not switch off, in the following
situations for example:
››› page 48.
Change from position D to P to prevent the
Operation
● The brake has been pressed several times
engine from accidentally starting when ● The engine has not yet reached the mini- consecutively.
changing and passing by position R. mum required temperature for the Start-Stop ● The battery is too low.
mode.
Note ● High power consumption.
● The interior temperature selected for the air
● In vehicles with an automatic gearbox, you conditioner has not yet been reached.
Emergencies
can control whether the engine should switch Note
● The interior temperature is very high/low.
off or not by reducing or increasing the brake In vehicles with an automatic gearbox, if the
force applied. While the vehicle remains stop- ● Defrost function button activated selector lever is placed in position D, N or S
ped, the engine will not stop if the brake ped- ››› page 48. after engaging reverse gear, the vehicle must
al is slightly pressed, in traffic jams with fre- be driven at a speed faster than 10 km/h (6
● The parking aid* is switched on.
quent stopping and starting for example. As mph) for the system to return to conditions in
soon as strong pressure is applied to the ● The battery is very low. which the engine can be stopped.
brake pedal, the engine will stop. ● The steering wheel is overly turned or is be-
Safety
● In vehicles with manual gearbox, during ing turned.
the stopping phases the brake pedal must re- ● If there is a danger of misting.
main depressed to prevent the vehicle from
moving. ● After engaging reverse gear.
● If the engine “stalls” in vehicles with man- ● In case of a very steep gradient.
ual gearbox, it can be directly started up
201
Operation
Manually switching on/off the Start- Driver messages on the instrument After starting the descent of a slope below
Stop system panel display 30 km/h (18 mph), speed is limited to a min-
imum of 2 km/h (1 mph) and a maximum of
Start-Stop system deactivated. 30 km/h (18 mph). When appropriate, the
Start the engine manually driver may increase or decrease the speed
within the limit by pressing the accelerator or
This driver message is displayed when cer-
the brake. At this point the function is inter-
tain conditions are not met during the stop-
rupted and, if necessary, it is then reactiva-
ping phase and the Start-Stop system cannot
ted.
restart the engine. The engine must be star-
ted manually. Even so, it is imperative that the surface
guarantees sufficient adhesion. For this rea-
Start-Stop system: Fault! Func- son, the Hill Descent Control will not fulfil its
tion not available function when, for example, descending a
Fig. 176 Centre console: Start-Stop system slope with a frozen or slippery surface.
There is a fault in the Start-Stop system. Take
button. the vehicle to a workshop to have the fault Hill Descent Control is available when the
repaired. dash panel display shows the message .
If you do not wish to use the system, you can
switch it off manually. Hill Descent Control automatically intervenes
if the following conditions are met:
– To manually switch on/off the Start-Stop
system, press the button . The button Hill Descent Control (HDC) ● The vehicle engine is running.
symbol remains lit up yellow when the sys-
● The Offroad driving profile has been selec-
tem is switched off. Description and operation
ted ››› page 237. Driving at a speed below 30
3 Valid for vehicles: 4Drive
km/h (18 mph) (the message is shown on
Note
Hill Descent Control limits the speed on steep the dash panel display).
The system is automatically switched on each ● The slope of the descent is at least 10%
descents by automatically braking all four
time the engine is deliberately stopped dur-
ing a stopping phase. The engine will start wheels, both when moving forward and in re- when driving forward and 9% when driving in
automatically. verse. As the anti-lock brake system remains reverse.
active, it prevents the wheels from locking. In ● The brake and the accelerator are not
vehicles with manual transmission, the Hill pressed.
Descent Control adapts the theoretical speed
without slowing the engine below its idling Hill Descent Control is deactivated on press-
speed. ing the brake and the accelerator or if the
slope is below 5%. The function may be
202
Driver assistance systems
disconnected manually in the Easy Connect ● The speed of the vehicle may increase de- When connected, the Auto Hold function au-
Technical data
system by pressing the button and the spite the intervention of Hill Descent Control. tomatically prevents the vehicle from rolling
HDC function button ››› Fig. 41. when stationary without pressing the brake
pedal.
Control lamps After detecting that the vehicle is stationary
Auto Hold Function and the brake pedal has been released, the
››› in Warning and control lamps on
Auto Hold function holds the vehicle. The
page 117. Description and operation driver can lift their foot off the brake pedal.
Advice
It lights up white When the driver touches the accelerator ped-
al or accelerates slightly to continue driving,
Hill Descent Control is active.
the Auto Hold function releases the brake.
The vehicle moves according to the slope of
It lights up grey the road.
Operation
Hill Descent Control is not active. The system is switched If the vehicle is stationary and one of the con-
on, but is not adjusting. ditions required by the Auto Hold function is
impaired, it disconnects itself and the but-
Some warning and control lamps will light up ton's control light goes out ››› Fig. 177. The
briefly when the ignition is switched on to electronic parking brake connects automati-
check certain functions. They will switch off Fig. 177 In the lower part of the centre con- cally, if necessary, to park the vehicle safe-
after a few seconds. ly ››› .
Emergencies
sole: Auto Hold function button.
WARNING The control light of the ››› Fig. 177 button Conditions for keeping the vehicle stationary
Observe the safety warnings ››› in Warning remains on when the Auto Hold function is with the Auto Hold function
and control lamps on page 117. connected.
● The driver door must be closed.
Once connected, the Auto Hold function as- ● The driver's seat belt must be fastened.
WARNING sists the driver in keeping the vehicle station-
● The engine is running.
ary at repeated intervals or for a certain peri-
Safety
Always be ready to brake. Otherwise, an acci-
dent could occur and cause injury. od of time with the engine running, for exam-
ple, when going up a slope, when stopped at Switching the Auto Hold function on and off
● Hill Descent Control is only an auxiliary
system that in some situations may not suffi-
traffic lights or in heavy traffic with intermit- Press the button ››› . The control lamp on
ciently brake the vehicle when going down a tent stops. the button goes out when the Auto Hold func-
slope. tion is switched off. »
203
Operation
Automatically engaging and disengaging the The Auto Hold function is automatically ● The Auto Hold function cannot always keep
Auto Hold function turned off if the following conditions are the vehicle stationary uphill or downhill or
If the Auto Hold function was switched on met: stop it sufficiently, for example, on slippery
with the button before disengaging the ig- or frozen surfaces.
Manual gearbox Automatic gearbox
nition, the function will remain on after the
ignition is re-engaged. If any of the conditions mentioned on Note
1.
››› page 203, Conditions for keeping the vehicle
If the Auto Hold function was not switched stationary with the Auto Hold function are no lon- Before entering a car wash, always switch off
on, it will automatically remain off next time ger met. the Auto Hold function, because if the elec-
the ignition is engaged. tronic parking brake is automatically connec-
If the engine is running irregularly or an anomaly ted, it may cause damage.
2.
is detected.
The Auto Hold function is automatically
switched on if the following conditions are 3.
If the engine is turned If the engine is switch-
met: off or stalls. ed off.
Cruise control system (CCS)*
The clutch and the ac-
All conditions must be met at the same time If the accelerator is
4. celerator are pressed at
››› : the same time.
pressed. Operation
Manual gearbox Automatic gearbox If any of the tyres has
only minimal contact
1. The vehicle is kept stationary with the brake ped- 5. with the ground, e.g. in
al on a flat surface or on a slope. the case of axle articu-
lation.
2. The engine rotates “correctly”.
204
Driver assistance systems
Read the additional information carefully WARNING Operating the cruise control system*
Technical data
››› page 42
Use of the cruise control could cause acci- Read the additional information carefully
The cruise control system (CCS) is able to dents and severe injuries if it is not possible
maintain the set speed from 20 km/h (15
››› page 42
to drive at a constant speed maintaining the
mph). safety distance. The value indicated in the table in brackets
● Do not use the cruise control in heavy traf- (in mph, miles per hour) only refers to instru-
The CSS only reduces vehicle speed by ceas-
fic, if the distance from the vehicle in front is ment panels with indications in miles.
ing to accelerate, not by actively braking the
insufficient, on steep roads, with several
vehicle ››› .
Advice
bends or in slippery circumstances (snow, Changing gear in CCS mode
ice, rain or loose gravel), or on flooded roads.
Control lamp The CCS decelerates as soon as the clutch
● Never use the CCS when driving off-road or
pedal is pressed, intervening again automati-
When the warning lamp is lit, cruise con- on unpaved roads. cally after a gear is engaged.
trol is active. ● Always adapt your speed and the distance
Several warning and control lamps light up to the vehicles ahead in line with visibility, Travelling down hills with the CCS
Operation
for a few seconds when the ignition is switch- weather conditions, the condition of the road
and the traffic situation. When travelling down hills the CCS cannot
ed on, signalling that the function is being
● To avoid unexpected operation of the cruise
maintain a constant speed. Slow the vehicle
verified. They will switch off after a few sec-
control system, turn it off every time you fin- down using the brake pedal and reduce
onds.
ish using it. gears if required.
Displayed on the CCS screen ● It is dangerous to use a set speed which is
Emergencies
too high for the prevailing road, traffic or
Automatic off
Status Fig. 178: weather conditions. The cruise control system (CCS) is switched
A CCS temporarily switched off. The set ● When travelling down hills, the CCS cannot off automatically or temporarily:
speed is displayed in small or darkened maintain a constant speed. The vehicle tends
● If the system detects a fault that could af-
figures. to accelerate under its own weight. Select a
lower gear or use the foot brake to slow the fect the working order of the CCS.
B System error. Contact a specialised work- vehicle. ● If you press and maintain the accelerator
shop.
pedal for a certain time, driving faster than
Safety
C CCS switched on. The speed memory is WARNING the stored speed.
empty. ● If the dynamic driving control systems in-
Observe the safety warnings ››› in Warning
D The CCS is switched on. The set speed is and control lamps on page 117. tervene (e.g. ASR or ESC).
displayed in large figures. ● If the airbag is triggered.
205
Operation
Speed limiter C The speed limiter is switched off. The to- aquaplaning, snow, ice, leaves, etc. You
tal mileage is displayed. should use the speed limiter function only
Display messages and warning and when traffic, road and weather conditions al-
Warning and control lamp low it to be used safely.
control lamp
● When driving downhill, the speed limiter
Lights up green
cannot limit the vehicle speed. Its speed will
The speed limiter is switched on and active. increase due to its own weight. In this case,
select a lower gear or use the foot brake to
slow the vehicle.
Flashes green
The speed set by the speed limiter has been exceeded. WARNING
Observe the safety warnings ››› in Warning
Lights up and control lamps on page 117.
The adaptive cruise control (ACC) and the speed limiter
are active. Note
Fig. 179 On the instrument panel display:
● Different versions of the instrument panel
messages on the status of the speed limiter. Some warning and control lamps will light up
are available and therefore the versions and
briefly when the ignition is switched on to
instructions on the display may vary.
The speed limiter helps avoid exceeding a check certain functions. They will switch off
● If when switching the ignition off, the
speed individually programmed upwards of after a few seconds.
approximately 30 km/h (19 mph) driving in cruise control system (CCS), the adaptive
cruise control (ACC) or the speed limiter were
forwards gears ››› WARNING
switched on, then the cruise control system
After use, always switch off the speed limiter or the adaptive cruise control will automati-
Display messages on the speed limiter to prevent the speed being regulated against cally switch themselves on when the ignition
Status ››› Fig. 179: your wishes. is back on. However, no speed will be stored.
● The speed limiter does not relieve the driv- The last set speed of the speed limiter will be
A The speed limiter is active. The last
er of their responsibility to drive at the appro- stored.
speed set is displayed in large figures.
priate speed. Do not drive at high speed if not
B The speed limiter is not active. The last necessary.
speed set is displayed in small or dark- ● Using the speed limiter with adverse
ened figures. weather conditions is dangerous and can
cause serious accidents, e.g. because of
206
Driver assistance systems
Technical data
Advice
Fig. 180 On the left of the steering column: Fig. 181 On the left of the steering column:
control and buttons to operate the speed lim- third lever for operating the speed limiter.
iter.
Operation
Position of the turn signal lever ››› Fig. 180 or the third lever
Function Effect
››› Fig. 181
Move controller 1 of the turn signal lever to the position and press but- The system switches on. The last set speed of the speed lim-
Emergencies
Switching on the speed limiter
ton 2 or move the third lever forward and press button 2 . iter is stored. It does not take effect yet.
Safety
Temporarily switching off the speed limit- Place control 1 of the turn signal lever in position or move the third The limiter is switched off temporarily. The speed will be
er limitation lever into position . stored.
Temporarily switch off the speed limiter The limiter is switched off temporarily. The speed will be
Press down on the accelerator beyond the point of resistance (e.g. to over-
limitation pressing down the accelerator stored. The limiter is reactivated automatically after return-
(kick-down)
take). Surpassing the set speed switches the speed limiter off temporarily.
ing to less than the set speed. »
207
Operation
Position of the turn signal lever ››› Fig. 180 or the third lever
Function Effect
››› Fig. 181
Press button 3 on the turn signal lever or move the third lever into posi- The speed is limited to the set speed as soon as the speed
Switching the speed limiter on again
tion . you are driving at is lower than the speed set as maximum.
Briefly press button 3 on the turn signal lever in the area or move
the third lever into position to increase the speed in small incre-
ments of 1 km/h (1 mph) and set it.
Hold down button 3 on the turn signal lever in the area or hold
down to increase continuously in increments of 10 km/h (5 mph)
and set it.
Briefly press button 3 on the turn signal lever in the area or press
1 on the third lever to reduce the speed in small increments of 1 km/h
(1 mph) and set it.
Hold down button 3 on the turn signal lever in the area or hold
down to reduce the speed continuously in increments of 10 km/h
(5 mph) and set it.
Move control 1 of the turn signal lever into position or the third lever
Switching off the speed limiter The system switches off. The set speed will be stored.
into position .
The values shown in the table in brackets, in ››› page 206 and an acoustic warning may ››› Fig. 180 1 of the turn signal lever into po-
mph, are displayed only in instrument panels sound. In this case, use the foot brake to sition or the third lever into pressure
with indications in miles. slow the vehicle or, if necessary, select a low- point or press button 2 on any lever.
er gear.
After overtaking, the speed limiter can be
Going down slopes with the speed limiter
switched on with the previously set speed by
If the set speed of the speed limiter is excee- Switching off temporarily
pressing button 3 on the turn signal lever in
ded while driving downhill, soon afterwards If you wish to temporarily switch off the the area or by moving the third lever in-
the warning and control lamps flash speed limiter, e.g. to overtake, move control to pressure point.
208
Driver assistance systems
Switch the speed limiter off temporarily by Adaptive Cruise Control ACC* porary distance required with regard to the
Technical data
pressing down the accelerator (kick-down) vehicle in front. The ACC function will adapt
the vehicle's cruise speed at all times, main-
If the accelerator is pressed right down (kick- Related video
down) and the set speed is exceeded be- taining a safe distance with the vehicle in
cause driver wishes to do so, the limiter is front.
temporarily disabled. The ACC function is based on a radar sensor
To confirm it being switched off an acoustic that can measure the distance to the vehicles
signal sound once. While the limiter is off, in front.
Advice
the warning and control lamp flashes. Fig. 182 Autonomous If the vehicle is equipped with automatic
When the accelerator is no longer pressed driving gearbox, the ACC can brake the vehicle until
down and the speed is reduced below the set it stops completely if a vehicle in front of it
value, the limiter switches on again. The con- stops.
trol lamp will light up and remain lit. Introduction
Driver intervention prompt
Operation
Automatic off During driving, the ACC is subject to certain
The speed limiter is automatically switched limitations inherent in the system. In other
off: words, in certain circumstances the driver will
have to adjust speed him or herself, as well
● If the system detects a fault that could neg- as the distance from other vehicles.
Emergencies
atively affect the working order of the limiter. In this case, the instrument panel screen will
● If the airbag is triggered. warn you to intervene by applying the brake
and a warning tone will be heard
CAUTION ››› page 211.
For automatic switching off due to system
failures, for security reasons, the limiter is Fig. 183 Detection area. WARNING
only completely switched off when the driver The intelligent technology in the ACC cannot
stops pressing the accelerator at some point The adaptive cruise control (ACC) is an exten-
Safety
overcome the system's inherent limitations
or consciously switches off the system. sion of the normal cruise control system
or change the laws of physics. If used negli-
(CCS) ››› . gently or involuntarily, it may cause serious
The ACC function allows the driver to estab- accidents and injuries. The system is not a re-
lish a cruise speed of between 30 and 210 placement for driver awareness. »
km/h (18 and 150 mph), as well as the tem-
209
Operation
● Adapt your speed and safe distance to the CAUTION Indications on the display, warning
vehicle in front of you at all times to suit visi-
If you have the sensation that the radar sen-
and control lamps
bility, weather, road and traffic conditions.
sor is damaged, disconnect the ACC. This will
● Do not use the ACC when visibility is bad, avoid possible damage. If this occurs have it
on steep roads, with several bends or in slip- adjusted.
pery circumstances such as snow, ice, rain or ● Repairs to the radar sensor require special-
loose gravel, or on flooded roads.
ist knowledge and special tools. SEAT recom-
● Never use the ACC when driving off-road or mends visiting a SEAT dealership for this pur-
on unpaved roads. The ACC has been de- pose.
signed for use on paved roads only.
● The ACC does not react on approaching a
Note
fixed obstacle, such as the tail of a traffic
jam, a damaged vehicle or a vehicle stopped ● If the ACC system does not work as descri-
at the traffic lights. bed in this chapter, do not use it until it has
● The ACC only reacts to people if a pedes-
been checked by a specialised workshop.
SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealership
trian monitoring system is available. In addi-
for this purpose.
tion, the system does not react to animals or
vehicles crossing your path or approaching ● Maximum speed with the ACC activated is
head-on down the same lane. limited to 210 km/h (150 mph).
● If the ACC does not reduce speed sufficient- ● When the ACC is switched on, strange
ly, brake the vehicle immediately by applying noises may be heard during automatic brak-
the pedal. ing cause by the braking system.
● If you are driving using the spare wheel,
the ACC system could automatically switch Fig. 184 On the instrument panel display: (A)
off during the journey. Switch off the system ACC temporarily inactive, vehicle detected in
when starting off. front, temporary distance adjusted. (B) ACC
● If the vehicle continues to move involuntar- active, vehicle detected in front, temporary
ily after a driver intervention prompt, brake distance adjusted.
the vehicle by applying the pedal.
● If the dash panel displays a driver interven- Status display
tion prompt, adjust the distance yourself. Indications on the display ››› Fig. 184:
● The driver should be ready to accelerate or 1 Vehicle in front, the ACC is inactive.
brake by him/herself at all times.
210
Driver assistance systems
Technical data
active.
No vehicle is detected in front. The programmed speed Observe the safety warnings ››› in Warning
3 Vehicle detected in front. The ACC is ac- and control lamps on page 117.
remains constant.
tive.
4 Adjustment of the temporary distance Note
If the symbol is white: the ACC is ac-
from the vehicle in front with a program- tive.
med speed. When the ACC is connected, the indications
on the instrument panel screen may be con-
5 Temporary distance adjustment from the A vehicle in front has been detected. The ACC adjusts
cealed by warnings from other functions,
Advice
speed and distance from the vehicle in front.
vehicle in front with a programmed such as an incoming call.
speed.
If the symbol is grey: the ACC is not
active.
Warning and control lamps
Radar sensor
The system is switched on, but is not adjusting.
››› in Warning and control lamps on
Operation
page 117.
The speed reduction by the ACC to The ACC and the speed limiter are active.
maintain the distance from the vehi-
cle in front is not sufficient.
Emergencies
Brake! apply the foot brake! Driver intervention prompt.
The ACC and the cruise control system (CCS) are active.
Safety
check certain functions. They will switch off sensor has been installed to capture the traf-
fic situation ››› Fig. 185.
a) The symbol on the instrument panels with colour display is in
after a few seconds.
colour.
The radar sensor's visibility may be impaired
by dirt, mud or snow, or by environmental in-
fluences such as rain or mist. In this case the »
211
Operation
adaptive cruise control (ACC) does not work. CAUTION Operating the Adaptive Cruise Control
The instrument panel displays the following ACC
message: ACC: No sensor vision! If If you have the sensation that the radar sen-
sor is damaged or has lost its settings, dis-
necessary, clean the SEAT badge area ››› .
connect the ACC. This will avoid possible
When the radar sensor begins to operate damage. If this occurs have it adjusted.
properly again, the ACC will automatically be ● The sensor may become damaged or lose
available again. The message on the instru- its settings when knocked, for example, dur-
ment panel screen will switch off and the ACC ing a parking manoeuvre. This may compro-
will be reactivated again. mise the system's efficacy or disconnect it.
● Repairs to the radar sensor require special-
ACC operation may be affected by a strong ra-
dar reverse reflection. This may occur, for ex- ist knowledge and special tools. SEAT recom-
mends visiting a SEAT dealership for this pur-
ample, in a closed car park or due to the
pose.
presence of metallic objects (e.g. rails on the
● Clean away the snow with a brush and the Fig. 186 On the left of the steering column:
road or sheets used in road works).
ice preferably with a solvent-free de-icer third lever for operating the Adaptive Cruise
The area in front of and around the radar sen- spray. Control.
sor should not be covered with adhesives,
additional or similar headlights, as this may
negatively affect ACC operation.
If structural modifications are made to the ve-
hicle, for example, if the suspension is low-
ered or the front spoiler is modified, ACC op-
eration may be affected. So structural modifi-
cations should only be made by specialised
workshops. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT
dealership for this purpose.
If work is done incorrectly on the front of the Fig. 187 On the left of the steering column:
vehicle, the radar sensor could be damaged third lever for operating the Adaptive Cruise
or lose its settings, and ACC operation may Control.
be affected. So repair work should only be
made by specialised workshops. SEAT recom- When the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is
mends visiting a SEAT dealership for this pur- connected, the green control lamp will
pose. light up on the instrument panel, and the
212
Driver assistance systems
programmed speed and ACC status will be ● Driving Programme. Any modification to the programmed speed
Technical data
displayed ››› Fig. 184. ● Driving style. is shown on the bottom left part of the instru-
ment panel display.
Conditions for the adaptive cruise control to Activating/Deactivating
be activated Adjusting distance level
Any speed1) between 30 and 210 km/h (19
● The selector lever must be at the D or S po- and 150 mph) can be adjusted. The distance according to speed with regard
sition or in the tiptronic selection track. In to the vehicle in front can be controlled on
manual gearbox any forward gear must be Activating the ACC the Easy Connect system on 5 levels
engaged, except the 1st gear. ››› page 31.
Advice
● In vehicles with manual gearbox, if there is
››› Fig. 186.
● Pull the lever to position 1
ACC standby will be shown on the instrument In wet road conditions, you should always set
no programmed speed, drive at least at a larger distance with regard to the vehicle in
panel display.
30 km/h (18 mph). front than when driving in dry conditions.
Programme speed and activate control The following distances can be preselected:
Speed control
Operation
● Press the SET ››› Fig. 187 button to pro- ● Very short
When the ACC is connected, speed can be
gramme current speed.
programmed and adjusted. The programmed ● Short
speed must be different from the speed at ● Automatic gearbox: apply the brake pedal
to activate control with the vehicle stationary. ● Media
which the vehicle travels if the distance is be-
ing adjusted at the time. ● Long
Deactivating the ACC ● Very long
Emergencies
What functions can be operated? ● Move the lever to position 0 until it en-
gages. The text ACC: off appears. In the Easy Connect system you can adjust
If you activate the ACC the current speed can the distance level that will be applied when
be programmed as the “control speed”.
Altering speed the ACC is connected using the button
During driving, control can be operated at and the SETTINGS and Driver assistance function
any time and the speed also modified. ● To increase or reduce speed step by step, buttons ››› page 31. »
press the lever up/down briefly ››› Fig. 187.
The following settings can also be adjusted:
Safety
● Distance.
Interrupting control ● To resume control, apply the brake and turn speed accordingly and then controls the ad-
Technical data
the lever to position 2 . justed distance. If the vehicle detected in
front accelerates, the adaptive cruise control
WARNING will also accelerate up to the target speed
It is dangerous to activate control and resume programmed at most.
the programmed speed if the road, traffic or The greater the speed, the greater the dis-
weather conditions do not permit this. Risk of tance in metres should be ››› . We recom-
accident! mend the setting Distance 3.
Advice
WARNING
Setting the distance With regard to distance setting, the driver is
responsible for observing country-specific
Fig. 188 On the left of the steering column: legislation.
third lever for operating the Adaptive Cruise
Control.
Operation
Important: the ACC is active. Driver messages
Emergencies
standby message is displayed to the driver.
or activated. The sensor has lost its setting or is
damaged. Take the vehicle to a specialised
● Brake. Fig. 189 Control lever: setting the distance.
workshop and have the fault repaired.
● To resume the programmed speed, turn the
● To display the distance currently program-
lever to position 2 . ACC: currently not available. No sensor vi-
med, briefly press the rocking button
››› Fig. 189. sion
Interrupt speed control with the vehicle sta-
Safety
tionary ● To increase/reduce the distance one level,
ACC and Front Assist: currently not availa-
press the rocking button again towards the ble. No sensor vision
Applies to vehicles with automatic gearbox: left/right. The instrument panel display
modifies the distance between both vehicles. This message will be displayed to the driver if
● Move the lever to the position 3 . The ACC
the radar sensor's vision is impaired due, for »
standby message is displayed to the driver. If the vehicle approaches another vehicle de-
tected in front of it, the ACC reduces the
215
Operation
example, to leaves, snow, heavy fog or dirt. ACC: speed limit Deactivating the Adaptive Cruise Con-
Clean the SEAT badge ››› Fig. 185. The message for the driver is displayed if, in trol ACC temporarily in certain situa-
vehicles with manual gearbox, the current tions
ACC: currently not available. Gradient too speed is too low for the ACC mode.
steep In the following situations the Adaptive
The speed to be stored must be at least
The maximum road slope has been excee- Cruise Control (ACC) should be deactivated
30 km/h (18 mph). The speed limiter
ded, hence safe ACC operation cannot be due to the system's limitations ››› :
switches off if the speed falls below 20 km/h
guaranteed. The ACC cannot be switched on. (12 mph). ● When changing lanes, on tight bends and
roundabouts, in acceleration and decelera-
ACC: only available in D, S or M ACC: available as of the 2nd gear tion lanes on motorways or in sections with
Select the D/S or M position on the selector The ACC is operational as of the 2nd gear road works to prevent involuntary accelera-
lever. (manual gearbox). tion to reach the programmed speed.
● When going through a tunnel, as operation
ACC: parking brake applied ACC: engine speed could be affected.
The ACC is deactivated if the parking brake is The message for the driver is displayed if, ● On roads with several lanes, when other ve-
applied. The ACC is available once again after when the ACC accelerates or brakes, the driv- hicles are driving more slowly in the overtak-
the parking brake is released. er does not shift up or down a gear in time, ing lane. In this case, slower vehicles will be
which means exceeding or not reaching the overtaken on the right.
ACC: currently not available. Intervention permissible engine speed. The ACC switches ● In case of heavy rain, snow or spray, as the
of stability control itself off. A buzzer warning is heard. vehicle in front might not be detected proper-
The message for the driver is displayed when ly or, in certain circumstances, might not be
the electronic stability control (ESC) inter- ACC: clutch pressed detected at all.
venes. In this case, the ACC is automatically Vehicles with a manual gearbox: pressing the
switched off. clutch pedal for longer abandons control WARNING
mode. If the ACC does not switch off in the situa-
ACC: Take action! tions described, serious accidents and inju-
The message for the driver is displayed if, Door open ries may occur.
when the vehicle starts up on a hill with a Vehicles with automatic gearbox: the ACC ● Always switch off the ACC in critical situa-
mild slope, the vehicle rolls back even al- cannot be activated with the vehicle station- tions.
though the ACC is activated. Apply the brake ary and the door open.
to stop the vehicle from moving/colliding
with another vehicle.
216
Driver assistance systems
Note Overtaking
Technical data
If you do not switch off the ACC in the afore- When the turn signal lights up before the ve-
mentioned situations, you may commit a le- hicle begins an overtaking manoeuvre, the
gal offence. ACC accelerates the vehicle automatically
and thus reduces the distance from the vehi-
cle in front.
Special driving situations When the vehicle enters the overtaking lane,
if the ACC does not detect another vehicle in
Advice
front, it accelerates until it reaches the pro-
grammed speed and maintains it.
System acceleration can be interrupted at
any time by pressing the brake or moving the
third lever backwards ››› page 212.
Operation
Fig. 191 (C) Vehicle changing lanes. (D) One Driving through a bend
vehicle turning and another stationary.
On entering or exiting bends, the radar sen-
sor may no longer determine the vehicle in
The adaptive cruise control (ACC) has certain
front or react to a vehicle in the adjacent lane
physical limitations inherent in the system.
››› Fig. 190 A. In these situations the vehicle
For example, certain reactions of the ACC, in
Emergencies
may brake unnecessarily or fail to react to re-
certain circumstances, may be unexpected or
act to the vehicle in front. In this case, the
come late from the driver's point of view. So
driver has to intervene by accelerating or in-
pay attention in order to intervene if necessa-
Fig. 190 (A) Vehicle on a bend. (B) Motorcy-
terrupting the braking process by applying
ry.
clist ahead out of range of the radar sensor. the brake or pushing the third lever back-
For example, the following traffic situations wards ››› page 212.
call for the utmost attention:
Driving in tunnels
Safety
Starting driving after a stopping phase (only When driving through tunnels the radar sen-
vehicles with automatic gearbox) sor may be limited. Switch off the ACC in tun-
After a stopping phase the ACC may begin nels. »
driving automatically when the vehicle in
front drives off.
217
Operation
Narrow or misaligned vehicles ››› Fig. 191 D. In these cases, you should Trailer mode
The radar sensor can only detect narrow or brake as necessary. When driving with trailer the ACC controls
misaligned vehicles when they are within less dynamically.
range ››› Fig. 190 B. This applies particularly Vehicles driving in the opposite direction
to narrow vehicles such as motorbikes. In and vehicles crossing your path Overheated brakes
these cases, you should brake as necessary. The ACC does not react to vehicles approach- If the brakes overheat, for example after
ing from the opposite direction or vehicles abrupt braking or in long and steep slopes,
Vehicles with special loads and accessories crossing your path. the ACC may be deactivated temporarily. The
Special loads and accessories of other vehi- relevant text message will appear in the dash
cles that jut out over the sides, backwards or Metal objects panel display. In this case, adaptive cruise
over the top may be out of the ACC's range. Metal objects, e.g. rails on the road or sheets control cannot be activated.
Switch off the ACC when driving behind vehi- used in road works, can confuse the radar Adaptive cruise control can be reactivated
cles with special loads and accessories or sensor and cause the ACC to react wrongly. once brake temperature has cooled suffi-
when overtaking them. In these cases, you ciently. The message will disappear from the
should brake as necessary. Factors that may affect how the radar sensor instrument panel display. If the message ACC
operates not available remains on for quite a long
Other vehicles changing lanes If laser sensor operation is impaired, due to time it means that there is a fault. Contact a
heavy rain, spray, snow or mud, the ACC is specialised workshop. SEAT recommends vis-
Vehicles changing lanes a short distance
deactivated temporarily. The relevant text iting a SEAT dealership.
away from your own can only be detected
when they are within range of the sensors. message will appear in the dash panel dis-
play. If necessary clean the SEAT WARNING
Consequently, the ACC will take longer to re-
act ››› Fig. 191 C. In these cases, you should badge ››› Fig. 185. If the message ACC ready to start ap-
brake as necessary. When the radar sensor begins to operate pears on the instrument panel display and
properly again, the ACC will automatically be the vehicle in front starts up, the vehicle will
Stationary vehicles available again. The message on the instru- start up automatically. In this case the radar
sensor may not detect obstacles on the road.
The ACC does not detect stationary objects ment panel screen will switch off and the ACC
This could cause an accident and serious in-
while driving, such as traffic tails or damaged will be reactivated again.
juries.
vehicles. ACC operation may be affected by a strong ra- ● Before driving off, check that the road is
If a vehicle detected by the ACC turns or dar reverse reflection, for example in a closed clear. If necessary, apply the brake.
moves over and there is a stationary vehicle car park.
in front of it, the ACC will not react to it
218
Driver assistance systems
Area monitoring system (Front The warning moment varies depending on contribute to reducing the consequences of
Technical data
the traffic situation and driver behaviour. an accident.
Assist) including City emergen-
cy braking and pedestrian Advance warning Front assist
monitoring* If the system detects a possible collision with If the Front Assist notices that the driver is
the vehicle in front, it may warn the driver by not braking sufficiently in case of a collision
Introduction means of an audible warning and an indica- hazard, the system can increase braking ef-
tion on the instrument panel when driving at fect and thus avert the collision when driving
a speed of between approximately 30 km/h at a speed of between approximately 4 km/h
Advice
The Front Assist system including City emer-
gency braking and pedestrian monitoring can (18 mph) and 250 km/h (156 mph) (2.5 mph) and 250 km/h (156 mph). Front
help avoid collisions. ››› Fig. 192. assist only acts while the brake pedal is
pressed down hard.
The Front Assist system may warn the driver, The warning moment varies depending on
within the constraints of the system, of im- the traffic situation and driver behaviour. At
WARNING
pending collisions, prepare the vehicle for the same time, the vehicle will prepare for a
Operation
emergency braking in case of danger, provide possible emergency braking ››› . The intelligent technology in the Front Assist
cannot change the laws of physics. The driver
support during braking and apply automatic
Critical warning is always responsible for braking in time. If
braking.
the Front Assist issues a warning, then, de-
The City emergency braking and pedestrian If the driver fails to react to the advance pending on the traffic circumstances, you
monitoring functions are an integral part of warning, the system may actively intervene in must brake immediately or dodge the obsta-
Emergencies
the Front Assist system. the brakes when driving at a speed of be- cle.
tween approximately 30 km/h (18 mph) and ● Adapt your speed and safe distance to the
The Front Assist is not a replacement for 250 km/h (156 mph), generating a brief jolt vehicle in front of you at all times to suit visi-
driver awareness. to warn of the imminent collision. bility, weather, road and traffic conditions.
● The Front Assist alone cannot avoid acci-
Distance warning Automatic braking dents and serious injuries.
If the system detects that safety is endan- If the driver also fails to react to the advance ● In complex driving situations, the Front As-
gered by the proximity of the vehicle in front, warning, the system may brake the vehicle sist may issue unnecessary warnings and in-
Safety
it may warn the driver by means of a message automatically, by progressively increasing tervene unnecessarily in braking, such as in
on the instrument panel when driving at a braking effect driving at a speed of between traffic islands.
speed of between approximately 60 km/h approximately 4 km/h (2.5 mph) and ● If the operation of the Front Assist is im-
(37 mph) and 250 km/h (156 mph) 250 km/h (156 mph). By reducing speed in paired, for example, by dirt or because the ra-
››› Fig. 192. case of a possible collision, the system may dar sensor has lost its settings, the system »
219
Operation
may issue unnecessary warnings and On-screen warning lamps and mes- Radar sensor
intervene inopportunely in the braking. sages
● Front Assist does not react to animals or ve-
hicles crossing your path or approaching
head-on down the same lane.
● The driver must always be ready to take
over the control of the vehicle.
Note
● When the Front Assist causes a braking,
the brake pedal is “harder”.
● Automatic interventions by the Front Assist Fig. 193 On the front behind the SEAT badge:
on the brakes may be interrupted by pressing Fig. 192 On the instrument panel display: radar sensor.
the clutch, accelerator or moving the wheel. Warning indications.
● If the Front Assist does not work as descri- On the front behind the SEAT badge, a radar
bed in this chapter (e.g. in intervenes several Distance warning sensor has been installed to capture the traf-
times unnecessarily), switch it off. Have the fic situation ››› Fig. 193.
If the safe distance with regard to the vehicle
system checked by a specialised workshop.
SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealership.
in front is exceeded, the relevant warning will The radar sensor's visibility may be impaired
appear on the instrument panel display by dirt, mud or snow, or by environmental in-
. fluences such as rain or mist. In this case the
Front Assist monitoring system does not
WARNING work. The instrument panel displays the fol-
Observe the safety warnings ››› in Warning lowing message: Front Assist: No
and control lamps on page 117. sensor vision! If necessary, clean the
SEAT badge area ››› .
Note When the radar sensor begins to operate
properly again, the Front Assist will automati-
When the Front Assist is connected, the indi-
cally be available again. The message will
cations on the instrument panel screen may
be concealed by warnings from other func- disappear from the instrument panel display.
tions, such as an incoming call. Front Assist operation may be affected by a
strong radar reverse reflection. This may oc-
cur, for example, in a closed car park or due
220
Driver assistance systems
to the presence of metallic objects (e.g. rails mends visiting a SEAT dealership for this pur- Switching the Front Assist monitoring sys-
Technical data
on the road or sheets used in road works). pose. tem on and off
The area in front of and around the radar sen- ● Clean away the snow with a brush and the With the ignition switched on, the Front As-
sor should not be covered with adhesives, ice preferably with a solvent-free de-icer sist can be switched on and off as follows:
additional or similar headlights, as this may spray. ● Select the corresponding menu option us-
negatively affect Front Assist operation. ing the button for the driver assistance sys-
If structural modifications are made to the ve- tems ››› page 35.
hicle, for example, if the suspension is low- Operating the Front Assist ● OR: switch the system on and off in Easy
Advice
ered or the front spoiler is modified, Front As- Connect using the button and the
sist operation may be affected. So structural SETTINGS and Driver assistance function but-
modifications should only be made by speci- tons ››› page 31.
alised workshops. SEAT recommends visiting
a SEAT dealership for this purpose. When the Front Assist monitoring system is
switched off, the instrument panel will inform
Operation
If work is done incorrectly on the front of the that it has been switched off with the follow-
vehicle, the radar sensor could be damaged ing indicator ››› Fig. 194.
or lose its settings, and Front Assist opera-
tion may be affected. So repair work should Switching the advance warning function on
only be made by specialised workshops. or off
SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealership
Fig. 194 On the instrument panel display: The pre-warning function (advance warning)
Emergencies
for this purpose.
Front Assist switched off message. can be switched on or off in the Easy Connect
CAUTION system with the button and the SETTINGS
The Front Assist monitoring system is active and Driver assistance function buttons
If you have the sensation that the radar sen- whenever the ignition is switched on. ››› page 31.
sor is damaged or has lost its settings, dis-
connect the Front Assist. This will avoid pos- When the Front Assist is switched off, so too The system will store the setting for the next
sible damage. If this occurs have it adjusted. are the advance warning function (pre warn- time the ignition is switched on.
● The sensor may become damaged or lose
ing) and the distance warning.
Safety
SEAT recommends keeping the advance
its settings when knocked, for example, dur- SEAT recommends leaving the Front Assist al- warning function switched on at all times.
ing a parking manoeuvre. This may compro- ways switched on. Exceptions ››› page 222,
mise the system's efficacy or disconnect it. Temporarily switching the Front Assist sys- Depending on the infotainment system in-
● Repairs to the radar sensor require special- tem off in the following situations. stalled in the vehicle, the advance warning
ist knowledge and special tools. SEAT recom- function may be adjusted as follows: »
221
Operation
● Ready ● When the vehicle is to be towed. The following conditions may cause the Front
● Medium ● If the vehicle is on a test bed. Assist Monitoring System not to react or do
so too late:
● Delayed ● When the radar sensor is damaged.
● On taking tight bends.
● Deactivated ● If the radar sensor takes a heavy knock, for
example in a rear collision. ● Pressing the accelerator all the way down.
SEAT recommends driving with the function ● If the Front Assist is switched off or dam-
● If it intervenes several times unnecessarily.
in “Medium” mode. aged.
● If the radar sensor is covered temporarily
with some kind of accessory, such as an ad- ● If the ASR has been manually disconnec-
Switching distance warning on and off
ditional headlight or the like. ted.
If the safe distance with regard to the vehicle
● When the vehicle is to be loaded on a lorry, ● If the ESC is controlling.
in front is exceeded, the relevant warning will
appear on the instrument panel display ferry or train. ● If several brake lights of the vehicle or elec-
. In this case, increase the safe dis- trically connected trailer are damaged.
tance. WARNING ● If the radar sensor is dirty or covered.
The distance warning can be switched on and If the Front Assist is not switched off in the ● If there are metal objects, e.g. rails on the
situations described, serious accidents and road or sheets used in road works.
off in the Easy Connect system using the
injuries may occur.
button and the SETTINGS and ● If the vehicle is reversing.
Driver assistance function buttons ● Switch off the Front Assist in critical situa-
tions. ● If the vehicle over-accelerates.
››› page 31.
● In case of snow or heavy rain.
The system will store the setting for the next
● In case of narrow vehicles, such as motor-
time the ignition is switched on.
System limitations bikes.
SEAT recommends keeping the distance ● Misaligned vehicles.
warning switched on at all times. The Front Assist Monitoring System has cer-
tain physical limitations inherent in the sys- ● Vehicles crossing the other's path.
tem. Thus, in certain circumstances some of ● Vehicles approaching in the opposite direc-
Temporarily switching the Front Assist the system's reactions may be inopportune tion.
or be delayed from the driver's standpoint.
system off in the following situations ● Special loads and accessories of other ve-
So pay attention in order to intervene if nec- hicles that jut out over the sides, backwards
In the following situations the Front Assist essary. or over the top.
Monitoring System should be deactivated
due to the system's limitations ››› :
222
Driver assistance systems
City Emergency braking function If the system detects a possible collision with in braking, such as in work areas or if there
Technical data
a vehicle in front of it, the vehicle prepares are metal rails.
for a possible emergency braking ››› . ● If the operation of the City Emergency brak-
If the driver fails to react to a possible colli- ing function is impaired, for example, by dirt
sion, the system may brake the vehicle auto- or because the radar sensor has lost its set-
matically, by progressively increasing braking tings, the system may issue unnecessary
effect driving to reduce speed in the event of warnings and intervene inopportunely in the
braking.
a collision. The system can thus help to re-
● The City emergency braking function only
Advice
duce the consequences of an accident.
reacts to people if the vehicle has a pedes-
Status display trian-monitoring system. The system does
not react to animals or vehicles crossing your
Automatic deceleration by means of the City path or approaching head-on in the same
Fig. 195 On the instrument panel display: ad-
vance warning message.
Emergency braking function is displayed on lane.
the instrument panel by means of the ad-
Operation
The City Emergency braking function is part vance warning ››› Fig. 1951). Note
of the Front Assist monitoring and is active ● When the City Emergency braking function
whenever the system is switched on. WARNING
causes a braking, the brake pedal is “hard-
The smart technology included in the City er”.
Depending on the equipment, the City emer-
Emergency braking function cannot defy the
gency braking function can be switched on laws of physics. The driver is always respon-
● Automatic interventions on the brakes by
Emergencies
and off in the Easy Connect system using the sible for braking in time. the City Emergency braking function may be
button and the SETTINGS and interrupted by pressing the clutch, accelera-
● Adapt your speed and safe distance to the tor or moving the wheel.
Driver assistance function buttons
vehicle in front of you at all times to suit visi-
››› page 31. bility, weather, road and traffic conditions.
● The City Emergency braking function can
brake the vehicle until it stops completely.
The City Emergency braking function picks ● The City Emergency braking function alone However, the brake system does not halt the
up, at speeds between 4 km/h (2.5 mph) and cannot prevent accidents or serious injury. vehicle permanently. Use the foot brake!
30 km/h (19 mph) approximately, the traffic ● In complex driving situations, the City ● If several inopportune intervenes occur,
Safety
situation in front of the vehicle up to a dis- Emergency braking function may issue unnec- switch off the Front Assist and with it the City
tance of about 15 m. essary warnings and intervene inopportunely »
Emergency braking function. Take it to a
display is in colour.
223
Operation
specialised workshop, SEAT recommends vis- If the system detects a possible collision with WARNING
iting a SEAT dealership. a pedestrian, it warns the driver with an
acoustic signal and a message on the dash The technology in the pedestrian monitoring
● If numerous unnecessary interventions oc- system cannot defy the laws of physics and
cur, the City Emergency braking function may panel display ››› Fig. 196.
only works within the system's limits. The
switch off automatically. The pedestrian monitoring system, including driver is always responsible for braking in
the advance warning, is automatically con- time. If the pedestrian monitoring system is-
nected when the ignition is switched on sues a warning, brake the vehicle immediate-
››› page 176. ly with the brake pedal or swerve to avoid the
Pedestrian Monitoring*1)
pedestrian, depending on traffic conditions.
SEAT recommends always having the pedes- ● The pedestrian monitoring system alone
trian monitoring system connected. The ex- cannot avoid accidents or serious injury.
ceptions set out for the Front Assist system
● In complex driving situations, the pedes-
are equally valid for the pedestrian monitor-
trian monitoring system may issue unneces-
ing system ››› page 222.
sary warnings and intervene unnecessarily in
braking, such as in main roads with turnings.
Switching the pedestrian monitoring system
● If the operation of the system is impaired,
on and off
for example, because the radar sensor and
With the ignition on, the pedestrian monitor- camera are covered or have lost their set-
ing system can be switched on and off as fol- tings, the system may issue unnecessary
lows: warnings and intervene inopportunely in the
Fig. 196 On the instrument panel display: braking.
Advance warning message. Pedestrian ● Switch the system on and off in the info- ● The driver must always be ready to take
Monitoring deactivated. tainment system using the button and over the control of the vehicle.
the SETUP and Driver assistance function but-
The pedestrian monitoring system can help tons ››› page 31.
prevent accidents involving pedestrians or Note
reduce the consequences of an accident. When the pedestrian protection system is ● When the vehicle is braked via the pedes-
switched off, the dash panel display shows a trian monitoring system, the brake pedal be-
The system warns of danger of collision, pre-
message indicating this ››› Fig. 196 . The comes stiffer.
pares the vehicle for emergency braking, as-
pedestrian monitoring system is switched off
sists in the braking and brakes automatically.
with the Front Assist function.
● Automatic interventions by the pedestrian tures or objects in poor condition can be in- ● If there is a fault in the system, have it
Technical data
monitoring system on the brakes may be correctly detected as road markings under checked by a specialised workshop.
interrupted by pressing the accelerator or certain circumstances by the Lane Assist sys-
moving the wheel. tem. In such situations, switch the Lane As-
● If the pedestrian monitoring system does sist system off immediately.
not work as described in this chapter (e.g. if ● Please observe the indications on the in-
it intervening unnecessarily several times), strument panel and act as is necessary.
switch if off, contact a specialist workshop ● Always pay attention to the vehicle's sur-
immediately and request to have the system roundings.
Advice
checked. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT
● When the area of vision of the camera be-
dealership for this.
comes dirty, covered or is damaged, the Lane
Assist system function can be affected.
Operation
In order to avoid influencing the operation of
Introduction the system, the following points must be tak-
en into account:
WARNING ● Regularly clean the area of vision of the
The intelligent technology in the Lane Assist camera and keep it in a clean state, without
snow or ice.
Emergencies
system cannot change the limits imposed by
the laws of physics and by the very nature of ● Do not cover the area of vision of the cam-
the system. Careless or uncontrolled use of era.
the Lane Assist system may cause accidents ● Check that the area of vision of the wind-
and injury. The system is not a replacement screen camera is not damaged.
for driver awareness.
● Always adapt your speed and the distance
to the vehicles ahead in line with visibility, Note
Safety
weather conditions, the condition of the road ● The Lane Assist system has been exclusive-
and the traffic situation. ly developed for driving on paved roads only.
● Always keep your hands on the steering ● If the Lane Assist system does not work as
wheel so it can be turned at any time. described in this chapter, do not use it and
● The Lane Assist system does not detect all contact a specialised workshop.
road markings. The road surfaces, road struc-
225
Operation
Indications on the display and lamps – The system is operational, the highligh-
ted line A indicates that there was a
risk of involuntarily crossing the lane
line and that the steering is being adjus-
ted to correct the angle ››› Fig. 198 C.
– The two lines A light up simultaneously
when both lane lines are recognised and
the Lane Assist function is active
››› Fig. 198 D.
Control lamps
Fig. 198 On the instrument panel display: In- Lane Assist system active and available.
dication on the Lane Assist system display
Fig. 197 On the instrument panel display: In- (example 2). WARNING
dication on the Lane Assist system display Observe the safety warnings ››› in Warning
(example 1). Status display and control lamps on page 117.
– The system is active, but not available,
either because the minimum speed has
not been reached or because the lane
lines are not recognised ››› Fig. 197 A.
– The system is active and available, both
lane lines are recognised. The steering
angle is not being corrected at this mo-
ment ››› Fig. 197 B.
226
Driver assistance systems
Operation ● When the maximum rotational torque dur- tion through the brakes and, if the vehicle
Technical data
ing the corrective steering movement is not has it, activates the Emergency Assist func-
enough to keep the vehicle inside the lane. tion ››› page 229.
● When no lane is detected during the correc- In vehicles without Emergency Assist, the
tive steering movement. adaptive lane guidance function will be disa-
bled after the corresponding warnings to the
Switching the Lane Assist system on or off driver.
Through the Easy Connect system
Advice
The lane assist system is active but it is not
● Press the Easy Connect button
available (the control lamp is lit up yellow)
● Press the SETTINGS function button
● When driving at speeds below 65 km/h (38
● Press the function button Driver assistance to mph).
Fig. 199 In the windscreen: field of vision of open the menu.
the Lane Assist system camera. ● When the Lane Assist system does not de-
tect the dividing lines of the road. For exam-
Operation
OR: through the driving assist button
Using the camera located in the windscreen, on the turn signal level*. ple, in the event warnings indicating road
the Lane Assist system detects the possible works, and snow, dirt, moisture or reflec-
lines dividing the lanes. When the vehicle in- The Lane centring guide function is ac- tions.
voluntarily approaches a dividing line it has tivated/deactivated in the Easy Connect sys-
● When the radius of a curve is too small.
detected, the system notifies the driver with tem using the button and the SETTINGS
a corrective steering movement. This move- function button ››› page 118. ● When no road markings can be seen.
Emergencies
ment can be over-regulated at any time. Self-deactivation: the Lane Assist system can ● When the distance to the next marking to
be automatically deactivated if there is a sys- too great.
No warning is produced with the turn signals
activated, given that the Lane Assist system tem malfunction. The control lamp disap- ● When the system does not detect any clear
understands that a lane change is required. pears. and active steering movement during a long
period of time.
Steering wheel vibration Hands-Off Function ● Temporarily, in the event of very dynamic
In the absence of steering wheel activity the driving styles.
Safety
The following situations can cause vibration
in the steering wheel and require the driver system alerts the driver with acoustic signals ● If a turn signal is activated.
to take active control of driving: and a text message on the dash panel asking
● With the stability control system (ESC) in
to actively take over the steering.
● When the limits of the very nature of the
Sport mode or switched off. »
If the driver does not react to this, the system
system are reached. also alerts the driver with a little shaking mo-
227
Operation
Side Assist PLUS ● In areas of road works vehicle ahead and help stay within the lane
If the vehicle is also equipped with Side As- ››› .
sist and the system is switched on, the driver To do this, the system automatically controls
is alerted when changing lanes during a pos- Traffic Jam Assist the accelerator, brakes and steering, and
sible critical situation (level of information, slows the vehicle, stopping it fully if neces-
warning level) through a corrective steering sary, when faced with a vehicle in front that
Related video
wheel intervention. This occurs even if the has stopped. It automatically moves off again
turn signal is activated in the corresponding when the vehicle ahead moves.
direction. If the driver over-regulates the
steering wheel intervention, an additional Traffic Jam Assist is designed only for use on
warning is given through a vibration in the motorways and wide roads. Therefore, never
steering wheel. use it in city traffic.
Fig. 200 Autonomous
Note driving Switching Traffic Jam Assist on and off
● Before starting a journey, verify that the If Lane Assist ››› page 225 is on, Traffic Jam
field of vision of the camera is not covered Assist can be switched on or off in the info-
››› Fig. 199. tainment system using the button and
Description and operation
● Always keep the field of vision of the cam- the SETTINGS and Driver Assistance function
era clean. Traffic Jam Assist helps the driver keep the buttons ››› page 31.
car within its lane and to move in convoy in It is activated by switching on Lane Assist
case of traffic congestion or slow traffic. and the lane centring guide in the infotain-
Switching off the Lane Assist system Traffic Jam Assist is an additional function of ment system. If the lane centring guide is not
in the following situations Lane Assist ››› page 225 and combines Lane active, the Traffic Jam Assist system is not ac-
Assist functions with Adaptive Cruise Control tive
Due to the limits of the Lane Assist system, (ACC) ››› page 209. Therefore, it is essential Traffic Jam Assist may be disconnected using
switch it off in the following situations: that you read these two chapters carefully the button for driver assistance systems to-
and note the limitations of the systems and gether with Lane Assist ››› page 35.
● When more attention is required of the
the information about them.
driver
Technical requirements for using Traffic Jam
● When driving in a sporty style Operation of Traffic Jam Assist Assist
● In unfavourable weather conditions At speeds of below 60 km/h (40 mph), Traffic ● Lane Assist must be activated ››› page 225,
● On roads in poor condition Jam Assist can maintain a (temporary) dis- Lane Assist system*.
tance preset by the driver with respect to the
228
Driver assistance systems
● Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) must be con- ● When driving on roads in poor condition. ● If the vehicle continues to move when you
Technical data
nected and active ››› page 209. ● In sections with roadworks. wish it to stop after a driver intervention
● The selector lever must be in the D/S posi- prompt, brake the vehicle by applying the
● In city journeys.
tion or in the Tiptronic selection track. pedal.
● The speed must be below 60 km/h ● If driver intervention is requested on the
WARNING
(38 mph). dash panel display, immediately resume con-
The smart technology incorporated into Traf- trol of the vehicle.
● The lane centring guide must be active fic Jam Assist cannot defy the laws of phys-
● Keep your hands on the wheel at all times
››› page 227. ics; it only works within the limits of the sys-
to be ready to intervene in the steering at any
Advice
tem. Accidents and severe injury may occur if
time. The driver is always responsible for
Traffic Jam Assist is not active (the Lane As- Traffic Jam Assist is used negligently or invol-
keeping the vehicle in its own lane.
sist control light turns yellow) untarily. The system is not a replacement for
driver awareness. ● Always be prepared to take charge of driv-
● If any of the conditions mentioned on ing (accelerating or braking) yourself.
● Adapt your speed and safe distance to the
page 228, Technical requirements for using vehicle in front of you at all times to suit the
Traffic Jam Assist are no longer met.
Operation
visibility, weather, road and traffic condi- Note
● If any of the conditions required for opera- tions.
● If Traffic Jam Assist does not work as de-
tion of the Lane Assist are not met ● Do not use Traffic Jam Assist in city jour- scribed in this chapter, stop using it and con-
››› page 225. neys. tact a specialised workshop.
● If any of the conditions necessary for the ● Do not use Traffic Jam Assist if there is poor ● If the system is faulty, take it to a special-
adaptive cruise control (ACC) to work are no visibility, for example, in case of snow, ice, ised workshop and have it checked.
Emergencies
longer fulfilled ››› page 209. rain or loose gravel, or on steep or slippery
sections or flooded roads.
Situations in which Traffic Jam Assist must ● Do not use Traffic Jam Assist offroad or on
be switched off roads where the surface is not firm. Traffic Emergency Assist
Jam Assist has been designed for use on
Due to the limitations of the system, Traffic paved roads only.
Jam Assist must always be switched off in the Description and operation
● Traffic Jam Assist does not react to people
following situations:
or animals or vehicles crossing your path or Emergency Assist detects whether there is in-
Safety
● When more attention is required by the that approach you head-on down the same activity by the driver and can automatically
driver. lane. keep the car within the lane and stop it alto-
● When driving in a very sporty style.
● If Traffic Jam Assist does not reduce speed gether if necessary. This way the system can
sufficiently, brake the vehicle immediately by actively help avoid an accident. »
● In adverse weather conditions, e.g. in case applying the pedal.
of snow or heavy rain.
229
Operation
Emergency Assist is an additional function of Switching the Emergency Assist on and off WARNING
Lane Assist ››› page 225 and combines Lane The Emergency Assist is switched on auto-
Assist functions with Adaptive Cruise Control The smart technology incorporated into the
matically when the Lane Assist is switched on Emergency Assist cannot overcome the limits
(ACC) ››› page 209. Therefore, it is essential ››› page 225. imposed by the laws of physics; it only works
that you read these two chapters carefully
within the limits of the system. The driver is
and note the limitations of the systems and Technical requirements for using the Emer- responsible for driving the vehicle.
the information about them. gency Assist ● Adapt your speed and safe distance to the
● The adaptive cruise control (ACC) must be vehicle in front of you at all times to suit the
Operation of Emergency Assist visibility, weather, road and traffic condi-
switched on ››› page 209.
Emergency Assist detects when the driver tions.
● The Lane Assist must be switched on
ceases to perform any activity and repeatedly ● Keep your hands on the wheel at all times
requests that he/she regain active control of ››› page 225. to be ready to intervene in the steering at any
the vehicle, through the use of optical and ● The selector lever must be at the D/S posi- time.
acoustic warnings and by applying the tion or in the Tiptronic selection track. ● The Emergency Assist alone cannot always
brakes. ● The system must have detected a lane sep- avoid accidents or serious injuries.
If the driver continues to do nothing, the sys- aration line on both sides of the vehicle ● If the operation of the Emergency Assist is
tem automatically takes over the accelerator, ››› Fig. 198. impaired, for example if the radar sensor of
brakes and steering in order to brake the ve- the adaptive cruise control (ACC) or the Lane
hicle and keep it in its lane ››› . If the re- The following conditions may cause the Assist camera are covered or have lost their
maining braking distance is sufficient, if nec- Emergency Assist not to react or to switch off settings, the system may intervene inoppor-
automatically: tunely in braking or in steering.
essary the system slows down the vehicle un-
til it stops completely and automatically ● The Emergency Assist does not react to
● If the driver accelerates, brakes or moves
switches on the electronic parking brake people or animal or vehicles crossing your
the steering wheel.
››› page 181. path or which approach you head-on in the
● If any of the conditions mentioned in same lane.
When the Emergency Assist is actively adjust- ››› page 230, Technical requirements for us-
ing, the hazard warning lights come on ing the Emergency Assist are not fulfilled.
WARNING
››› page 146 and the vehicle makes slight zig- ● If any of the conditions required for opera-
zag movements in the lane in order to warn If the Emergency Assist Intervenes inoppor-
tion of the Lane Assist are not met
other drivers. tunely, serious accidents and injuries may oc-
››› page 225. cur.
● If any of the conditions necessary for the ● If the Emergency Assist does not operate
adaptive cruise control (ACC) to work are no properly, switch off the Lane Assist
longer fulfilled ››› page 209.
230
Driver assistance systems
Technical data
Emergency Assist.
● Have the system checked by a specialised
workshop. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT
dealership for this.
Note
● Automatic interventions by the Emergency
Advice
Assist on the brakes may be interrupted by
pressing the accelerator or brake or by mov-
ing the wheel.
● Hazard warning lights that come on auto-
matically can be switched off by pressing the
accelerator or the break, moving the steering
Operation
wheel or pressing the hazard warning light
switch.
● If this occurs, the Emergency Assist may
decelerate the vehicle until it comes to a com-
plete stop.
● When the Emergency Assist is activated, it
Emergencies
is only available again after the ignition has
been switched off and back on again.
Safety
231
Operation
Blind spot detector (BSD) with alert are used negligently or involuntarily. CAUTION
The system is not a replacement for driver
parking assistance (RCTA)* awareness.
● The radar sensors on the rear bumper may
be damaged or shifted in the event of a colli-
● Adapt your speed and safe distance to the sion, for example, when entering or exiting a
Related video vehicle in front of you at all times to suit visi- parking space. This may result in the system
bility, weather, road and traffic conditions. disconnecting itself, or at least possibly hav-
● Keep your hands on the wheel at all times ing its functionality diminished.
to be ready to intervene in the steering at any ● In order to ensure that the radar sensors
time. work properly, keep the rear bumper free of
● Pay attention to the control lamps that may snow and ice and do not cover it.
come on in the external rear view mirrors and ● The rear bumper should only be painted
Fig. 201 Smart solutions on the instrument panel, and follow any in- with paint authorised by SEAT. The blind spot
structions they may give. detector's functions may be limited or work
● The blind spot assistant could react to any incorrectly if other paints are used.
special constructions that might be present
Introduction
on the sides of the vehicle: e.g. high or irreg- Note
ular dividers. This may cause erroneous warn-
The blind spot detector (BSD) helps to detect If the blind spot detector with parking assis-
ings.
the traffic situation behind the vehicle. tant does not work as described in this chap-
● Never use the blind spot detector with rear
The integrated parking assistant (RCTA) helps ter, do not use it and contact a specialised
cross traffic alert on unpaved roads. The blind
the driver when backing out of a parallel workshop.
spot detector with rear cross traffic alert has
parking spot and in manoeuvring. been designed for use on paved roads.
The blind spot detector has been developed ● Always pay attention to the vehicle's sur-
for driving on paved roads. roundings. Control lamps
● Never use the blind spot detector or the
Control lamp in external rear view mirrors:
WARNING parking assistant if the radar sensors are
dirty.
The smart technology incorporated into the Lights up
blind spot detector (BSD) with parking assis- ● The external rear view mirror control lamps
may have limited functionality due to solar Lights up once briefly: the blind spot detector is activa-
tance (RCTA) included cannot overcome the
radiation. ted and ready to operate.
limits imposed by the laws of physics; it only
works within the limits of the system. Acci- Lights up: blind spot detector has detected a vehicle in
dents and severe injury may occur if the blind the blind spot.
spot detection system or the rear cross traffic
232
Driver assistance systems
Flashes CAUTION
Technical data
The blind spot detector has detected a vehicle in the Failure to heed the control lamps and corre-
blind spot and the turn signal has been turned on in the sponding text messages when they light up
direction of the detected vehicle ››› . may result in damage to the vehicle.
Advice
Some warning and control lamps will light up
briefly when the ignition is switched on to Fig. 203 Rear view of the vehicle: radar sen-
check certain functions. They will switch off sor zones.
after a few seconds.
The blind spot detector uses radar sensors to
If there are no indications from the control monitor the areas behind the vehicle
Operation
lamp in the external rear view mirror, this ››› Fig. 203. The system does this by measur-
means that the blind spot detector has not ing the vehicle's distance from other vehicles
detected any other vehicles in the area ››› . and its speed differential. The blind spot de-
If the dipped beam is on, then the control tector will not work at speeds of less than ap-
lamps in the external rear view mirrors will be prox. 15 km/h (9 mph). The system uses opti-
cal signals in the external rear view mirrors to
Emergencies
dimmed (night mode).
notify the driver.
WARNING
Indication in the external rear view mirrors
If the warning lamps and the corresponding
messages are ignored when they light up, the The control lamp (expanded view) provides
vehicle may stall in traffic and cause acci- an indication in the corresponding external
dents and severe injuries. mirror ››› Fig. 202 regarding the traffic situa-
tion behind the vehicle, if it is deemed to be
Safety
● Never ignore the warning lamps or messag-
es. critical. The control lamp of the left-hand ex-
Fig. 202 In the exterior mirrors: indication of
● Carry out the necessary operations. ternal mirror indicates the traffic situation to
the blind spot detector.
the left of the vehicle, and the control lamp of
the right-hand external mirror indicates the
traffic situation to the right of the vehicle. »
233
Operation
In the case of retrofitted tinted windows or the outside ››› Fig. 203. The sensors have a vehicles driving in the lane next to you (if
windows with tinted film, the indications of range of approx. 20 metres behind the vehi- there are any), and can also detect stationary
the external mirrors may not be seen clearly cle, including the blind spots to the left and objects such as dividers, and thus give an in-
or correctly. right of the vehicle. The range to the sides of correct indication.
the vehicle is a bit larger than the width of a
Keep the external mirrors clean and free of
lane.
snow and ice, and do not cover them with ad-
hesives or other similar materials. The lane width is not detected individually,
but is rather pre-configured in the system.
Radar sensors Thus if you are driving in wide lanes or in be-
tween two lanes, the indications may be in-
The radar sensors are located on the left and
correct. Furthermore, the system can detect
right of the bumper and are not visible from
234
Driver assistance systems
Driving situations
Technical data
Fig. 204 Schematic diagram: Passing sit-
Advice
uation with traffic behind the vehicle. Indi-
cation from the blind spot detector in the left-
hand external mirror.
Operation
Fig. 205 Schematic diagram: Situation of
passing and then moving into the right-hand
Emergencies
lane. Indication from the blind spot detec-
tor in the right-hand external mirror.
In the following situations, an indication will ing at a considerably higher speed, no indi- Physical limitations inherent to the system
be displayed in the external mirror ››› Fig. 204 cation will be displayed. In some situations the blind spot detector
(arrow) or ››› Fig. 205 (arrow): may not interpret the traffic situation correct-
The faster the vehicle approaches, the sooner
● When being overtaken by another vehicle an indication will be displayed in the external ly. E.g. in the following situations:
Safety
››› Fig. 204 . mirror, because the blind spot detector takes ● on tight bends;
● When overtaking another vehicle into account the speed differential with other
● in the case of lanes with different widths;
››› Fig. 205 with a speed differential of ap- vehicles. Thus even though the distance from
the other vehicle is identical, the indication ● at the top of slopes;
prox. 10 km/h (6 mph). If the vehicle is pass-
will appear sooner in some cases and later in ● in adverse weather conditions; »
others.
235
Operation
● in the case of special constructions to the ● The acoustic alarm comes from the same WARNING
side of the vehicle, e.g., high or irregular di- acoustic indicator used by the ParkPilot.
viders. The smart technology incorporated into the
In addition to the acoustic alarm, the driver is rear cross traffic alert cannot overcome the
also informed by means of a visual signal on limits imposed by the laws of physics; it only
the radio screen. This signal is displayed in works within the limits of the system. The
Parking assistant (RCTA) parking assistant function should not tempt
the form of a red strip at the back of the im-
you into taking any risks. The system is not a
age of the vehicle on the radio screen. This
replacement for driver awareness.
strip displays the side of the vehicle towards
● The system should never be used in limited
which traffic is approaching.
visibility conditions or complicated traffic,
e.g., in high-traffic areas or when crossing
Automatic braking to reduce damages
multiple lanes.
If the rear cross traffic alert detects that ● Be sure to always be aware of the vehicle's
someone else on the road is approaching the surroundings, since the system often fails to
rear of the vehicle and the driver does not detect things such as bicycles or pedestrians.
step on the brake, the system will engage the ● The rear cross traffic alert itself will not
brakes automatically. brake the vehicle to a complete stop.
The parking system helps the driver by auto-
matically engaging the brakes to reduce any
Fig. 206 Schematic representation of the rear
damage. The system will brake automatically Using the blind spot detector (BSD)
cross traffic alert: zone monitored around the
if the vehicle is reversing at a speed of ap- with parking assistant (RCTA)
vehicle exiting the parking space.
proximately 1-12 km (1-7 mph). Once it has
The parking assistant uses the radar sensors detected that the vehicle has stopped, the Activating and deactivating the blind spot
on the rear bumper ››› Fig. 203 to monitor the system will keep the vehicle stopped for ap- detector (BSD) with parking assistant (RCTA)
traffic crossing behind the vehicle as it backs prox. 2 seconds.
The blind spot detector with parking assis-
out of a parallel parking space or as it is be- After automatically braking to reduce dam- tant can be switched on and off by accessing
ing manoeuvred, for example in very low visi- age, the system will not be able to automati- the Assistance systems menu on the
bility conditions. cally brake again for approximately 10 sec- dash panel display using the steering wheel
If the system detects that someone else on onds. controls. If the vehicle is equipped with a
the road is approaching the rear of the vehi- You can interrupt the automatic braking by multifunction camera, it can also be ac-
cle ››› Fig. 206, an acoustic alarm is heard. stepping hard on the accelerator pedal or the cessed by means of the driver assistance sys-
brake pedal in order to regain control of the tems key located on the main beam head-
vehicle. light lever.
236
Driver assistance systems
Technical data
● BSD The Blind spot detector and the rear cross
● Parking Assist.
traffic alert will be automatically deactivated Related video
and it will be impossible to activate them if
If the verification box on the control panel is the tow hitch is electrically connected to a
checked , the functionality will be automat- trailer or other similar object.
ically activated at ignition. As soon as the driver starts to drive with a
When the blind spot detector is ready to op- trailer connected electrically to the vehicle, a
Advice
erate, the indications in the external mirrors message will appear on the instrument panel Fig. 207 Autonomous
will turn on briefly as confirmation. display indicating that the blind spot detec- driving
tor and the rear cross traffic alert are deacti-
When the vehicle is restarted, the last adjust- vated. Once the trailer has been unhitched
ment in the system will remain active. from the vehicle, if you want to use the blind
spot detector and the rear cross traffic alert, Introduction
If the blind spot detector was automatically
Operation
deactivated, it will only be possible to restart you will have to reactivate them in the corre-
The SEAT Drive Profile enables the driver to
the system after turning the vehicle off and sponding menu.
choose between four profiles or modes, Eco,
restarting it. If the towing hitch is not factory equipped, Normal, Sport and Individual, that
then the blind spot detector and the rear modify the behaviour of various vehicle func-
Automatic deactivation of the blind spot de- cross traffic alert will have to be deactivated tions, providing different driving experiences.
tector (BSD) manually when driving with a trailer.
Emergencies
In addition, the 4Drive version features the
The radar sensors of the blind spot detector Offroad and Snow profiles.
with rear cross traffic alert will be automati-
cally deactivated when, among other rea- The Individual profile can be configured
sons, one of the sensors is detected to be according to personal preferences. The other
permanently covered. This may be the case if, profiles have a fixed configuration.
for example, there is a layer of snow or ice in
front of one of the sensors.
Safety
Description
The relevant text message will appear in the
dash panel display. Depending on the equipment fitted in the ve-
hicle, SEAT Drive Profile can operate on the
following functions: »
237
Operation
Engine Adaptive cruise control (ACC) You can select the Eco, Normal, Sport, In-
Depending on the profile selected, the en- The acceleration gradient of the adaptive dividual, Offroad1) and Snow1) profiles in
gine responds more spontaneously or more cruise control varies according to the active the following way:
in harmony with the movements of the accel- driving profile ››› page 209. ● Turn the Driving Experience button until the
erator. Additionally, when the Eco profile is required profile lights up on the Easy Con-
selected, the Start-Stop function is automati- Electronic stability control (ESC) nect system display as well as on the Driving
cally activated. Experience button ››› Fig. 208.
In the Offroad and Snow driving profiles,
In vehicles with automatic transmission, the the electronic stability Control (ESC) ● OR: select the required profile on the
gear change points are modified to position ››› page 184 adjusts to adapt to the terrain. touch-screen of the Easy Connect system, in
them in lower or higher engine speed ranges. the menu that opens up on turning the
In addition, hill descent control (HDC) is acti-
Additionally, the Eco profile activates the in- Driving Experience button.
vated in the Offroad profile ››› page 202.
ertia function, enabling consumption to be
further reduced. The features of each profile can be seen by
pressing the Profile information button of the
In manual gearbox vehicles, the Eco profile Adjusting driving profile Easy Connect system display.
causes the gear change recommendation in-
dications that appear on the dash panel to In the Individual profile it is possible to
vary, facilitating more efficient driving. configure the characteristics of the vehicle
using the Profile setup button of the Easy
Address Connect system display.
The power steering varies its driving modes An icon on the Easy Connect system display
and adapts to the profile selected, thus offer- provides information about the active profile
ing the best behaviour for each situation. if it is different than Normal. The selector
identifies the profile chosen by means of a
Air conditioning red LED light.
In vehicles with Climatronic, this can operate
in Eco mode, especially restricting fuel con- Fig. 208 Centre console: Driving Experience
button.
sumption.
Technical data
Characteristics engine and the gear will not restart in the set-
profile
ting selected. For engine and gear to revert to
Places the vehicle in a particularly low the desired position, select the correspond-
state of consumption, facilitating a fuel- ing drive profile again or press the Easy Con-
Eco
saving driving style that is respectful to nect system button repeatedly.
the environment.
● When the vehicle is restarted after using
Offers a balanced driving experience, the Offroad or Snow settings, the system is
Normal
suitable for everyday use. always activated in the Normal profile.
Advice
Provides a complete dynamic perform- ● Your speed and driving style must always
Sport ance in the vehicle, enabling the user a be adjusted to visibility, weather, and traffic
more sporty driving style. conditions.
● The Eco profile is not recommended when
It allows you to personalise the configura-
Individ- tion. The functions that can be adjusted towing a vehicle.
Operation
ual depend on the equipment fitted in the ve-
hicle.
Emergencies
grip and manoeuvrability. If the Eco* profile has been selected in the
a)
SEAT Drive Profile ››› page 238 and the
Only for 4Drive models.
accelerator is pressed beyond a hard point,
the engine power is automatically controlled
WARNING
to give your vehicle maximum acceleration.
When operating SEAT Drive Profile, pay atten-
tion to all traffic: doing otherwise could cause WARNING
an accident.
Safety
Please note that if the road surface is slip-
pery or wet, the kick-down feature could
Note cause the driving wheels to spin, which could
● When the vehicle is switched off it will al- result in skidding.
ways store the driving profile that was selec-
ted when the ignition key was removed. Nev-
239
Operation
Traffic sign detection system* kia, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, Note
Turkey, the United Kingdom and the Vatican
City. In order not to compromise the system's op-
Introduction eration, please take the following points into
account:
The traffic sign detection system records the WARNING
● Regularly clean the area of vision of the
standard traffic signs in front of the vehicle The technology in the traffic sign detection camera and keep it in a clean state, without
with a camera located on the base of the in- system cannot change the limits imposed by snow or ice.
terior mirror and provides information about the laws of physics and only works within the
● Do not cover the field of vision of the cam-
speed limits and overtaking prohibitions. system's limits. Do not let the extra conven-
ience afforded by the traffic sign detection era.
Within its limitations, the system also dis-
system tempt you into taking any risks when ● Always replace damaged or worn blades
plays additional signals, such as time-specif-
driving. The system is not a replacement for when required to avoid lines on the camera's
ic prohibitions, signs for vehicles towing trail-
driver awareness. field of vision.
ers ››› page 267 or limitations that only apply
● Adapt your speed and driving style to suit ● Check that the windscreen is not damaged
in the event of rain. Even on journeys without
visibility, weather, road and traffic condi- in the area of the camera's field of vision.
signs, the system may display any applicable
tions.
speed limits.
● Poor visibility, darkness, snow, rain and fog Note
In Germany, on motorways and vehicle roads, may lead to the system failing to display traf-
besides speed limits and overtaking provi- ● The use of outdated maps on the naviga-
fic signs or not displaying them correctly.
sions the system also displays the end of tion system may cause the system to show
● If the camera's field of vision is dirty, cov-
prohibition signs. The valid speed limit at the traffic signs incorrectly.
ered or damaged, system operation may be
time in other countries is always shown. ● In the waypoints mode of the navigation
impaired.
system, the traffic sign detection system is
Countries in which it works only partly available.
WARNING
When this instruction manual went to print,
The driving recommendations and traffic indi-
the traffic sign detection system was operat-
cations shown on the traffic sign detection
ing in the following countries: system may differ from the actual current
Andorra, Austria, Belgium, Bulgaria, Croatia, traffic situation.
Cyprus, Czech Republic, Denmark, Estonia, ● The system may not detect or correctly
Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Hungary, show all the traffic signs.
Iceland, Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Liechtenstein, ● Traffic signs and traffic regulations have
Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta, Monaco, the priority over the recommendations and dis-
Netherlands, Northern Ireland, Norway, Po- plays provided by the system.
land, Portugal, Romania, San Marino, Slova-
240
Driver assistance systems
Technical data
tection system If messages are ignored, the vehicle may stall
messages in traffic and cause accidents and severe inju-
ries.
There are no The system is booting up.
traffic signs OR ELSE: the camera has not rec- ● Never ignore the messages displayed.
available ognised any obligation or pro- ● Stop the vehicle at the next opportunity
hibition signs.
and in a safe place.
Error: Detec- There is a fault in the system.
Advice
tion of traffic Have the system checked by a Note
signs specialised workshop.
Failure to heed the control lamps and corre-
Speed warning The speed warning function of sponding text messages when they light up
currently un- the traffic sign detection system may result in damage to the vehicle.
available. is faulty.
Have the system checked by a
Operation
specialised workshop.
Emergencies
Detection of The navigation system is not travelling abroad.
traffic signs: transmitting any data.
Limited at the Check that the navigation sys-
Fig. 209 On the instrument panel display: ex- Activating and deactivating traffic sign dis-
moment tem's maps are up-to-date.
amples of speed limits or overtaking prohibi- play on the instrument panel
OR ELSE: the vehicle is currently
tions with their respective additional signs. in a region that is not included
in the navigation system's map.
The permanent display of traffic signs on the
The traffic signs detected by the system are instrument panel can be activated or deacti-
displayed on the dash panel display No data availa- The traffic sign detection system vated in the infotainment system using the
Safety
››› Fig. 209 and, depending on the navigation ble does not work in the current button and the SETTINGS and
country. Driver Assistance function buttons.
system fitted in the vehicle, on the infotain-
ment system as well ››› page 31.
Display of traffic signs
When the traffic sign detection system is con-
nected, a camera located on the base of the »
241
Operation
interior rear-view mirror records the traffic using the button and the SETTINGS and
Limited operation
signs in front of the vehicle. After checking function buttons
Driver Assistance
The traffic sign detection system has certain
and evaluating the information from the cam- ››› page 31. The speed is adjusted in limitations. The following cases may lead the
era, the navigation system and the current steps of 5 km/h (3 mph) within a range of be- system to operate with limitations or not at
vehicle data, up to three valid traffic signs tween 0 km/h (mph) and 20 km/h (12 mph) all:
are displayed ››› Fig. 209 B in conjunction above the maximum speed permitted.
with their corresponding additional signs. ● In the case of poor visibility, e.g. in snow,
Trailer mode rain, fog or intense mist.
First: The sign that is currently valid for the
In vehicles equipped with a towing bracket ● In cases of dazzling, e.g. caused by head-
driver is shown in the left side of the
screen For example, a maximum speed device from the factory and a trailer that is on traffic or by the sun.
limit of 130 km/h (100 mph) electrically connected to the vehicle, it is pos- ● When driving at high speeds.
››› Fig. 209 A. sible to activate or deactivate the display of
● If the camera is covered or dirty.
specific traffic signs for vehicles with trailer,
Second: A sign valid only in certain circum- ● If the traffic signs are out of the camera's
such as speed limits or overtaking prohibi-
stances, e.g. 100 km/h (60 mph) is tions. Activation or deactivation is performed field of vision.
shown second, together with the addi- on the infotainment system using the ● If the traffic signs are partially or totally
tional rain sign. button and the SETTINGS and covered, e.g. by trees, snow, dirt or other ve-
Additional sign: If the windscreen wiper is Driver Assistance function buttons hicles.
working while you are driving, the signal ››› page 31. ● In the case of traffic signs that do not fulfil
with the additional rain sign will be
For trailer mode, the display of speed limits the regulations.
shown first, on the left, as it is the one
that is applicable at the time. applicable to the type of trailer or to the legal ● In the case of damaged or bent traffic
provisions can be adjusted. The speed is ad- signs.
Third: A sign valid only with restrictions, e.g. justed in steps of 10 km/h (5 mph) within a
No overtaking at certain times, will be ● In the case of variable messages on over-
range of between 60 km/h (40 mph) and
displayed third ››› Fig. 209 C. 130 km/h (80 mph). If it is adjusted to a
head or gantry signs (LED-based variable traf-
fic signs or other lighting units).
speed greater than that which is permitted in
Speed warning the country in question for driving with a ● If the maps on the navigation system are
If the system detects that the permitted trailer, the system automatically displays the not up-to-date.
speed is exceeded, it may warn the driver usual speed limits, e.g. in Germany 80 km/h ● In the case of adhesives affixed to vehicles
with a “gong” and visually with a message (50 mph). that depict traffic signs, e.g. speed limits on
on the dash panel display. If the speed warning for the trailer is deacti- lorries.
The speed warning can be adjusted or deacti- vated, the system displays the speed limits
vated completely in the infotainment system as if there were no trailer hitched.
242
Driver assistance systems
Fatigue detection (break rec- Note shown for approximately 5 seconds, and de-
Technical data
pending on the case, is repeated. The system
ommendation)* ● Fatigue detection has been developed for
stores the last message displayed.
driving on motorways and well paved roads
only. The message on the instrument panel display
Introduction
● If there is a fault in the system, have it can be switched off by pressing the
The Fatigue detection informs the driver checked by a specialised workshop. button on the windscreen wiper lever or the
when their driving behaviour shows signs of button on the multi function steering
fatigue. wheel ››› page 34.
Advice
Function and operation The message can be recalled to the instru-
WARNING ment panel display using the multifunction
Do not let the comfort afforded by the Fatigue display ››› page 34.
detection system tempt you into taking any
risks when driving. Take regular breaks, suffi- Conditions of operation
cient in length when making long journeys.
Operation
Driving behaviour is only calculated on
● The driver always assumes the responsibil- speeds above about 65 km/h (40 mph) up to
ity of driving to their full capacity. around 200 km/h (125 mph).
● Never drive if you are tired.
● The system does not detect the tiredness of Switching on and off
the driver in all circumstances. Consult the in- Fatigue detection can be activated or deacti-
formation in the section ››› page 243, System
Emergencies
vated in the Easy Connect system with the
limitations. Fig. 210 On the instrument panel display: fa-
button and the SETTINGS function button
● In some situations, the system may incor- tigue detection symbol.
››› page 118. A mark indicates that the ad-
rectly interpret an intended driving manoeu- justment has been activated.
vre as driver tiredness. Fatigue detection determines the driving be-
● No warning is given in the event of the ef-
haviour of the driver when starting a journey,
making a calculation of tiredness. This is System limitations
fect called microsleep!
constantly compared with the current driving The Fatigue detection has certain limitations
● Please observe the indications on the in-
Safety
behaviour. If the system detects that the driv- inherent to the system. The following condi-
strument panel and act as is necessary.
er is tired, an audible warning is given with a tions can limit the Fatigue detection or pre-
sound and an optic warning is shown with a vent it from functioning.
symbol and complementary message on the
instrument panel display ››› Fig. 210. The ● At speeds below 65 km/h (40 mph)
message on the instrument panel display is ● At speeds above 200 km/h (125 mph) »
243
Operation
244
Driver assistance systems
CAUTION ● If one of the ultrasonic sensors is damaged, Description of the Park Assist system
Technical data
● In certain circumstances, the ultrasonic
the area corresponding to that group of sen-
sors (front or rear) is deactivated and cannot
sensors do not detect objects such as trailer
be activated until the fault is corrected. How-
tongues, bars, fences, posts or thin trees, or
ever, you can still use the sensors of the oth-
an open (or opening) rear lid, which could
er bumper as per usual. If there is a fault in
damage the vehicle.
the system, consult a specialist workshop.
● Retrofitting of certain accessories to the ve- SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealership
hicle, such as a bicycle rack, may interfere for this.
Advice
with the operation of the Park Assist system
and cause damage.
Note
● The Park Assist system uses as a reference
parked vehicles, curbs and other objects. ● In order to guarantee good system opera-
Make sure that the tyres and wheels are not tion, keep the ultrasound sensors of the Fig. 212 At the top of the centre console: but-
damaged while parking. If necessary, oppor- bumper clean, free of snow or ice, and do not ton to switch on the Park Assist system.
tunely interrupt the parking manoeuvre to cover them with adhesives or other objects.
Operation
avoid damaging the vehicle. ● Certain sources of noise, such as rough as- The components of Park Assist system are
● The ultrasound sensors on the bumper may phalt or paving stones and the noise of other the ultrasonic sensors located in the front
be damaged or shifted in the event of a colli- vehicles can induce the Park Assist system or and rear bumpers, the ››› Fig. 212 button
sion, for example, when entering or exiting a ParkPilot to give erroneous warnings. to switch the system on and off and the mes-
parking space. ● In order to become familiar with the system sages on the instrument panel display.
Emergencies
● If you use high-pressure or vapour equip- and its functions, SEAT recommends that you
ment to clean the ultrasound sensors, do not practice operating the Park Assist system in Prematurely stopping or automatically inter-
apply it directly unless very briefly and al- an area where there is not too much traffic or rupting the manoeuvres for parking or exit-
ways from a distance of more than 10 cm. in a car park. ing a parking space
● A registration plate or plate holder on the Park Assist interrupts the manoeuvres for
front with larger than the space for the regis- parking or exiting a parking space in any of
tration plate, or a registration plate that is
the following cases:
curved or warped can cause:
Safety
– false detections, ● Button is pressed.
– loss of sensor visibility. ● The speed exceeds approximately 7 km/h
– cancellation of the parking manoeuvre or (4 mph).
defective parking. ● The driver takes hold of the steering wheel. »
245
Operation
● The parking manoeuvre does not end with- ple, it is therefore not possible to enter or exit Trailer mode
in approximately 6 minutes following activa- a parking space on sharp bends. The Park Assist system cannot be switched
tion of the automatic steering. on if the factory-fitted towing bracket
While entering or exiting a parking space, a
● There is a fault in the system (the system is brief signal sounds to prompt the driver to ››› page 267 is electrically connected to a
temporarily unavailable). change between forward and reverse gears. If trailer.
● ASR is switched off. this signal does not sound, the gear change
● ASR or ESC intervene with regulation. will be indicated when the continuous signal After changing a wheel
sounds (object at 30 cm) in ParkPilot. If, after changing a wheel, the vehicle stops
● The driver door is opened.
When the Park Assist system turns the steer- entering and exiting parking spaces correctly,
● Seven parking manoeuvres are made. the circumference of the new wheel may be
ing wheel with the vehicle stationary, the in-
strument panel also displays the symbol . different and the system may need to adapt
To restart the manoeuvre it is necessary that
Press down the brake pedal so that the turn to it. The adaptation is automatic and takes
none of these things occur and that button
is pressed again. takes place with the vehicle stationary and place during driving. Making turns slowly, at
the smallest possible number of manoeuvres less than 20 km/h (12 mph) may contribute
take place in the parking space. to this adaptation process ››› in Introduc-
Special Characteristics
tion on page 244.
The Park Assist system is subject to certain
limitations inherent to the system. For exam-
246
Driver assistance systems
Technical data
mode, you can select another mode by press-
ing button ››› Fig. 212. 5.
Press the button again to switch the system
back on.
Action Follow the instructions displayed on the instru-
6. ment panel while paying attention to traffic and
The necessary conditions to park with Park Assist
1. drive the vehicle past the parking space.
have to be met ››› page 248.
Advice
A control lamp on the button lights up when to park forwards without driving past first
Fig. 214 On the instrument panel display: 2. the system is switched on. Additionally, the se-
displaying the Park Assist system with re- lected parking mode is shown on the instrument Action
duced display. panel display and the reduced display shows an-
The necessary conditions to park with Park Assist
other parking mode it can be changed to. 1.
have to be met ››› page 248.
Selecting a parking mode with Park Assist
Operation
Turn on the corresponding turn signal towards
with prior step in front of the space Drive forward towards the parking space while
the side of the road where you are parking. The 2.
paying attention to traffic and stop the vehicle.
After activating the Park Assist system and instrument panel displays the side correspond-
3.
ing to the road. By default, if the turn signal is Press the button once.
after detecting a parking space, the display
not on, it parks on the right in the direction of
on the instrument panel proposes a parking traffic. A control lamp on the button lights up when
mode. The Park Assist system selects the 3. the system is switched on. Additionally, the se-
Emergencies
parking mode automatically. The selected If necessary, press the button again to lected parking mode is shown on the instrument
mode is shown on the instrument panel dis- change parking mode. panel display without reduced display.
play ››› Fig. 214. The reduced display of other 4. Once you have switched to all possible parking Release the steering wheel ››› in Introduction
possible parking modes is also shown modes, if the button is pressed again, the 4.
on page 244.
››› Fig. 213. If the mode selected by the sys- system switches off.
Safety
247
Operation
Key to Fig. 215 and Fig. 216: Progress bars Necessary conditions to park with Park As-
1 Message to move forwards The progress bar sist
2 Your vehicle ››› Fig. 215 7 and ››› Fig. 216 7 on the For parallel parking For perpendicular
screen of the instrument panel displays the spaces parking spaces
3 Parked vehicle
relative distance to be covered. The greater
4 Parking space detected the distance, the fuller the progress bar. The traction control system (ASR) must be turned on
5 Message to park When driving forward, the content of the pro- ››› page 186.
gress bar decreases upwards, and when re-
6 Message to press the brake pedal
versing, it decreases downwards.
7 Progress bar
248
Driver assistance systems
Technical data
spaces parking spaces
Please note the following message: Active au- Go forward until the ParkPilot continuous signal
Do not exceed approxi- Do not exceed approxi- tomatic steering. Watch out around is heard.
mately 40 km/h (25 mph) mately 20 km/h (12 mph) you.
OR: go forward until the instrument panel display
when driving past the when driving past the
While you keep watch around you, carefully start 9. shows the message to reverse.
parking space. parking space.
5. accelerating up to no more than 7 km/h (4 mph).
The Park Assist system steers the vehicle forward
Keep a distance between 0.5 and 2.0 metres when driv-
During the parking manoeuvre, the system only and back until it centres it in the space ››› Fig. 215
ing past the parking space.
or ››› Fig. 216 .
Advice
takes charge of the steering. You, as the driver,
Length of the space: Width of the space: width have to accelerate, engage the clutch if necessa-
ry, change gears and brake. For best results, wait at the end of each manoeu-
length of the vehicle + of the vehicle + 0.8 me-
vre until the Park Assist system has finished turn-
0.8 metres tres
Reverse until the ParkPilot continuous signal is ing the steering wheel.
Do not exceed approximately 7 km/h (4 mph) when heard. 10.
The parking manoeuvre ends when a correspond-
parking.
OR: reverse until the instrument panel displays ing message is displayed on the instrument panel
Operation
the message to go forwards ››› Fig. 215 1 and, in some cases, an acoustic signal sounds.
Parking 6. or ››› Fig. 216 1 .
Emergencies
cover ››› page 248.
mode must be selected ››› page 246.
Press down the brake pedal until the Park Assist
Look at the display on the instrument panel to
system has finished turning the steering wheel.
see if the space has been detected as “appropri- 7.
ate” and if the correct position for parking has OR: until the symbol on the instrument panel
2. been reached ››› Fig. 215 or ››› Fig. 216 . display switches off.
The space is considered “appropriate” if the dis- 8. Select first gear.
play on the instrument panel shows the message
Safety
to park 5 .
Exiting a parking space with Park As- ● Do not exceed approximately 7 km/h
For parallel parking spaces
sist (only for parallel spaces) (4 mph) when exiting the parking space.
Reverse until the ParkPilot continuous signal is
Exiting a parking space heard.
250
Driver assistance systems
Automatic braking intervention by WARNING During parking, Parking System Plus assists
Technical data
Park Assist the driver by visually and audibly warning
The automatic braking intervention by Park them about obstacles detected in front of
Assist should never tempt you to take any
Park Assist helps the driver by automatically and behind the vehicle.
risk that may compromise safety. The system
braking in certain situations. is not a replacement for driver awareness. There are ultrasound sensors integrated in
The driver is always responsible for braking ● The Park Assist system is subject to certain the front and rear bumpers. When they detect
in time ››› . limitations inherent to the system. In certain an obstacle, you are alerted by audible warn-
situations, the automatic braking interven- ings and visually on the Easy Connect sys-
Advice
Automatic braking intervention to avoid ex- tion may only work in a limited way or not tem.
ceeding the speed limit work at all.
In the event of danger of a frontal collision,
● Always be ready to use the brakes yourself!
To avoid exceeding the speed limit of approx- the audible warnings come from the front of
imately 7 km/h (4 mph) when entering or ● The automatic braking intervention will end the vehicle, and in the event of the danger of
leaving a parking space, the brakes may acti- after approximately 1.5 seconds. Following a rear-end collision they come from the rear.
vate automatically. After automatically acti- this, brake the vehicle yourself.
Operation
Make particularly sure that the sensors are
vating the brakes, the manoeuvres to enter or not covered by adhesives, residues and the
exit a parking space may continue. like, as this could affect the system's opera-
The brakes are only automatically activated Parking System Plus (ParkPi- tion. Cleaning instructions ››› page 281.
once for each attempt to enter or exit a park- lot)* The approximate measurement range of the
ing space. If the speed of approximately sensors is:
Emergencies
7 km/h (4 mph) is exceeded again, the corre-
sponding operation is halted. Description A 1.20 m
B 1.60 m
Automatic braking to reduce damages
C 0.90 m
Depending on certain conditions, the Park
Assist system can automatically brake the ve- As you approach the obstacle, the time inter-
hicle when faced with an obstacle, briefly ac- val between the audible warnings will be re-
tioning and holding down the brake ped- duced. When you reach around 0.30 m the
Safety
al ››› . Following this the driver must press warning will be constant: do not continue to
the brake pedal. move forward (or backward)!
Automatic braking intervention to reduce If you maintain separation from the obstacle,
damage leads to the parking manoeuvre fin- the volume of the warning begins to reduce »
ishing. Fig. 218 Represented area.
251
Operation
after four seconds (does not affect the tone ● The ultrasound sensors have blind spots in the sensors as the car moves closer, so the
of the constant warning). which obstacles and people are not regis- system will not give any further warning. In
In order to view the entire periphery of the ve- tered. Pay special attention to children and certain circumstances, objects such as high
animals. kerbs that could damage the bottom of the
hicle, the vehicle must be moved a few me-
● Always keep visual control of the vehicle vehicle are not detected either.
tres forwards and backwards. Thus the miss-
ing areas are screened and the periphery of surroundings: use the mirrors for additional ● If the first warning from the ParkPilot is ig-
the vehicle is calculated. help. nored, the vehicle could suffer considerable
damage.
Special features of ParkPilot with Area View CAUTION ● The knocks or damage on the radiator
grille, bumper, wheel arch and vehicle under-
In the following situations the screened area Parking Aid functions may be negatively af- body can adjust the orientation of the sen-
on the side of the vehicle is automatically fected by different factors that may lead to sors. This can affect the parking aid function.
hidden: damage to the vehicle or its immediate sur- In this case, have the function checked by a
rounds: specialised workshop.
● When a vehicle door is opened. ● Under certain circumstances, the system ● A registration plate or plate holder on the
● When the ASR is switched off. does not detect or display certain objects: front with larger than the space for the regis-
● When there is ASR or ESC regulation. – Objects such as chains, trailer draw bars, tration plate, or a registration plate that is
fences, posts and thin trees. curved or warped can cause:
● If the vehicle remains stationary for more
– Objects that are located above the sen- – false detections,
than approximately 3 minutes.
sors, such as protrusions in a wall. – loss of sensor visibility.
WARNING – Objects with certain surfaces or struc-
tures, such as wire mesh fences or pow-
● Always pay attention, also when looking Note
der snow.
straight ahead, to traffic and the vehicle sur- ● In certain situations, the system can give a
● Certain surfaces of objects and garments
roundings. The assistance systems are not a warning even though there is no obstacle in
replacement for driver awareness. When in- do not reflect the ultrasound sensors' sig-
nals. The system cannot detect these objects the detected area, e.g:
serting or removing the vehicle from a park-
ing space, or when performing similar ma- or people wearing such clothes correctly. – with rough or cobbled floors or ground
noeuvres the driver always assumes the re- ● Ultrasound sensor signals may be affected with long grass;
sponsibility. by external sound sources. In certain circum- – with external ultrasound sources, such as
● Adapt your speed and driving style at all stances this may prevent them from detect- cleaning vehicles or other vehicles equip-
times to suit visibility, weather, road and traf- ing people or objects. ped with ultrasound systems;
fic conditions. ● Please note that low obstacles detected by – in downpours, intense snow, hail or
the system may no longer be registered by dense exhaust gases,
252
Driver assistance systems
– if the number plate is not perfectly se- Parking Aid operation 10 km/h (6 mph) ››› page 254. The obstacle
Technical data
cured to the bumper surface, is detected as of a distance of approx. 95 cm
– or in locations such as the brow of a hill.
if the automatic connection is activated in
the infotainment system. A reduced display is
● In order to guarantee good system opera-
shown.
tion, keep the ultrasound sensors clean, free
of snow or ice, and do not cover them with ● OR: If the vehicle moves backwards.
adhesives or other objects.
● If you use high-pressure or vapour equip- Automatic disconnection of Parking Aid
Advice
ment to clean the ultrasound sensors, apply ● Move the selector lever to position P.
it directly only very briefly and always from a
● OR: accelerate to more than approx.
distance of more than 10 cm.
10 km/h (6 mph) forward.
● Retrofitting of accessories to the vehicle,
such as a bicycle rack, may interfere with the Fig. 219 Centre console: Park Assist button
(depending on the version). Temporary suppression of sound in Parking
operation of the Parking Aid.
Aid
Operation
● Fitting certain accessories to the front of
Manual connection of Parking Aid ● Press the function button.
the vehicle, such as a plate holder with ad-
vertising, may interfere with the operation of ● Press the button once.
the Park Assist. Change from reduced view to full view
● In order to familiarise yourself with the sys- Manual disconnection of Parking Aid ● Engage reverse gear or turn the selector
tem, it is advised that you practice parking in ● Press the button again. lever to position R.
Emergencies
an area or car park that is free from traffic.
● OR: press the car icon in reduced view.
There must be good weather and light condi-
tions. Manual disconnection of Parking Aid display
(the audible sounds remain active) If necessary, switch to the rear-assist image
● The volume and tone of the warnings can
be modified, in addition to the indications ● Press a button on the main menu of the fac- (Rear View Camera “RVC”)
››› page 258. tory-assembled infotainment system. ● Engage reverse gear or turn the selector
● In vehicles without an infotainment system, ● OR: press the BACK function button. lever to position R.
these parameters can be modified in a SEAT ● OR: Press the RVC function button.
Safety
Official Service or in a specialised workshop. Automatic connection of Parking Aid
● Please observe information on towing a A short confirmation signal will be heard and
● Engage reverse gear or turn the selector
trailer ››› page 259. the button symbol will light up yellow when
lever to position R.
● The display on the Easy Connect screen the system is switched on.
● OR: If the vehicle approaches an obstacle
shows a slight time delay.
that is in its forwards path at a speed below
253
Operation
Automatic activation ● OR: accelerate above 10 km/h (6 mph) be- Segments of the visual indication
fore reducing speed below this number
again.
● OR: place the selector lever in position P
and then move it from this position.
● OR: switch on and off the automatic activa-
tion in the Easy Connect system menu.
Moreover, with the SEAT Media System Automatic activation ing aid error is displayed on the instrument
Technical data
Plus/Navi System radios, a yellow trail indi- on – activates the Automatic activa- panel, there is a fault in the system.
cates the vehicle's expected trajectory based tion option ››› page 254. If the fault doesn't disappear before discon-
on the steering wheel angle.
off – deactivates the Automatic ac- necting the ignition, next time that parking
Whenever the obstacle is located in the vehi- tivation option ››› page 254. aid is engaged in reverse, it will not be indi-
cle’s direction of travel, the corresponding cated.
audible warning will sound. Front volume* If there is a fault in the parking aid system a
As the vehicle approaches an obstacle, the Volume in the front and rear area. message will appear on the instrument panel
Advice
segments are displayed closer to the vehicle. indicating the error. In addition the key
When the penultimate segment is displayed, Front sound settings/sharpness* LED will blink.
this means that the vehicle has reached the
Frequency (tone) of the sound in the front If there is a fault in a sensor, the symbol is
collision zone. In the collision zone, the ob-
area. displayed on the Easy Connect display in
stacles are represented in red, including
front of/behind the vehicle. If a rear sensor is
those out of the path. Do not continue to
Operation
Rear volume* faulty, only the obstacles in the areas A and
move forward (or backward) ››› in Descrip-
B are displayed ››› Fig. 218. If a front sensor
tion on page 252, ››› in Description on Volume in the rear area. is faulty, only the obstacles in the areas C
page 252 !
and D are displayed.
In the event the car is equipped with the Top Rear sound settings/sharpness*
Have the fault corrected by a specialised
View Camera system, Park Assist visual guid- Frequency (tone) of the sound in the rear workshop without delay.
Emergencies
ance will appear in accordance with the view area.
selected in the Top View Camera system.
Adjust volume
With the parking aid switched on, the active
Adjusting the display and audible audio/video source volume will be reduced
warnings to the intensity of the selected setting.
Safety
warnings are controlled via the Easy Con-
Error messages
nect*.
When the Parking Aid is activated or when it
is switched on, if a message reporting a Park-
255
Operation
Driving with a trailer Parking aid (ParkPilot)* As you approach the obstacle, the time inter-
val between the audible warnings will be re-
duced. When you reach around 0.30 m the
Description
warning will be constant: Do not continue to
Assorted assistance systems – which vary move forward (or backward) ››› , ››› !
depending on the equipment fitted in the car If you maintain separation from the obstacle,
– will help you when parking or manoeu- the volume of the warning begins to reduce
vring. after four seconds (does not affect the tone
The rear parking aid is an audible assistant of the constant warning).
that warns of obstacles located behind the
vehicle. Activating/Deactivating
There are sensors integrated in the rear When engaging reverse gear, the parking aid
Fig. 222 ParkPilot display on the screen with
bumper. When they detect an obstacle, you is automatically switched on. This is con-
trailer attached.
are alerted by audible warnings and visually firmed with a short warning.
In vehicles equipped with a towing bracket on the Easy Connect system. On disengaging reverse gear, the parking aid
device from the factory, when the trailer is system is switched off.
If the Top View Camera* is installed, the rear
connected electrically, the Parking Aid rear
parking aid will issue an audible warning
sensors will not be activated when reverse WARNING
about objects near the rear of the vehicle,
gear is engaged, when the selector lever is ● Always pay attention, also when looking
and the Top View Camera* image will be
turned to position R or when the button is straight ahead, to traffic and the vehicle sur-
available on the Easy Connect screen, giving
pressed. roundings. The assistance systems are not a
a real image of the objects around the car.
The distance to possible obstacles at the rear replacement for driver awareness. When in-
Make particularly sure that the sensors are serting or removing the vehicle from a park-
of the vehicle and at its sides will not be dis-
not covered by adhesives, residues, dirt and ing space, or when performing similar ma-
played on the screen and will not be indica-
the like, as this could affect the system's op- noeuvres the driver always assumes the re-
ted by means of audible sound signals.
eration. Cleaning instructions ››› page 281. sponsibility.
The Easy Connect system screen will only dis- ● Adapt your speed and driving style at all
The approximate measurement range of the
play objects detected at the front, and the ve- times to suit visibility, weather, road and traf-
rear sensors is:
hicle's trajectory will be hidden. fic conditions.
side area 0.60 m
256
Driver assistance systems
● The ultrasound sensors have blind spots in the sensors as the car moves closer, so the of snow or ice, and do not cover them with
Technical data
which obstacles and people are not regis- system will not give any further warning. In adhesives or other objects.
tered. Pay special attention to children and certain circumstances, objects such as high ● If you use high-pressure or vapour equip-
animals. kerbs that could damage the bottom of the ment to clean the ultrasound sensors, apply
● Always keep visual control of the vehicle vehicle are not detected either. it directly only very briefly and always from a
surroundings: use the mirrors for additional ● If the first warning from the ParkPilot is ig- distance of more than 10 cm.
help. nored, the vehicle could suffer considerable ● Retrofitting of accessories to the vehicle,
damage. such as a bicycle rack, may interfere with the
● The knocks or damage on the radiator operation of the Parking Aid.
Advice
CAUTION
grille, bumper, wheel arch and vehicle under- ● In order to familiarise yourself with the sys-
Parking Aid functions may be negatively af- body can adjust the orientation of the sen-
fected by different factors that may lead to tem, it is advised that you practice parking in
sors. This can affect the parking aid function. an area or car park that is free from traffic.
damage to the vehicle or its immediate sur- In this case, have the function checked by a
rounds: There must be good weather and light condi-
specialised workshop. tions.
● Under certain circumstances, the system
Operation
● The volume and tone of the warnings can
does not detect or display certain objects:
Note be modified, in addition to the indications
– Objects such as chains, trailer draw bars, ››› page 258.
● In certain situations, the system can give a
fences, posts and thin trees.
warning even though there is no obstacle in ● In vehicles without an infotainment system,
– Objects that are located above the sen- these parameters can be modified in a SEAT
the detected area, e.g:
sors, such as protrusions in a wall. Official Service or in a specialised workshop.
– with rough or cobbled floors or ground
Emergencies
– Objects with certain surfaces or struc- ● Please observe information on towing a
with long grass;
tures, such as wire mesh fences or pow- trailer ››› page 259.
der snow. – with external ultrasound sources, such as
cleaning vehicles or other vehicles equip- ● The display on the Easy Connect screen
● Certain surfaces of objects and garments
ped with ultrasound systems; shows a slight time delay.
do not reflect the ultrasound sensors' sig-
nals. The system cannot detect these objects – in downpours, intense snow, hail or
or people wearing such clothes correctly. dense exhaust gases,
● Ultrasound sensor signals may be affected – if the number plate is not perfectly se- Parking Aid operation
Safety
by external sound sources. In certain circum- cured to the bumper surface,
stances this may prevent them from detect- – or in locations such as the brow of a hill. Manual disconnection of Parking Aid display
ing people or objects. (the audible sounds remain active)
● In order to guarantee good system opera-
● Please note that low obstacles detected by tion, keep the ultrasound sensors clean, free ● Press a button on the main menu of the fac-
the system may no longer be registered by tory-assembled infotainment system.
● OR: press the BACK function button. »
257
Operation
Parking Aid connection Segments of the visual indication Whenever the obstacle is located in the vehi-
● Engage reverse (for manual gears) or set cle’s direction of travel, the corresponding
the selector lever to R (for automatic gears). audible warning will sound.
As the vehicle approaches an obstacle, the
Parking Aid disconnection segments are displayed closer to the vehicle.
● Place the selector level in position P, N or D When the penultimate segment is displayed,
(for automatic gearboxes) or disengage re- this means that the vehicle has reached the
verse (for manual gearboxes). If you set the collision zone. In the collision zone, the ob-
lever to N or D, the system will remain active stacles are represented in red, including
for approximately 8 seconds before switching those out of the path. Do not continue to re-
off, except with Top View Camera*, when it verse ››› in Description on page 256, ›››
will be switched off immediately after engag- in Description on page 257!
ing reverse. Fig. 223 Parking Aid display on the Easy Con-
nect system screen. If you are equipped with the Top View
Temporary suppression of sound in Parking Camera*
The distance to the obstacles can be estima-
Aid Segments are not displayed when the vehicle
ted with the help of the segments at the rear
● Press the function button. If you have the of the vehicle. is equipped with Top View Camera*.
Top View Camera* system installed, you can- The PDC system will issue an audible warning
The optical indication of the segments works
not use the temporary suppression of sound for objects that are near the rear of the vehi-
as follows:
in Parking Aid. cle, and the Top View Camera* image will be
White segments: they are displayed if the available on the screen, giving a real image
Switch from reduced to full-screen view if the obstacle is not in the vehicle's direction of the objects around the car.
rear assist is fitted (Rear View Camera of travel, even when the electric parking
“RVC”) brake is activated.
● Press the car icon in the reduced view. Yellow segments: obstacles located in the Adjusting the display and audible
vehicle's trajectory and which are more warnings
If necessary, switch to the rear-assist image than 30 cm away from the vehicle are
(Rear View Camera “RVC”) displayed in yellow. The settings for the display and audible
warnings are controlled via the Easy Con-
● Engage reverse gear or turn the selector Red segments: obstacles that are less than
nect*.
lever to position R. 30 cm away from the vehicle are dis-
● OR: press the RVC function icon. played in red.
258
Driver assistance systems
Technical data
Volume in the rear area. Area View system may vary depending on
In vehicles equipped with a towing bracket whether or not the vehicle has ParkPilot.
device from the factory, when the trailer is
Rear sound settings/sharpness*
connected electrically, the Parking Aid rear WARNING
Frequency (tone) of the sound in the rear sensors will not be activated when reverse The image from the cameras does not make it
area. gear is engaged (manual gears) nor when the possible to calculate the distance to the ob-
selector lever is turned to position R (auto- stacles (people, vehicles, etc.) precisely, so
Adjust volume matic gears). using them could cause serious accidents
Advice
With the parking aid switched on, the active and injury.
audio/video source volume will be reduced ● The camera lenses augment and distort the
to the intensity of the selected setting. visual field and the objects on the screen are
Top View Camera* seen differently and imprecisely.
● Certain objects may not be shown or may
Related video
Error messages not be shown very clearly, for example, posts
Operation
or thin rails, due to the screen resolution or if
When the Parking Aid is activated or when it light conditions are insufficient.
is switched on, if a message reporting a Park- ● The cameras have blind spots in which ob-
ing aid error is displayed on the instrument stacles and people are not registered.
panel, there is a fault in the system. ● The camera lens must be kept free, without
Emergencies
If the fault disappears before disconnecting snow or ice, and should not be covered.
Fig. 224 Smart solutions
the ignition, next time that parking aid is en-
gaged in reverse it will not be indicated. WARNING
If there is a fault in a sensor, the symbol is The smart technology incorporated into the
Introduction Top View Camera* system cannot overcome
displayed on the Easy Connect display.
the limits imposed by the laws of physics and
Have the fault corrected by a specialised Using 4 cameras, the system generates a rep- it only works within the limits of the system.
workshop without delay. resentation that is shown on the infotain- The greater convenience provided by the Area
Safety
ment system display. The cameras are loca- View system should never tempt you to take
ted on the radiator grille, the exterior mirrors any risk that may compromise safety. If used
and the rear lid. negligently or involuntarily, it may cause se-
rious accidents and injuries. The system is
not a replacement for driver awareness. »
259
Operation
● Adapt your speed and driving style to suit CAUTION Key to the Fig. 225:
visibility, weather, road and traffic condi-
In order to guarantee good system operation, Symbol Meaning
tions.
keep the cameras clean, free of snow or ice,
● Do not be distracted from the traffic by and do not cover them with adhesives or oth- A Front camera area
looking at the screen. er objects.
● Monitor the area around the vehicle at all ● Never use abrasive cleaning products to B Right camera area
times, since the cameras do not capture small clean the camera lenses.
children, animals and certain objects in all C Rear camera area
● Do not use hot or warm water to remove ice
situations.
or snow from the camera lenses. Doing so D Left camera area
● The use of a number plate may interfere in could damage the lenses.
the views shown on the screen, since the
cameras' field of vision may be reduced. Exit the current display.
260
Driver assistance systems
● The image must be reliable and clear. For ● Rear camera (rear view): To observe traffic Instructions for use
Technical data
this reason, for example, the camera lens behind the vehicle (vehicles crossing) , for
must be clean. reverse perpendicular parking , for reverse
● The area around the vehicle must be clearly parallel parking and for hitching a trailer
and totally visible. to the vehicle .
● The area for parking or manoeuvring The selected view is displayed on the right
should be a flat surface. side of the screen. The reduced aerial view
● The vehicle should not be loaded very shown on the right side displays the view
Advice
heavily at the rear. framed in yellow. In addition, the right mar-
● The driver must be used to the system.
gin of the screen displays the menu options
possible and the views (the so-called
● There should be no damage to the vehicle “modes”) of the camera in question. The ac-
in the camera area. If the position or installa- tive view (mode) at the time is highlighted. Fig. 226 Centre console: button for activat-
tion angle of the cameras have been ing/deactivating the Area View system man-
The reduced aerial view can be hidden by ually in combination with the parking aid sys-
Operation
changed, e.g. after a rear-end collision, the
system should be checked by a specialised pressing the symbol to thus display the se- tem () or else with the rear ParkPilot system
workshop. lected view full-screen. ().
Emergencies
panoramic view of the vehicle , three-di- Press the button ››› Fig. 226 once.
mensional views, from different camera posi-
Manual con- The infotainment system screen dis-
tions.
nection of the plays the aerial view ››› Fig. 225. If
● Front Camera (front view): to observe traffic display: you press the button when driving
ahead of the vehicle (vehicles crossing) , above 15 km/h (9 mph), the image
for front parallel parking , when approach- will not be displayed.
ing an obstacle and in off-road driving . Engage reverse gear.
Safety
● Side cameras (side view): to view the area OR: The vehicle moves backwards.
Automatic con-
close to the sides of the vehicle, both on the The view of the image of the vehicle's
nection of the
left and on the right , or a combination of display: rear camera is shown in parallel park-
both sides . ing mode with the reduced aerial
view. »
261
Operation
Connecting and disconnecting the Area View Examples of optical illusions caused by the area where there is not too much traffic or in
system cameras: a car park.
Press the button ››› Fig. 226 Situations in which the objects or other vehicles appear
again. to be further away or closer than they really are:
Manual discon-
OR: press a button on the factory- – On moving from a horizontal plane to a slope.
nection of the
equipped infotainment system, for
display: – On moving from a slope to a horizontal plane.
example the RADIO button.
OR: press the function button . – If the vehicle is heavily loaded at the rear.
Drive forward at more than approx. – If the vehicle approaches protruding objects. These
15 km/h (9 mph). objects may be outside the cameras' angle of visibility.
Automatic dis-
connection of OR: switch the ignition off. The Area
the display: View system menu disappears imme- Trailer mode
diately. The Area View system conceals, in the rear
camera area, all the auxiliary guiding lines
Special characteristics when the factory-fitted towing bracket is con-
nected electrically to a trailer ››› page 267.
Examples of optical illusions caused by the
cameras: Note
The images on the area view system cameras are only In order to become familiar with the system
two-dimensional. Due to a lack of spatial depth, it is dif- and its functions, SEAT recommends that you
ficult or impossible to make out on-screen any holes practice handling the Area View system in an
there may be on the ground, objects jutting out from the
ground or parts protruding from other vehicles.
262
Driver assistance systems
Technical data
Advice
Fig. 227 Display on the Area View system
screen: Front camera: off-road view Rear
camera: off-road view
Key to the Fig. 227: Aerial views (bird's eye view) Front camera views (front view)
Operation
Symbol Meaning View On-screen display of all cameras On-screen display of the front
View
camera
Depending on the equipment: connect- Main The vehicle and its immediate vicinity
ing and disconnecting the ParkPilot mode seen from above are shown. Depending Left area of the screen: street to the left.
sound. on the equipment, the ParkPilot's path Cross traffic
may also be displayed.
at the front
Central area of the screen: area directly
in front of the vehicle.
Showing the reduced display.
Emergencies
The vehicle and its vicinity seen
from above are shown.
Right area of the screen: street to the
Hiding the reduced display.
right.
Three-di- The vehicle and its vicinity seen
Exiting the Area View system screen:
mensional from above are shown oblique- Parallel park-
The area in front of the vehicle is
Setting the display: brightness, contrast views ly. ing shown. Orientation lines are shown to
and colour. give guidance.
The vehicle and its vicinity seen
obliquely are shown.
The area directly in front of the vehicle
Safety
seen from above is shown. For example,
Swipe the infotainment system display with Off-road on a slope, in order to see the area di-
your finger in the direction of the arrows to rectly in front of the vehicle. The red line
change the angle of vision in the three-di- is shown at a distance of approx. 0.4 m
mensional views of the vehicle and its vicini- from the vehicle. »
ty.
263
Operation
264
Driver assistance systems
● The system is not a replacement for driver so be outside the camera's angle of vi- number plate area that will be used as refer-
Technical data
awareness. Supervise the parking operation sion when reversing. ence by the driver.
at all times, as well as the vehicle's surround-
ing area. Adapt your speed and driving style Rear assist settings
Note
at all times to suit visibility, weather, road
Rear assist offers the user the possibility to
and traffic conditions. ● It is important to take great care and pay
change the image's brightness, contrast and
● Do not be distracted from the traffic by special attention if you are not yet familiar
with the system. colour settings.
looking at the screen.
● The images on the rear assist screen are ● Rear assist will not be available if the vehi- To change these settings:
Advice
only two-dimensional. Due to a lack of spatial cle's rear lid is open.
● Park the vehicle in a safe place.
depth, protruding parts or holes in the road,
for example, are more difficult to detect or ● Apply the parking brake.
may not be seen at all. Instructions for use ● Switch the ignition on.
● Vehicle load modifies the representation of ● If necessary, switch on the Easy Connect
the orientation lines displayed. The width
Operation
system.
represented by the lines diminishes with ve-
hicle load. Pay special attention to the vehi- ● Engage reverse gear or turn the selector
cle's surroundings when the inside of the ve- lever to position R.
hicle of the luggage compartment is carrying ● Press the function button displayed on
a heavy load. the right of the image.
● In the following situations, the objects or
Emergencies
● Make the desired adjustments on the menu
other vehicles shown in the navigation sys-
by pressing the –/+ function buttons or by
tem display appear to be further away or
closer than they really are: Pay special atten-
moving the corresponding scroll button.
tion:
Fig. 228 In the rear lid handle: location of the Necessary conditions for parking and ma-
– On moving from a horizontal plane to a
rear assist camera. noeuvring with the rear assist
slope.
– On moving from a slope to a horizontal The system should not be used in the follow-
A camera installed in the rear lid handle as- ing cases:
Safety
plane.
sists the driver in reverse parking or manoeu-
– If the vehicle is heavily loaded at the vring ››› Fig. 228. The camera image is viewed ● If the image displayed is not very reliable or
rear. together with orientation lines projected by is distorted, for example low visibility or dirty
– When the vehicle approaches objects the system on the Easy Connect system lens. »
that are not on the ground surface or are screen. The bottom of the screen displays
jutting out from it. These objects may al- part of the bumper corresponding to the
265
Operation
● If the area behind the vehicle is not dis- Parking and manoeuvring with the In combination with the Parking System Plus
played very clearly or is incomplete. rear assist ››› page 256, the camera image will cease to
● If the vehicle is heavily loaded at the rear. be transmitted immediately when reverse
gear is disengaged or when the selector lever
● If the position and installation angle of the
is moved from the R position, and the optical
camera have been changed, e.g. after a rear- information provided by the Parking Aid sys-
end collision. Have the system checked by a tem will be displayed.
specialised workshop.
Also in combination with the system, the rear
Familiarising yourself with the system assist image can also be concealed:
To familiarise yourself with the system, the ● By pressing one of the Infotainment system
orientation lines and their function, SEAT rec- buttons on the display.
ommends practising parking and manoeu- ● OR: By pressing the miniature vehicle that
vring with the rear assist in a place without
Fig. 229 Display on the Easy Connect system appears on the left of the screen (which
too much traffic or in a car park when there screen: orientation lines. switches to the full-screen mode of the Park-
are good weather and visibility conditions.
ing System Plus's optical system).
Switching the system on and off
Cleaning the camera lens If you wish to display the rear assist image
● The rear assist will switch on when the igni-
Keep the camera lens clean and clear of snow again:
tion is on or the engine running, on engaging
and ice: reverse gear (manual gearbox) or on chang- ● Disengage reverse, or change the selector
● Moisten the lens using a normal alcohol-
ing the selector lever to the R position (auto- lever's position, engage reverse again or
matic gearbox). move the selector lever to position R.
based glass cleaning product and clean the
lens with a dry cloth. ● The system switches off 8 seconds after
● Remove snow using a small brush.
disengaging reverse gear (manual gearbox)
or removing the selector lever from the R po-
● Use de-icing spray to remove any ice. sition (automatic gearbox). The system will
also disconnect immediately after the igni-
CAUTION tion is switched off.
● Never use abrasive cleaning products to ● The camera will stop transmitting images
clean the camera lens. above the speed of 15 km/h (9 mph) with re-
● Do not use hot or warm water to remove ice verse engaged.
or snow from the camera lens. Doing so could
damage the camera.
266
Towing bracket device*
● OR: Press the RVC function button1) ● Guide the vehicle into the parking space so
Towing bracket device*
Technical data
that the side orientation lines run parallel to
Meaning of the orientation lines it.
Trailer mode
››› Fig. 229
1 Side lines: extension of the vehicle (the Introduction
approximate width of the vehicle plus the
rear view mirrors) on the road surface. Take into account country-specific regula-
2 End of the side lines: the area marked in tions about driving with a trailer and the use
Advice
green ends approximately 2 m behind of a towing bracket.
the vehicle on the road surface. The vehicle has been developed primarily for
3 Intermediate line: indicates a distance of carrying people, although it can also be used
approximately 1 m behind the vehicle on to tow a trailer if fitted with the correspond-
the road surface. ing technical equipment. This additional load
Operation
4 Red horizontal line: indicates a safe dis- has an effect on the useful life, fuel con-
tance of approximately 40 cm at the rear sumption and vehicle performance and in
of the vehicle on the road surface. some cases can reduce the service intervals.
Driving with a trailer requires more force from
Parking manoeuvre the vehicle, and thus more concentration
● Place the vehicle in front of the parking from the driver.
Emergencies
space and engage reverse gear (manual In winter, winter tyres should be fitted on
gearbox) or move the selector to the R posi- both the vehicle and the trailer.
tion (automatic gearbox).
● Reverse slowly, and turn the steering wheel Maximum vertical load technically permissi-
so that the side orientation lines lead to- ble on the coupling
wards the parking space. The maximum vertical load technically per-
mitted from the trailer draw bar on the towing
Safety
bracket's tow hitch is 80 kg. »
Vehicles with the Start-Stop system ● Never modify or repair the towing bracket ● Never drive at more than 80 km/h (50 mph)
If the vehicle has a factory-fitted towing in any way. when towing a trailer (or at more than
bracket or one that is retrofitted by SEAT, the ● In order to reduce the danger of injury in 100 km/h (60 mph) in exceptional circum-
Start-Stop system operates as normal. No the event of rear-end collisions and to avoid stances). This also applies in countries where
special characteristics need to be taken into injury to pedestrians and cyclists when park- driving at higher speeds is permitted. Take
ing the vehicle, cover or remove the tow hitch into account the speed limit for vehicles with
account.
when you are not using a trailer. trailers in the corresponding country, as it
If the system does not recognise the trailer or could be less than the speed limit for vehi-
● Never fit a towing bracket “with weight dis-
the trailer bracket has not been retrofitted by cles without a trailer.
tribution” or “load compensation”. The vehi-
SEAT, the Start-Stop system must be discon- cle has not been designed for this type of ● Never attempt to “straighten” the towing
nected by pressing the corresponding button towing bracket. The towing bracket could fail vehicle and trailer while accelerating.
in the lower part of the centre console before and the trailer could be released from the ve-
driving with the trailer, and it should remain hicle. WARNING
off for the rest of the journey ››› .
If the towing bracket has been retrofitted by a
WARNING non-SEAT workshop, the Start-Stop system
Vehicles with driving profile selection
Driving with a trailer and transporting heavy must be disconnected manually whenever
If you are going to be towing a trailer, the use or large objects can affect driving properties driving with a trailer. Otherwise the brake
of the Eco driving profile is not recommen- and even cause an accident. system could be damaged and could conse-
ded. You are advised to select another of the quently cause a serious accident or injury.
● Always secure the load properly using belts
available driving profiles before beginning to ● Always disconnect the Start-Stop system
or straps that are suitable and in good condi-
drive with a trailer. tion. manually when using a towing bracket that
has not been fitted by a SEAT workshop.
● Adapt your speed and driving style at all
WARNING
times to suit visibility, weather, road and traf-
Never use the trailer to transport people, fic conditions. Note
since it would put their life in danger and is ● Trailers with a high centre of gravity are ● Before hitching or unhitching a trailer, al-
also prohibited.
more likely to overturn than those with a low ways deactivate the anti-theft alarm
one. ››› page 122. Otherwise, the tilt sensor could
WARNING ● Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres. cause the alarm to go off.
Undue use of the towing bracket may cause ● Take great care when overtaking. ● Do not drive with a trailer for the engine's
injury and accidents. first 1000 km ››› page 195.
● Reduce speed immediately if you notice
● Only use the towing bracket if it is in a per- that the trailer is swaying, however slightly. ● SEAT recommends that, if possible, the tow
fect state of repair and is properly secured. hitch be disassembled or covered when it is
268
Towing bracket device*
not going to be used. In the event of a rear- CAUTION Engine cooling system
Technical data
end collision, the damage to the vehicle Driving with a trailer increases the load on
Failure to heed the control lamps and corre-
could be greater if the bracket is fitted. the engine and cooling system. The cooling
sponding text messages when they light up
● Some retrofitted towing brackets cover the may result in damage to the vehicle. system should have sufficient coolant and be
rear towing eye. In these cases, the towing prepared for the additional effort involved in
eye should not be used for tow-starting or for driving with a trailer.
towing other vehicles. For this reason, if the
vehicle has been retrofitted with a towing Technical requirements
Trailer brakes
bracket, always keep the tow hitch in the ve-
Advice
hicle when you disassemble it. Vehicles that are factory-equipped with a If the trailer has its own brake system, please
towing bracket fulfil all the technical and le- take the relevant legal requirements into ac-
gal requirements for driving with a trailer. count. Never connect the trailer's brake sys-
tem to the vehicle's brake system.
Control lamp If the vehicle is retrofitted with a towing
bracket, only a bracket that is authorised for
the maximum authorised load of the trailer Tow rope
Operation
The tow hitch is not securely locked in
position. that is to be towed may be fitted. The towing Always use a cable between the vehicle and
bracket must be suitable for the vehicle and the trailer ››› page 272.
Check that the towing bracket is locked ››› page 270. the trailer and must be properly secured to
the vehicle's chassis. Only use a towing Trailer rear lights
Some warning and control lamps will light up bracket that has been authorised by SEAT for
briefly when the ignition is switched on to The trailer's rear lights should comply with
this vehicle. Always check and take into ac-
Emergencies
check certain functions. They will switch off the statutory safety regulations ››› page 272.
count the towing bracket manufacturer's in-
after a few seconds. structions. Never fit a towing bracket “with Never connect the trailer's rear lights directly
weight distribution” or “load compensation”. to the vehicle's electric system. If you are not
WARNING sure that the trailer's electrical connection is
If the warning lamps and the corresponding Towing bracket fitted on the bumper correct, have it checked by a specialised
messages are ignored when they light up, the workshop. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT
Never fit a towing bracket to the bumper or to
vehicle may stall in traffic and cause acci- dealership for this.
the area where the bumper is mounted. The
Safety
dents and severe injuries.
towing bracket should not impair the bum-
● Never ignore the warning lamps or messag- Exterior mirrors
per's function. Do not make modifications or
es. repairs to the exhaust system or the brake If you cannot see the area behind the trailer
● Stop the vehicle at the next opportunity system. Make regular checks to ensure that with the exterior mirrors of the towing vehi-
and in a safe place. the towing bracket is secure. cle, additional mirrors will have to be instal-
led in accordance with the regulations of the »
269
Operation
country in question. The exterior mirrors CAUTION There should be no person, animal or object
should be adjusted before you start driving in the path of the tow hitch ››› .
● If the rear lights of the trailer are not cor-
and must provide a sufficient field of vision
rectly connected, the vehicle's electronic sys-
at the rear. Unlock the tow hitch and remove it
tem may be damaged.
● If the trailer absorbs excessive electric cur- ● Stop the vehicle and connect the electronic
Trailer maximum electricity consumption parking brake ››› page 181.
rent, the vehicle's electronic system may be
Consumers Europe, Asia, Australia damaged. ● Switch off the engine.
Africa, South ● Never connect the trailer's electric system ● Open the rear lid.
America and directly to the electrical connections of the
● Pull the ››› Fig. 230 button briefly. The tow
Central America tail lights or any other power sources. Only
use the connections intended for providing hitch unlocks electrically and automatically
Brake lights (total) 84 Watts 108 Watts electric current to the trailer. turns outwards. The control lamp in the but-
ton will flash ››› Fig. 230.
Turn signal (on each 42 Watts 54 Watts
side) ● Remove the tow hitch with your hand until
Electrical unlocking tow hitch you feel and see that it has engaged and the
Side lights (on each 50 Watts 100 Watts control lamp on the button stays on.
side)
● Close the tailgate.
Reverse lights (in 42 Watts 54 Watts
total)
Cover the tow hitch
Rear fog light 42 Watts 54 Watts ● Stop the vehicle and apply the electronic
Never exceed the values indicated! parking brake.
● Switch off the engine.
WARNING ● Unhook the trailer and interrupt the electri-
If the towing bracket is wrongly fitted or is cal connection between it and the vehicle. If
not the right one, the trailer could become you are using an adapter, remove it from the
detached from the vehicle and cause serious Fig. 230 On the right side of the luggage trailer's power socket.
injury. compartment: button for unlocking the tow ● Open the rear lid.
hitch.
● Pull the ››› Fig. 230 button briefly. The tow
hitch unlocks electrically.
The tow hitch is located in the bumper. The
electrical unlocking tow hitch cannot be dis-
assembled.
270
Towing bracket device*
● Turn the tow hitch under the bumper with ● If the tow hitch is not attached properly, do can be mounted are allowed. Heavier bicy-
Technical data
your hand until you feel and see that it en- not use it. Instead, go to a specialised work- cles must be mounted as close to the vehicle
gages and the control lamp on the ››› Fig. 230 shop and have the towing bracket checked. as possible (tow hitch).
button stays on. ● If you detect any fault in the electrical sys-
● Close the tailgate. tem or in the towing bracket, contact a speci- WARNING
alised workshop and ask them to check it. The incorrect use of the tow hitch with a bicy-
Meaning of control lamp ● If the ball has a diameter of less than 49 cle rack mounted on the tow hitch can cause
mm at any one point, do not use the towing accidents and injury.
● If the warning light of the button ››› Fig. 230
bracket under any circumstances.
Advice
● Never exceed the maximum weight or the
is flashing, this means that the tow hitch has
not been attached properly or is damaged limits indicated above.
››› . CAUTION ● The bicycle rack may not be mounted to the
neck of the hitch below the ball because, due
● If the warning lamp stays on with the rear If you clean the vehicle with high-pressure or
to the shape of the neck and depending on
lid open, the tow hitch is correctly in place steam devices, do not point the jet directly
the rack model, the rack could be incorrectly
both when engaged and when covered. towards the retractable tow hitch or the trail-
mounted on the vehicle.
Operation
er power socket, as this may damage the
● The control lamp of the button will go off ● Always read and take the manufacturer as-
joints or remove the grease necessary for lu-
approx. 1 minute after closing the rear lid. brication. sembly instructions into account.
WARNING
Note CAUTION
Undue use of the towing bracket may cause
If the maximum weight and limits indicated
Emergencies
injury and accidents. At extremely low temperatures, the tow hitch
may be impossible to use. In this case, place above are exceeded, the vehicle may suffer
● Only use the tow hitch if it is properly en- considerable damage.
the vehicle in a warmer location (for example,
gaged.
a garage). ● Never exceed the values indicated!
● Always ensure that no person, animal or
object is to be found in the path of the tow
hitch. Note
● Never use a tool or instrument while the
Fitting a bicycle carrier on the retract- SEAT recommends removing, as far as possi-
able tow hitch
Safety
tow hitch is moving. ble, all removable parts of the bicycles before
● Never press the ››› Fig. 230 button when setting off. These parts include, for example,
The maximum allowed weight of the carrier baskets and saddlebags, child seats or bat-
there is a trailer hooked to the vehicle or
system, including the load, is 75 kg. The car- teries. This improves aerodynamics and the
when a carrier system or other accessories
are mounted on the tow hitch.
rier system should not protrude more than centre of gravity of the rack system.
700 mm backwards from the spherical head.
Only carrier systems on which up to 3 bikes
271
Operation
Hooking up and connecting a trailer Key to the Fig. 231: Tow rope
The tow rope must always be securely fixed
Pin Meaning
to the towing vehicle and loose enough so
12 Unassigned that the vehicle can handle turns smoothly.
However, make sure that the cable does not
13 Earth for pin 9 rub on the ground while driving.
Before hitching or unhitching a trailer, always ● Ensure that any repairs that need to be car- the anti-theft system, have these checked out
Technical data
turn off the anti-theft alarm. Otherwise, the ried out on the electrical system are carried by a specialised workshop.
tilt sensor could cause the alarm to go off. out by a specialised workshop. ● If the trailer accessories consume energy
● Never connect the trailer's electric system through the power socket to the trailer and
Trailers with LED rear lights directly to the electrical connections of the the engine is turned off, the battery will dis-
For technical reasons, trailers fitted with LED tail lights or any other power sources. charge.
rear lights cannot be connected to the anti- ● If the vehicle battery is running low, the
theft alarm system. WARNING electrical connection with the trailer will be
automatically cut.
Advice
When the vehicle is locked, the alarm does Contact between the pins of the trailer power
not go off when the electrical connection with socket can cause short circuits, overloading
the trailer is cut if it has rear lights with light- of the electrical system or failure of the light-
emitting diodes. ing system, and consequently can cause acci- Loading a trailer
dents and serious injuries.
If the Eco driving profile was selected when Technically permissible maximum trailer
● Never connect the pins of the trailer power
Operation
hitching the trailer, this will automatically weight and vertical load on the coupling de-
socket to each other.
switch to the Normal profile. If the system vice
● Make sure any work on bent pins is carried
cannot detect the attached trailer or if the
out by a specialised workshop. The technically permissible maximum trailer
towing bracket has been retrofitted by an au-
weight is the weight that the vehicle can tow
to repair shop other than SEAT, you must
manually select the Normal profile before you CAUTION
››› . The vertical load on the coupling load
is exerted vertically from above on the tow
Emergencies
start driving with a trailer attached. To recon- Do not leave the trailer connected to the vehi- hitch of the towing bracket ››› page 316.
nect the Eco profile once the trailer has been cle when parked; place it on its support
unhitched, switch the ignition off and back wheel or its supports. If the vehicle rises or The information on the maximum trailer
on once. falls due, for example, to a variation of the weight and vertical load on the coupling de-
load or a burst tyre, increased pressure will vice contained in the type plate of the towing
WARNING be placed on the towing bracket and the trail- bracket are experimental values only. The
er, and both the vehicle and the trailer can be correct figures for your specific model, which
If the cables are improperly or incorrectly
damaged. may be lower than these figures, are given in
connected, it may lead to an excessive
Safety
amount of current supplied to the trailer, the vehicle documentation. The information
which can cause abnormalities in the entire Note in the vehicle documentation takes prece-
vehicle electronic system, as well as acci-
● In case of malfunctioning of the electrical
dence at all times. »
dents and serious injuries.
systems of the vehicle or trailer, as well as of
273
Operation
To promote safety while driving, SEAT recom- ● Secure the trailer load properly. ● Always secure the load properly using belts
mends making the most of the maximum ver- or straps that are suitable and in good condi-
tical load technically permissible on the cou- Tyre pressure tion.
pling device ››› page 267. An insufficient ver-
Set the tyre pressure of the trailer tyres in ac-
tical load has a negative influence on the be-
cordance with the trailer manufacturer's rec-
haviour of both the vehicle and trailer.
ommendations. Driving with a trailer
The vertical load increases the weight on the
When towing a trailer, inflate the tyres of the
rear axle, reducing the vehicle's carrying ca- Adjusting the headlights
towing vehicle with the maximum allowable
pacity.
pressure ››› page 305. When towing a trailer, the front part of the ve-
hicle could lift up, and if the dipped beams
Gross combination weight of the towing ve- WARNING are on, this could dazzle other drivers. Use
hicle and trailer the headlight range control to lower the cone
If the maximum permissible axle weight, the
The gross combination weight is the actual of light. If you do not have headlight range
maximum load technically permissible on the
weight of the loaded vehicle plus the actual coupling point, the maximum authorised ve- control, have the headlights adjusted by a
weight of the loaded trailer. hicle weight or the gross combination weight specialised workshop.
of the towing vehicle and trailer are excee-
In some countries trailers are classified into
ded, accidents and serious injuries may oc- Special characteristics of driving with a trail-
distinct categories. SEAT recommends ob-
cur. er
taining information from a specialised work-
● Never exceed the values indicated! ● If your trailer has an overrun brake, brake
shop regarding which type of trailer is most
suitable for your vehicle. ● The actual weight on the front and rear gently at first and then rapidly. This will pre-
axles must never exceed the maximum per- vent the jerking that can be caused by the
Trailer loading missible axle weight. The weight on the front locking of trailer wheels.
and rear axles must never exceed the maxi- ● Due to the gross combination weight of the
The weight of the towing vehicle and trailer mum permissible weight.
must be balanced. In order to do this, the towing vehicle and trailer, the braking dis-
load must be as close as possible to the max- tance increases.
WARNING ● When going down a slope, go into lower
imum vertical load technically permissible on
the coupling point, and it must be evenly dis- A shift in weight could jeopardize the stabili- gear (if using a manual gearbox or the Tip-
tributed between the back and front of the ty and security of the towing vehicle and tronic automatic gearbox) to take advantage
trailer: trailer, which could lead to accidents and se- of the braking power provided by the engine.
rious injuries. Otherwise, the braking system could over-
● Distribute loads in the trailer so that heavy ● Always load the trailer correctly. heat and even fail.
objects are as near to the axle as possible or
above it.
274
Towing bracket device*
● The trailer weight, as well as the gross com- ● Do not release the button until the en- Stabilisation of the towing vehicle
Technical data
bination weight of the towing vehicle and gine has sufficient force to start driving. and trailer
trailer, change the centre of gravity and the
properties of the vehicle. WARNING The stabilisation of the towing vehicle and
● If the towing vehicle is empty and the trail- If a trailer is pulled incorrectly, this may lead trailer together is an additional function of
er is loaded, then the load distribution is in- to loss of control of the vehicle and serious the electronic stability control (ESC).
correct. Under these conditions, drive slowly injury.
If the system detects that the trailer is sway-
and with extra caution. ● Driving with a trailer and transporting ing, it intervenes automatically with the driv-
heavy or large objects will change the vehicle
Advice
er steering recommendation to reduce the
Hill starts with a trailer handling and braking distances. swaying of the trailer.
Depending on the slope of the hill and the ● Always drive cautiously and carefully.
combination weight of the towing vehicle Brake earlier than usual. Requirements for the stabilisation of the
and trailer, the vehicle might start rolling ● Adapt your speed and driving style at all towing vehicle and trailer
backwards slightly when you first start up. times to suit visibility, weather, road and traf- ● The vehicle is factory-equipped with a tow-
Operation
fic conditions. Slow down, especially when
For hill-starting with a trailer, do the follow- ing bracket or has been retro-fitted with a
driving down hills or slopes.
ing: compatible towing bracket.
● Accelerate with particular care and caution.
Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres. ● The ESC and ASR are active. The control
● Press and hold the brake pedal.
lamp or is not lit up on the instrument
● Take great care when overtaking. Reduce
● Press the button to disconnect the elec- panel.
speed immediately if you notice that the trail-
tronic parking brake ››› page 181.
Emergencies
er is swaying, however slightly. ● The trailer is electrically connected to the
● If the vehicle is equipped with a manual towing vehicle through the trailer power
● Never attempt to “straighten” the towing
gearbox, push the clutch pedal all the way vehicle and trailer while accelerating. socket.
down. ● The vehicle is travelling at over 60 km/h
● Take into account the speed limit for vehi-
● Put the vehicle into first gear or turn the se- cles with a trailer, as it could be lower than (approx. 37 mph).
lector lever to position D/S ››› page 187. for vehicles without a trailer. ● The maximum vertical load technically per-
● Pull out the button and hold it in that missible is being utilised on the coupling de-
Safety
position to stop the towing vehicle and trailer vice.
with the electronic parking brake. ● The trailer has a rigid draw bar.
● Release the brake pedal.
● If the trailer has brakes, it must be equip-
● Start driving slowly. To do this, in the case ped with a mechanical overrun brake. »
of a manual gearbox, slowly release the
clutch pedal.
275
Operation
WARNING matic braking may occur in extreme driving SEAT recommends that towing brackets be
conditions. retrofitted at a specialised workshop. For ex-
The enhanced security provided by the elec- ample, it may very well be necessary to ad-
tric stability control of the towing vehicle and
just the cooling system or mount thermal pro-
trailer should not lead you to take any risks
tection plates. SEAT recommends visiting a
that could compromise your safety. Retrofitting a towing bracket SEAT dealership for this.
● Adapt your speed and driving style at all
times to suit visibility, weather, road and traf- If a towing bracket is retrofitted, the distance
fic conditions. specifications should always be kept in
● Accelerate with caution when the road is mind. The distance between the centre of the
slippery. spherical head and the road ››› Fig. 232 D
● When adjusting any settings, stop acceler- must never be less than that indicated. This
ating. also applies when the vehicle is fully loaded,
including the technically permissible maxi-
mum vertical load on the coupling device.
WARNING
The electric stability control for the towing Distance specifications ››› Fig. 232:
vehicle and trailer may not correctly detect all A Attachment points
driving conditions. B 932.5 mm
● When the ESC is switched off, the stabilisa-
C 65 mm min.
tion of the towing vehicle and trailer is also
switched off. D 350-420 mm
● The stability system does not always detect E 220 mm
light and unstable trailers, so it may not sta- F 615.5 mm
bilise these correctly.
G 1,043 mm
● When driving on slippery surfaces with
poor grip, the trailer can even interfere with
WARNING
the stability system.
● Trailers with a high centre of gravity can tip If the cables are improperly or incorrectly
even without having previously swayed. connected, this may lead to malfunctions in
the entire vehicle electronic system, as well
● If a trailer is not attached, but the trailer
as to accidents and serious injuries.
power socket is connected (e.g. installation Fig. 232 Limits and attachment points for ret-
of a bicycle rack with lights), repeated auto- ● Never connect the trailer's electric system
rofitting a towing bracket.
to the electrical connections of the tail lights
276
Towing bracket device*
Technical data
use suitable connectors to connect the trail-
er.
● The towing bracket should be retrofitted
only at a specialised workshop.
WARNING
If the towing bracket is badly fitted or unsuit-
Advice
able, the trailer may separate from the vehi-
cle while driving. This could cause serious ac-
cidents and fatal injuries.
Note
Operation
Only use towing brackets that have been ap-
proved by SEAT for the model in question.
Emergencies
Safety
277
Advice
Your vehicle is designed to offer a high Accessories, for example telephone holders
standard of active and passive safety. For this or cup holders, should never be fitted on the
reason, we recommend that you ask a SEAT covers, or within the working range of the air- Radio transmitters and office equip-
Official Service for advice before fitting ac- bags. Otherwise, there is a danger of injury if ment
cessories or replacement parts. Your SEAT Of- the airbag is triggered in an accident.
ficial Service has the latest information from Radio transmitters (fixed installation)
the manufacturer and can recommend acces- Any retrofit installations of radio transmitters
sories and replacement parts which are suita- Modifications in the vehicle require prior approval. SEAT
ble for your requirements. They can also an- generally authorises in-vehicle installations
swer any questions you might have regarding Modifications must always be carried out ac- of approved types of radio transmitters provi-
official regulations. cording to our specifications. ded that:
We recommend you to use only SEAT acces- Unauthorised modifications to the electronic ● The aerial is installed correctly.
sories and Genuine SEAT parts®. SEAT has components, software, wiring or data transfer
tested these parts and accessories for suita- ● The aerial is installed on the exterior of the
in the vehicle may cause malfunctioning. Due
bility, reliability and safety. SEAT Official to the way the electronic components are vehicle (and shielded cables are used togeth-
Services have the necessary experience and linked together in networks, other indirect er with non-reflective aerial trimming).
facilities to ensure that the parts are installed systems may be affected by the faults. This ● The effective transmitting power does not
correctly and professionally. can seriously impair safety, lead to excessive exceed 10 Watts at the aerial base.
278
Care and maintenance
Technical data
shop will be able to inform you about options
for installing and operating radio transmitters Mobile telephones or radio equipment which ● Cleaning products and other materials used
is operated inside the vehicle without a prop- for car care can be damaging to your health if
with a higher transmitting power.
erly installed external aerial can create exces- misused.
sive magnetic fields that could cause a health ● Always keep care products in a safe place,
Mobile radio transmitters hazard. out of the reach of children. Failure to comply
Commercial mobile telephones or radio could result in poisoning.
equipment might interfere with the electron- Note
ics of your vehicle and cause malfunctions.
Advice
● The posterior fitting of electric and elec- For the sake of the environment
This may be due to:
tronic equipment in this vehicle affects its li- ● If possible, use environmentally friendly
● No external aerial. cence and could lead to the withdrawal of the products.
vehicle registration document under certain
● External aerial incorrectly installed. ● The remains of car care products should not
circumstances.
● Transmitting power more than 10 W. be disposed of with ordinary household
● Please use the mobile telephone/radio op-
Operation
waste.
erating instructions.
You must, therefore, do not operate portable
mobile telephones or radio equipment inside
the vehicle without a properly installed exter-
nal aerial ››› . Vehicle exterior care
Care and cleaning
Please note also that the maximum range of Washing the vehicle
Emergencies
the equipment can only be achieved with an General information
external aerial. The longer substances such as insects, bird
Regular and careful care helps to maintain droppings, resinous tree sap, road dirt, in-
Business equipment the value of the vehicle. This may also be one dustrial deposits, tar, soot or road salt and
of the requirements for upholding any war- other aggressive materials remain on the ve-
Retrofit installation of business or private
ranty claims in the event of corrosion or paint hicle, the more damage they do to the paint-
equipment in the vehicle is permitted, provi-
defects. work. High temperatures (for instance due to
ded the equipment cannot interfere with the
Safety
driver's immediate control of the vehicle and SEAT Official Services and specialist retailers strong sunlight) further intensify the corro-
that any such equipment carries the mark. carry stocks of suitable car care materials. sive effect.
Any retrofit equipment that could influence Please follow the instructions for use on the After the period when salt is put on the roads
the driver's control of the vehicle must have a packaging. it is important to have the underside of the
type approval for your vehicle and must carry vehicle washed thoroughly. »
the e mark.
279
Advice
Automatic car washes ● Do not use scrapers to remove ice or snow ● When washing the car during the winter
Before going through a car wash, be sure to from the sheets. season: water and ice in the brake system
take the usual precautions such as closing ● Do not polish the adhesive sheets. can reduce braking effectiveness: risk of acci-
the windows and roof. If the vehicle has spe- dent!
● Do not use dirty cloths or sponges.
cial accessories such as spoilers or a roof
● It is preferable to wash them with a soft
rack or two-way radio aerial, etc., it is advisa- CAUTION
sponge and gentle neutral soap.
ble to consult the car wash tunnel operator. ● Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight –
It is best to use a car wash without revolving Washing the car by hand otherwise the paint can be damaged.
bristles if possible. ● Do not use sponges, abrasive household
When washing the car by hand, use plenty of
sponges or similar to clean insect remains.
water to soften the dirt first, and rinse off as
Washing the vehicle with a high pressure This could damage the surface.
well as possible.
cleaner ● Clean off stubborn dirt (insects, etc.) from
Then clean the vehicle with a soft sponge, the headlights at regular intervals, for in-
When washing the vehicle with a high-pres-
glove or brush using only slight pressure. stance when filling the fuel tank. The head-
sure cleaner, always follow the operating in-
You should start on the roof and work down. lights should only be washed with water, do
structions for the equipment. This applies
Special car soap should only be used for very not wipe them with a dry cloth or sponge. It
particularly to the operating pressure and the is best to use soapy water.
persistent dirt.
spraying distance. Do not hold the nozzle too
● Never wash tyres with a jet that sprays the
close to soft materials such as rubber hoses Rinse the sponge or glove thoroughly and of-
water out in a direct stream. This could dam-
or seals. The same applies for the parking aid ten.
age the tyres even if the spray is kept at a
sensors*, which are located in the rear distance and only used for a very short time.
Wheels, sills and similar should be cleaned
and/or front bumper.
last. Use a second sponge for this. ● Before washing the vehicle in an automatic
Do not use a nozzle that sprays the water out car wash, please make sure to retract the ex-
in a direct stream or one that has a rotating WARNING terior mirrors to prevent them from being
jet for forcing off dirt. ● The vehicle should only be washed with the damaged. Electrically retractable exterior
mirrors must not be folded in or out by hand,
ignition switched off. Failure to follow this in-
Factory-fitted adhesive sheets always use the electrical power control.
struction could result in an accident.
The following indications should be taken in- ● Do not clean the underside of chassis, the
to account to avoid damaging adhesive inside of wheel arches or wheel trims without CAUTION
sheets: protecting your hands and arms. You may cut ● Before washing the vehicle in an automatic
yourself on sharp-edged metal parts. Other- car wash, please proceed as follows to lock
● Do not use high pressure cleaners. wise, there is a risk of sustaining cuts. the wiper arms so that they are not moved to-
wards the top of the windscreen:
280
Care and maintenance
– the bonnet must be closed. – Stay a suitable distance from the sensors If the polish does not contain wax, a wax
Technical data
on the front and rear bumpers. product should be applied after polishing.
– switch the ignition on and off.
– press the windscreen wiper lever forward – Do not clean the camera lenses or sur-
rounding area with the pressure washer. CAUTION
briefly (windscreen washer function).
This will lock the wiper arms. ● Never use warm or hot water to remove ● Do not use polishes and hard wax on pain-
snow and ice from the reverse camera lens, ted parts with a matt finish or on plastic
as it could crack the lens. parts.
For the sake of the environment
● Never use abrasive cleaning agents on the ● Do not apply paint polishes to the side trim
The car should only be washed in special that runs around the panoramic roof and ends
Advice
lens.
wash bays. These areas are prepared to pre- on the windscreen. However, it can be treated
vent oily water from getting into the public with hard wax.
drains. In some places, washing vehicles out-
side the areas intended for this purpose is Waxing and polishing
prohibited.
Care Trims
Operation
Waxing protects the paintwork. It is time to In respect for the environment, the silver-
Camera sensors and lenses apply a coat of good wax when water no lon- plated trims on the body are made of pure
ger forms droplets and rolls off the clean aluminium (they do not contain chrome).
● Use a small brush to remove snow and a paintwork.
de-icer spray to remove ice. Dirt or marks on the trim mouldings should
Even if a wax solution is used regularly in the be removed with a cleaning product with a
Emergencies
● Clean the sensors with a solvent-free prod- vehicle washing tunnel, it is advisable to pro- neutral PH (do not use a chrome cleaner).
uct and a soft, dry cloth. tect the paint with a hard wax coating at least Body polish is also unsuitable for use on trim
● Moisten the camera lens using a standard twice a year. mouldings. The intensive cleaning fluids of-
alcohol-based glass cleaning agent and In the summer, you will find it is much easier ten used before the car goes into a car wash
clean the lens with a dry cloth. In the active to remove dead insects (which accumulate may contain alkaline substances, which can
lane assist*, the area in front of the lens is on the bumper and the front of the bonnet) if cause dull or milky patches when they dry
normally cleaned with the windscreen wash- the car has been treated with care products out.
er.
Safety
recently. SEAT Official Services carry stocks of cleaning
CAUTION products which have been tested for use on
Polishing your vehicle and are not harmful to the envi-
● When you clean the vehicle with a pressure ronment.
Polishing is only necessary if the paint has
washer:
lost its shine, and the gloss cannot be
brought back by putting on wax.
281
Advice
WARNING The Easy Connect control panel* should first Normal cleaning
Technical data
be cleaned with a brush so that no dirt goes We recommend that you use a soft sponge or
Please note when cleaning the wheels that into the device or between the keys and
water, ice and road salt can impair the effec- a commercially available lint-free, micro-fibre
housing. Next, we recommend cleaning the cloth for normal cleaning. Only use brushes
tiveness of the brakes; this can cause an acci-
Easy Connect control panel* using a cloth on floor coverings and mats, as other textile
dent.
dampened with water and washing-up liquid. surfaces could become damaged.
CAUTION In the case of normal surface dirt you can use
Exhaust tail pipe a foam cleaner. Use a sponge to spread the
● To avoid scratching the screen, do not wipe
Advice
foam on the textile surface and to work it into
the display with a dry cloth.
It is important to remove road salt and brake the material lightly. However, make sure that
dust by washing the wheels at regular inter- ● To avoid damage, ensure that no liquid
the textile material does not become soaking
vals, otherwise the exhaust tail pipe material goes into the Easy Connect control panel*.
wet. Then dab off the foam with a dry and ab-
could be damaged. To remove impurities, do sorbent cloth (e.g. a micro-fibre cloth) and
not use rim, paint or chrome cleaners or oth- vacuum off any residue once the surface is
Operation
er abrasive products. Clean the exhaust tail Plastic and leatherette parts completely dry.
pipes with cleaning products that are suita-
ble for stainless steel. Plastic parts and leatherette can be cleaned Cleaning stains
with a damp cloth. If this is not sufficient,
SEAT Official Services carry stocks of cleaning Treat drink stains (such as coffee or fruit
plastic parts and leatherette should only be
products that have been tested and ap- juice, etc.) with a cleaning solution for deli-
treated with a special solvent-free plastic
proved for use on your vehicle. cate fabrics. This solution should be applied
Emergencies
cleaner.
with a sponge. If the stains are difficult to re-
move, a washing paste can be applied direct-
ly onto the stain and worked into the fabric.
Caring for the vehicle interior Textile covers and trim parts The surface will then have to be wiped with
clear water to remove any residue left by the
Radio display/Easy Connect* and con- Textile covers and trim parts (e.g. seats, door
paste. To do so, use a damp cloth or sponge
trol panel* trim) should be cleaned regularly with a vac-
and then dab the stain with an absorbent
uum cleaner. This will remove surface dirt
Safety
cloth.
The display can be cleaned with a soft cloth which could otherwise be rubbed into the
and a professionally available “LCD cleaner”. textile material during use. Do not use steam Remove chocolate or make-up stains with a
Moisten the cloth with a small amount of the cleaners, as the steam could carry the dirt cleaning paste (for e.g., soft soap). Then re-
cleaning fluid. deeper into the textile material. move the soap with water (wet sponge). »
283
Advice
A spirit-based cleaner can be used to remove ing remain visible; these are the characteris- To maintain the value of natural leather you
grease, oil, lipstick or ball point pen. Then tic features of genuine natural leather. should note the following points:
dab the dissolved grease or colour particles
Natural napped leather does not have a pro-
off with an absorbent cloth or similar. You CAUTION
tective surface coating of dye. It is therefore
may also have to treat the stain once more ● Avoid exposing leather to direct sunlight
somewhat more prone to damage. This
using washing paste and water. for long periods, otherwise it may tend to
should be borne in mind if children or pets
If the covers or textile trim panels are badly often travel in the car, or if there are other lose some of its colour. If the car is left for a
soiled we recommend that you have them factors that could lead to damage. prolonged period in the bright sun, it is best
to cover the leather.
cleaned by a professional cleaning company
Types of leather with a coloured surface coat- ● Sharp-edged objects on clothing, such as
with a shampoo and spray.
ing are likely to be more resistant to damage. belts, zip fasteners, rivets or similar, can also
This has a great advantage for day-to-day leave permanent scratches and rough marks
Note
use. However, this means that the typical on the surface of the leather.
Open Velcro fasteners on clothes can damage natural characteristics of the surface are less
the seat upholstery. Make sure they are apparent, though this does not affect quality.
closed. Note
284
Care and maintenance
Cleaning and care of leather uphols- – Treat fat-based, dried-in stains with grease- CAUTION
Technical data
tery dissolving spray.
On no account use solvents (such as petrol,
– Treat less common stains on leather, such turpentine), wax polish, shoe cream or simi-
Natural leather requires an extra degree of at- as ball-pen and other inks, felt-tip pens, lar materials.
tention and care. nail polish, dispersion paint, shoe cream
etc. with a special leather stain remover.
Normal cleaning
Cleaning Alcantara upholstery
– Moisten a cotton or woollen cloth with wa- Leather maintenance
Advice
ter and wipe over the leather surfaces. – The leather should be treated regularly Removing dust and dirt
(about twice a year) with a special leather- – Moisten a cloth just a little and wipe down
More stubborn dirt care product. the seat covers.
– More stubborn dirt can be removed using a
– Apply these products very sparingly.
mild soap solution (pure liquid soap: two Removing stains
tablespoons dissolved in one litre of wa- – Then wipe off with a soft cloth.
Operation
– Moisten a cloth with lukewarm water or di-
ter).
Should you have questions regarding the luted white spirits.
– Do not let the water soak through the leath- care and cleaning of the leather upholstery in
– Dab at the stain. Start at the outside and
er or penetrate into the seams. your vehicle, we recommend that you contact
work inwards.
– Then wipe off with a soft, dry cloth. your SEAT Official Service. Our representa-
tives will be happy to advise you and tell you – Dry the clean area with a soft cloth.
Emergencies
about the product range for leather conserva-
Removal of stains Do not use leather cleaning products on Al-
tion, for example:
– Remove fresh water-based stains such as cantara seat covers.
coffee, tea, juices, blood etc. with an ab- ● Cleaning and care set.
You may use a suitable soap on dust and dirt.
sorbent cloth or kitchen roll, or use the ● Coloured leather-care cream.
cleaning agent from the care set for dried- Dust and grit in the pores and seams can
● Stain remover for ball-pen inks, shoe cream scratch and damage the surface. If the car is
on stains.
etc. left standing in the sun for long periods, Al-
– Remove fresh grease-based stains that
Safety
● Grease dissolving spray. cantara leather should be protected against
have not penetrated the surface such as direct sunlight to prevent it from fading. How-
● New products and further developments
butter, mayonnaise, chocolate, etc. with an ever, slight colour variations will arise in nor-
absorbent cloth or kitchen roll or with the mal use. »
cleaning agent from the care set.
285
Advice
Drive slowly to a specialised workshop and The four-wheel drive is specially designed to rough tracks and uneven terrain as much as
Technical data
have the fault repaired. complement the superior engine power. This possible.
combination gives the vehicle exceptional
(in yellow) Steering lock:
handling and performance capabilities, both WARNING
fault! Go to an Official Service
on normal roads and in more difficult condi- ● Even with four-wheel drive, you should al-
The electronic steering lock is malfunction- tions, such as snow and ice. Even so (or per- ways adjust your speed to suit the condi-
ing. haps especially for this reason), it is impor- tions. Do not let the extra safety features
tant to observe certain safety points ››› . tempt you into taking any risks when driving.
Go to a specialised workshop as soon as
possible and have the fault repaired. Risk of accident!
Advice
Winter tyres ● The braking capability of your vehicle is
WARNING Thanks to four-wheel drive, your vehicle will limited by the tyres' grip. It is therefore no
have plenty of traction in winter conditions, different from a car without four-wheel drive.
Take it immediately to a specialised work- So do not be tempted to drive too fast on firm
shop and have the fault repaired: risk of acci- even with the standard tyres. Nevertheless,
or slippery roads just because the vehicle
dent! we still recommend that winter tyres or all-
still has good acceleration in these condi-
Operation
season tyres be fitted on all four wheels to
tions. Risk of accident!
give even better braking response.
Note ● On wet roads bear in mind that the front
If the lamp (in red) or else (in yellow) wheels may start to “aquaplane” and lose
Snow chains
lights up briefly, you may continue driving. contact with the road if the car is driven too
On roads where snow chains are mandatory, fast. If this should happen, there will be no
this also applies to cars with four-wheel drive sudden increase in engine speed to warn the
Emergencies
››› page 64. driver, as occurs with a front-wheel drive car.
Four-wheel drive For this reason you should always choose a
Changing tyres driving speed suitable for the road condi-
3 Valid for vehicles: with four-wheel drive
tions. Risk of accident!
On four-wheel drive models, the engine pow- On vehicles with four-wheel drive, all four
er is distributed to all four wheels tyres must have the same rolling circumfer-
ence. Also avoid using tyres with varying
tread depths ››› page 306.
General notes
Safety
On four-wheel drive vehicles, the engine Off-roader?
power is distributed to all four wheels. The
distribution of power is controlled automati- Your SEAT is not an off-road vehicle: it does
cally according to your driving style and the not have enough ground clearance to be
road conditions. Also see ››› page 184. used as such. It is therefore best to avoid
287
Advice
Power Management rent and battery temperature. This enables ● When there is a risk that the vehicle will
the system to calculate the current power lev- not start, the alternator power failure or low
el and charge condition of the battery. battery charge level warning lamp will be
This system helps to ensure reliable
shown ››› page 116.
starting Residual current management
The power management controls the distribu- The residual current management reduces
tion of electrical energy and thus helps to en- power consumption while the vehicle is Flat battery
sure that there is always enough power avail- parked. It controls the supply of power to the
able to start the engine. various electrical devices while the ignition is Starting ability has first priority.
switched off. The system takes the battery di- Short trips, city traffic and low temperatures
If a vehicle with a conventional electrical sys-
agnosis data into consideration. all place a heavy load on the battery. In these
tem is left parked for a long time, the battery
will gradually lose its charge because certain Depending on the power level of the battery, conditions a large amount of power is con-
electrical devices, such as the electronic switch off the individual electrical devices sumed, but only a small amount is supplied.
gearbox lock continues to draw current even one after the other to prevent the battery The situation is also critical if electrical devi-
when the ignition is off. In some cases there from losing too much charge and to ensure ces are in use when the engine is not run-
may not be enough power available to start that the engine can be started reliably. ning. In this case power is consumed when
the engine. none is being generated.
Dynamic power management In these situations you will be aware that the
Your vehicle is equipped with an intelligent
power management system to control the While the vehicle is moving, this function dis- power management system is intervening to
distribution of electrical energy. This signifi- tributes the available power to the various control the distribution of electrical power.
cantly improves reliability when starting the electrical devices and systems according to
engine, and also prolongs the useful life of their requirements. The power management When the vehicle is parked for long periods
the battery. ensures that on-board systems do not con- If you do not drive your vehicle for a period of
sume more electrical power than the alterna- several days or weeks, the power manage-
The main functions incorporated in the power tor can supply, and thus maintains the maxi-
management system are battery diagnosis, ment will gradually shut off the electrical de-
mum possible battery power level. vices one by one or reduce the amount of cur-
residual current management and dynamic
power management. rent they are using. This limits the amount of
Note
power consumed and helps to ensure relia-
Battery diagnosis ● Neither is the power management system ble starting even after a long period. Some
able to overcome the given physical limits. convenience functions, such as remote vehi-
The battery diagnosis function constantly Please remember that the power and useful cle opening, may not be available under cer-
registers the condition of the battery. Sen- life of the battery are limited. tain circumstances. These functions will be
sors detect the battery voltage, battery cur-
288
Checking and refilling levels
restored when you switch on the ignition and lower heat output. These systems will be Checking and refilling levels
Technical data
start the engine. available again as soon as sufficient electri-
cal power is available.
With the engine switched off Filling the tank
You may also notice that the engine runs at a
For example, if you listen to the sound sys- slightly faster idling speed when necessary.
tem with the engine switched off the battery
Filling up
This is quite normal, and no cause for con-
will run down. cern. The increased idling speed allows the Read the additional information carefully
alternator to meet the greater power require- ››› page 53
If the energy consumption means there is a
Advice
ment and charge the battery at the same
risk that the engine will not start, a text will
time. If the automatic filler nozzle is operated cor-
appear in vehicles with a driver information
rectly, it will switch itself off as soon as the
system*.
fuel tank is “full”. Do not try to put in more
This driver indicator tells you that you must fuel after the nozzle cuts out, as this will fill
start the engine so that the battery can re- the expansion chamber in the fuel tank.
Operation
charge.
The correct fuel grade for your vehicle is giv-
en on a sticker on the inside of the fuel tank
When the engine is running flap. Further notes on fuel can be found at
Although the alternator generates electrical ››› page 290.
power, the battery can still become dis-
The capacity of your vehicle's fuel tank is giv-
charged while the vehicle is being driven.
en in ››› page 53.
Emergencies
This can occur when a lot of power is being
consumed but only a small amount supplied,
WARNING
especially if the battery is not fully charged
initially. Fuel is highly flammable and can cause seri-
ous burns and other injuries.
To restore the necessary energy balance, the
● When refuelling, turn off the engine, the
system will then temporarily shut off the elec-
auxiliary heater ››› page 172 and turn off the
trical devices that are using a lot of power, or ignition for safety reasons.
Safety
reduce the current they are consuming. Heat-
● Do not smoke when filling the fuel tank or a
ing systems in particular use a large amount
canister. Naked flames are forbidden in the
of electrical power. If you notice, for instance, »
vicinity due to the risk of explosion.
that the seat heating* or the rear window
heater is not working, they may have been
temporarily switched off or regulated to a
289
Advice
1) Depending on country
290
Checking and refilling levels
10 % (E10). The types of petrol are differenti- Petrol additives metal additives. Using them may damage the
Technical data
ated by their octane rating (RON). The quality of the fuel influences the behav- engine!
The following titles appear on the corre- iour, power and service life of the engine. ● Never refuel with fuels containing a large
sponding adhesive on the fuel tank flap: This is why the petrol you use should carry proportion of ethanol (for example, E50, E85).
suitable additives already included by the This could damage the fuel system.
Super unleaded 95 octane or normal 91 oc- petrol industry, free of metals. These addi- ● Just filling one full tank of leaded fuel or
tane unleaded petrol tives will help to prevent corrosion, keep the fuel containing other metal additives would
fuel system clean and prevent deposits from seriously impair the efficiency of the catalytic
We recommend you use super 95 octane pet- converter.
building up in the engine.
Advice
rol. If this is not available: normal 91 octane
● Only use fuel additives that have been ap-
petrol, with a slight decrease in power. If good-quality petrol with metal-free addi-
tives is not available or engine problems proved by SEAT. Octane boosting or anti-
knock additives may contain metal additives
Super unleaded petrol with a minimum of 95 arise, the necessary additives must be added
that could seriously damage the engine or
octanes when refuelling ››› . the catalytic converter. These additives must
You should use super petrol with a minimum Not all petrol additives have been shown to not be used.
Operation
of 95 octanes. be effective. The use of unsuitable petrol ad- ● High engine speed and full throttle can
ditives may cause significant damage to the damage the engine when using petrol with an
If super is not available, in an emergency you
engine and the catalytic converter. Metal ad- octane rating lower than the correct grade for
may refuel with normal 91 octane petrol. In the engine.
ditives should never be used. Metal additives
this case only use moderate engine speeds
may also be contained in petrol additives for
and a light throttle. Refuel with super as soon
improving anti-detonation ratings or octane
Emergencies
as possible. Note
ratings ››› .
● You may use petrol with a high octane num-
Super unleaded 98 octane or super 95 oc- SEAT recommends “genuine Volkswagen ber than the one recommended for your en-
tane unleaded petrol Group Fuel Additives for petrol engines”. gine.
These additives can be bought at SEAT deal- ● In those countries where unleaded petrol is
We recommend you use super plus 98 octane
ers, where information on how to use them not available, you may refuel with a fuel with
petrol. If this is not available: super 95 oc-
can also be obtained. a low lead content.
tane petrol, with a slight decrease in power.
Safety
If super is not available, in an emergency you CAUTION
may refuel with normal 91 octane petrol. In ● Do not refuel if the filler indicates that the Diesel fuel
this case only use moderate engine speeds fuel contains metal. LRP (lead replacement
and a light throttle. Refuel with super as soon petrol) fuels contain high concentrations of Please note the information on the inside of
as possible. the fuel tank flap. »
291
Advice
We recommend the use of diesel fuel which ● Do not mix fuel additives, the so-called will appear on the dash panel display
complies to European standard EN 590. If “thinners”, petrol or similar additives with ››› page 292. If this information is ignored,
diesel fuel which meets European standard diesel fuel. later on it will not be possible to re-start the
EN 590 is not available, the Cetane number ● If poor-quality diesel fuel is used, it may be engine. If this warning does not appear, it is
(CZ) must, at minimum, be 51. If the engine necessary to drain the fuel filter more fre- not necessary to refill the AdBlue ® tank.
is equipped with a particulate filter, the sul- quently than is specified in the Maintenance AdBlue® is a registered brand of the German
phur content of the fuel must be below 50 Programme. We recommend having this done Association of the Automotive Industry (VDA)
parts per million. by a specialised workshop. If water is allowed
and is also known as AUS32 or DEF (Diesel
to collect in the filter, this can cause engine
Exhaust Fluid).
Winter-grade diesel performance problems.
Summer fuel becomes thicker in winter and it CAUTION
is more difficult to start the engine. For this Filling the AdBlue® tank excessively can
reason, petrol stations in some countries al- AdBlue® cause damage to the tank.
so offer winter diesel with improved fluidity
when cold (winter-grade diesel).
Information on AdBlue®
Water in the fuel filter1) Refilling AdBlue®
The consumption of AdBlue® depends on
If your vehicle has a diesel engine and is your personal driving style, the temperature
equipped with a fuel filter with a water sepa- of the system and on the outdoor tempera-
rator, the instrument panel may display the ture when the vehicle is used.
following warning: Water in the AdBlue® freezes at temperatures of -11°C
fuel filter. If this is the case, take the (+13°F). The system has heating elements
vehicle to a specialised workshop so that that guarantee its operation even at low tem-
they can drain the fuel filter. peratures.
The AdBlue® tank level capacity is approxi-
CAUTION
mately 11 litres.
● The vehicle is not designed for the use of
FAME fuel (biodiesel). The fuel system would The AdBlue® tank should never be empty. Fig. 233 AdBlue tank cap.
be damaged if you used biodiesel. When the distance to empty drops below
2400 km, a warning to refill the AdBlue® tank
Operations prior to refilling ● Insert the neck of the bottle in the tank fill- ● Add AdBlue until the nozzle stops for the
Technical data
Park the vehicle on a flat surface. If the vehi- er neck vertically and screw the bottle on by first time.
cle is not parked on a flat surface, but, for ex- hand, by turning it in a clockwise direction. ● Close the SCR tube by turning it clockwise
ample, on a slope or on the side of a curb, ● Press the refill bottle in the direction of the until you hear a click.
the level indicator may not detect the load filler neck and hold it in this position.
properly. ● Wait until the contents of the refill bottle WARNING
Advice
least the minimum amount required (approx. ● Turn the bottle in a counter-clockwise direc- kept in a safe place.
5 litres). Only after adding this amount will tion and gently pull it upwards ››› . ● Never keep AdBlue® in empty food contain-
the system detect that AdBlue® has been ers, bottles or other similar containers. Other
● The AdBlue®tank is full when no more liq- people may confuse it for other products.
added and you will be able to start the en- uid comes out of the bottle.
gine again. The maximum amount that can ● Keep AdBlue® out of the reach of children.
● Screw on the tank cap in a clockwise direc-
be refilled is 11 litres.
Operation
tion until it is tightly closed.
Switch the ignition off. If the ignition is not CAUTION
● Close the fuel tank flap.
switched off during refilling, the warning to ● When refilling, the nozzle grip should be
refill may continue to appear on the instru- aligned downward. Otherwise the nozzle will
Operations before driving
ment panel display. not connect automatically.
● After refilling the tank, only switch on the
● Do not try to add any more additive after
ignition.
Emergencies
Fill with a refill bottle the nozzle has stopped for the first time. The
Only use AdBlue® that complies with ISO ● Leave the ignition on for at least 30 sec- AdBlue tank could overflow and AdBlue could
22241-1. Only use original containers. onds for the system to detect the fluid load. spill out.
● Make sure you wait for at least 30 seconds ● Only use AdBlue® that complies with ISO
● Open the tank cover ››› Fig. 233. 22241-1. Only use original containers.
before starting the engine!
● Unscrew the tank cap by turning it in an an- ● Never mix AdBlue® with water, fuel or addi-
ti-clockwise direction. Refilling the dispenser with AdBlue tives. Any type of damage caused by such a
mixture will not be covered by the warranty.
Safety
● Please observe the manufacturer's instruc- Valid for vehicles with selective catalytic re-
tions, indicated on the refill bottle. ● Never pour AdBlue® into the fuel tank. This
duction.
could result in engine damage.
● Check the expiry date.
● Open the tank cap. ● Do not carry the refill bottle inside the vehi-
● Remove the cap of the refill bottle.
● Turn the SCR tank cap anti-clockwise cle. If there is a leak (due to temperature »
››› Fig. 233.
293
Advice
Note
You can buy refill bottles that are adequate
for AdBlue® use at SEAT dealerships.
294
Checking and refilling levels
Engine compartment
Technical data
Checking levels
Advice
Operation
Fig. 234 Diagram for the location of the various
elements.
Emergencies
From time to time, the levels of the different The checking and refilling of service fluids
fluids in the vehicle must be checked. Never are carried out on the components men-
fill with incorrect fluids, otherwise serious tioned above. These operations are descri- Read the additional information carefully
damage to the engine may be caused. bed in ››› page 295. ››› page 15
1 Coolant expansion tank Always be aware of the danger of injury and
Overview scalding as well as the risk of accident or fire
2 Engine oil dipstick You will find further explanations, instruc- when working in the engine compartment
3 Engine oil filler cap tions and restrictions on the technical speci- (e.g. when checking and refilling fluids). Al-
Safety
4 Brake fluid reservoir fications as of ››› page 314. ways observe the warnings listed below and
follow all general safety precautions. The en-
5 Vehicle battery (underneath the cover)
gine compartment of the vehicle is a poten-
6 Windscreen washer reservoir tially hazardous area ››› . »
295
Advice
WARNING alternator, radiator fan) and the high voltage Opening the bonnet
● Switch the engine off, remove the key from
ignition system are an additional hazard.
● Observe the following additional warnings
Read the additional information carefully
the ignition and apply the hand brake. If the
if work on the fuel system or the electrical ››› page 15
vehicle has a manual gearbox, place the lever
in neutral; if it has an automatic gearbox, system is necessary: The bonnet is released from inside the vehi-
place the selector lever in position P. Wait for – Always disconnect the battery from the cle.
the engine to cool down. on-board network.
Check that the windscreen wiper arms are
● Keep children away from the engine com- – Do not smoke. not unfolded. Otherwise the paint may be
partment.
– Never work near naked flames. damaged.
● Never spill liquids used for vehicle opera-
– Always keep an approved fire extinguish- The bonnet can only be unlocked when the
tion on the engine compartment, as these
er immediately available. driver door is open.
may catch fire (e.g. the antifreeze in coolant).
● Take care not to cause short circuits in the
electrical system, especially when working CAUTION WARNING
on the battery. When topping up fluids make sure the correct Never open the bonnet if you see steam or
● If working inside the engine compartment, fluid is put into the correct filler opening, oth- drips of coolant being released from the en-
remember that, even when the ignition is erwise this can cause serious malfunctions or gine compartment. Failure to comply could
switched off, the radiator fan may start up au- engine damage. result in burns. Wait until no steam or coolant
tomatically, and therefore there is a risk of in- can be seen before opening the bonnet.
jury. For the sake of the environment
● Never cover the engine with additional in-
Inspect the ground underneath your vehicle
sulating materials such as a blanket. Risk of
regularly so that any leaks are detected at an Closing the bonnet
fire!
early stage. If you find spots of oil or other
● Do not unscrew the cap on the coolant ex- fluids in the area where it was parked, have – Slightly lift the bonnet.
pansion tank when the engine is hot. The your vehicle inspected at the workshop. – Release the bonnet stay before pressing it
cooling system is under pressure.
back into its support.
● Protect face, hands and arms by covering
Note – Carefully close the bonnet.
the cap with a large, thick rag to protect
against escaping coolant and steam. In right-hand drive vehicles* some brake flu-
– Press the bonnet down until it locks into
● If it is necessary to work in the engine com- id reservoirs are on the other side of the en-
gine compartment ››› Fig. 234.
place.
partment while the engine is running, the ro-
tating components (for example, poly-V belt, – Make sure that the bonnet catches onto its
clasp. Do not press down too hard ››› .
296
Checking and refilling levels
WARNING We recommend that the oil change indicated ● Only in exceptional circumstances, if the
Technical data
in the Maintenance Programme, be per- engine oil level is too low ››› page 298 and
● For safety reasons the bonnet must always
formed by a technical service or specialised LongLife oil is not available, it is permitted to
be completely closed when the vehicle is
workshop. top up (once) with oil for fixed service inter-
moving. Therefore, after closing the bonnet,
always check that the locking element is
vals ››› page 55 (up to a maximum of 0.5
The correct oil specifications for your engine
litres).
properly engaged. This is the case if the bon- are listed in the ››› page 55, Engine oil
net is flush with the adjacent body panels. specifications.
● Should you notice that the bonnet is not Fixed service intervals*
safely secured when the vehicle is moving, If your vehicle does not have the “LongLife
Advice
Service intervals
stop the vehicle immediately and close the service interval” or it has been disabled (by
bonnet. Failure to follow this instruction Service intervals can be flexible (LongLife
request), you may use oils for fixed service
could result in an accident. service) or fixed (dependent on time/dis-
intervals, which also appear in
tance travelled).
››› page 55, Engine oil specifications. In
If the PR code that appears on the back of the this case, your vehicle must be serviced after
Operation
Maintenance Programme booklet is PR QI6, a fixed interval of 1 year/15,000 km (10,000
Engine oil this means that your vehicle has the LongLife miles)(whatever comes first) ››› Booklet
service programmed. If it lists the codes QI1, Maintenance Programme.
General notes QI2, QI3, QI4 or QI7, the interval service is
dependent on time/distance travelled. ● In exceptional circumstances, if the engine
The engine comes with a special, multi-grade oil level is too low ››› page 298 and you can-
oil that can be used all year round. not obtain the oil specified for your vehicle,
Emergencies
Flexible service intervals (LongLife service
Because the use of high-quality oil is essen- intervals*) you can add a small quantity of oil conform-
tial for the correct operation of the engine ing to the specification ACEA A2 or ACEA A3
Special oils and processes have been devel- (petrol engines) or ACEA B3 or ACEA B4 (die-
and its long useful life, when topping up or oped which, depending on the characteris-
changing oil, use only those oils that comply sel engines) (up to 0.5 l).
tics and individual driving profiles, enable
with VW standards. the extension of the oil change service (Long- Vehicles with diesel particulate filter*
The specifications (VW standards) set out in Life service intervals).
The Maintenance Programme states whether
Safety
the following page should appear on the con- Because this oil is essential for extending the your vehicle is fitted with a diesel particulate
tainer of the service oil; when the container service intervals, it must only be used ob- filter.
displays the specific standards for petrol and serving the following indications:
diesel engines together, it means that the oil Only VW 507 00 engine oil, with reduced ash
can be used for both types of engines. ● Avoid mixing it with oil for fixed service in- formation, may be used in diesel engines
tervals. equipped with particulate filter. Using other »
297
Advice
types of oil will cause a higher soot concen- Checking oil level CAUTION
tration and reduce the life of the DPF. There- – Park the vehicle in a horizontal position.
fore: If the oil level is above the area A do not
– Briefly run the engine at idle speed until start the engine. This could result in damage
● Avoid mixing this oil with other engine oils. the operating temperature is reached and to the engine and catalytic converter. Contact
a Technical Service.
● Only in exceptional circumstances, if the then stop.
engine oil level is too low ››› page 298 and – Wait for about two minutes.
you cannot obtain the oil specified for your
vehicle, you can use a small quantity of oil – Pull out the dipstick. Wipe the dipstick with Topping up engine oil
(once) conforming to the VW 506 00, a clean cloth and insert it again, pushing it
VW 506 01, VW 505 00, VW 505 01 or in as far as it will go.
ACEA B3/ACEA B4 specification. (up to 0.5 l). – Then pull it out once more and check the oil
level ››› Fig. 235. Top up with engine oil if
necessary.
Checking engine oil level
Depending on how you drive and the condi-
tions in which the vehicle is used, oil con-
sumption can be up to 0.5 l/1000 km. Oil
consumption is likely to be higher for the first
5,000 km. For this reason the engine oil level
must be checked at regular intervals, prefera- Fig. 236 In the engine compartment: Engine
bly when filling the tank and before a jour- oil filler cap.
ney.
Read the additional information carefully
WARNING ››› page 54
Any work carried out in the engine compart- Before opening the bonnet, read and observe
Fig. 235 Engine oil dipstick. ment or on the engine must be carried out the warnings ››› in Work in the engine
cautiously. compartment on page 296.
Read the additional information carefully ● When working in the engine compartment,
››› page 54 always observe the safety warnings The position of the oil filler opening is shown
››› page 295. in the corresponding engine compartment il-
The engine oil dipstick indicates the level of lustration ››› page 295.
the oil.
Engine oil specification ››› page 55.
298
Checking and refilling levels
WARNING We recommend that you have the engine oil For the sake of the environment
Technical data
changed by a Technical Service.
Oil is highly inflammable! Ensure that no oil ● Because of disposal problems and the spe-
comes into contact with hot engine compo- The oil change intervals are shown in the cial tools and specialist knowledge required,
nents when topping up. Maintenance Programme. we recommend that you have the engine oil
and filter changed by a Technical Service.
CAUTION WARNING ● Never pour oil down drains or into the
Only change the engine oil yourself if you ground.
If the oil level is above the area A do not
start the engine. This could result in damage have the specialist knowledge required! ● Use a suitable container when draining the
Advice
to the engine and catalytic converter. Contact ● Before opening the bonnet, read and ob- used oil. It must be large enough to hold all
a specialised workshop. serve the warnings ››› page 295. the engine oil.
● Wait for the engine to cool down. Hot oil
For the sake of the environment may cause burn injuries.
Operation
Otherwise oil can be drawn in through the
crankcase breather and escape into the at- ● When removing the oil drain plug with your Topping up coolant
mosphere via the exhaust system. fingers, keep your arm horizontal to help pre-
vent oil from running down your arm. Read the additional information carefully
Note
● Wash your skin thoroughly if it comes into ››› page 55
contact with engine oil.
Before a long trip, we recommend finding an Top up coolant when the level is below the
Emergencies
● Engine oil is poisonous! Used oil must be
engine oil that conforms to the correspond- MIN (minimum) mark.
stored in a safe place out of the reach of chil-
ing VW specifications and recommend keep-
dren.
ing it in the vehicle. This way, the correct en- Checking coolant level
gine oil will always be available for a top-up if
– Park the vehicle in a horizontal position.
needed. CAUTION
No additives should be used with engine oil. – Switch the ignition off.
This could result in engine damage. Any dam- – Read off the coolant level on coolant ex-
Safety
Changing engine oil age caused by the use of such additives pansion tank. When the engine is cold, the
would not be covered by the factory warranty. coolant level should be between the marks.
Read the additional information carefully When the engine is hot, it may be slightly
››› page 54. above the upper mark. »
The engine oil must be changed at the inter-
vals given in the service schedule.
299
Advice
300
Checking and refilling levels
However, if the brake fluid level goes down Windscreen washer reservoir proportion of mixture in the washer fluid
Technical data
noticeably in a short time, or drops below the tank.
MIN mark, there may be a leak in the brake
Checking and topping up the wind-
system. Seek specialist assistance. A warn- Capacity
ing light on the instrument panel display screen washer reservoir
The reservoir holds approximately 3 litres in
monitors the brake fluid level ››› page 116.
Read the additional information carefully versions without headlight washer and 5 li-
In right-hand drive vehicles the brake fluid ››› page 56 tres in versions with headlight washer.
reservoir is on the other side of the engine
Check the water level in the windscreen
WARNING
Advice
compartment.
washer reservoir regularly and top up as re-
quired. If the water from the windscreen washer does
Changing brake fluid not contain enough anti-freeze, it may freeze
The container for the windscreen washer con- on the windscreen and rear window, reducing
The regular intervals at which the brake fluid
tains the cleaning fluid for the windscreen, forward and rear visibility.
should be replaced are listed in the Mainte-
the rear window and the headlight washer ● In winter, ensure the windscreen washer
nance Programme. We recommend you have
Operation
system*. contains enough anti-freeze.
it replaced at a SEAT Official Service, during
an Inspection Service. ● Open the bonnet ››› page 295. ● In cold conditions, you should not use the
windscreen wiper system unless you have
● The windscreen washer reservoir is marked
WARNING warmed the windscreen with the ventilation
with the symbol on the cap. system. The antifreeze could freeze on the
● Brake fluid should be stored in the closed
● Check there is enough windscreen water in windscreen and reduce visibility.
original container in a safe place out of reach
Emergencies
of children. Risk of poisoning! the reservoir.
● If the brake fluid is left in the system for WARNING
Recommended windscreen wipers
too long and the brakes are subjected to Never mix an unsuitable antifreeze or other
heavy use, vapour bubbles may form in the ● For the hottest seasons we recommend similar additives with the windscreen washer
brake system. This would seriously affect the summer G 052 184 A1 for clear glass. Propor- water. A greasy layer may be formed on the
efficiency of the brakes and the safety of the tions of the mixture in the washer fluid tank: windscreen which will impair visibility.
vehicle. This may cause an accident. 1:100 (1 part concentrate per 100 parts wa- ● Use clean water with a window cleaner rec-
Safety
ter). ommended by SEAT.
CAUTION ● All year round, G 052 164 A2 for clear ● If necessary, add a suitable antifreeze to
Brake fluid should not come into contact with glass. Approximate proportion of the winter the water in the reservoir. »
the vehicle paintwork, as it is abrasive. mixture, up to -18°C (0°F): 1:2 (1 part con-
centrate per 2 parts water); otherwise, a 1:4
301
Advice
Nevertheless, check the terminals are clean Some functions, such as the interior lights, or
the remote door opening, may be temporarily
Fires, sparks, open flames and smoking are pro-
and have the correct tightening torque, espe- hibited.
cially in summer and winter. disabled to prevent the battery from running
flat. These functions will come back on as The battery should only be charged in a well-ven-
tilated zone. Risk of explosion!
Disconnecting the battery soon as the ignition is switched on and the
engine started. Keep children away from acid and batteries!
The battery should only be disconnected in
exceptional cases. When the battery is dis-
302
Checking and refilling levels
Technical data
warnings for handling a vehicle battery on
● When repairing or working on the electrical Never charge a battery that has frozen: re-
page 303 and ››› .
system, proceed as follows: place battery! Failure to do so may lead to an
– 1. Remove the key from the ignition. The – Switch off all electrical devices. Remove the explosion.
negative cable on the battery must be ignition key.
disconnected. – Raise the bonnet ››› page 296. Note
– 2. When the repair is finished, reconnect
– Open the battery cover. Use only the terminals in the engine compart-
the negative pole of the battery. ment to charge the battery.
Advice
● Switch off all electrical devices before re- – Connect the charger clamps as described
connecting the battery. Reconnect first the to the positive pole of the battery (+) and
positive cable and then the negative cable. exclusively to an earth on the bodywork
Never reverse the polarity of the connections. (–). Replacing the battery
This could cause an electrical fire.
– Only use a charger which is compatible for The new battery should have the same speci-
● Ensure that the vent hose is always connec-
Operation
use with 12 V nominal voltage batteries. fications (amperage, load and voltage) as the
ted to the battery.
The charge must not exceed a voltage of 15 used battery.
● Never use damaged batteries. This could
V.
cause an explosion! Replace a damaged bat- Your vehicle is equipped with an intelligent
tery immediately. – Now connect the battery charger to the power management system to control the
power socket and switch on. distribution of electrical energy ››› page 288.
The power management function ensures
Emergencies
CAUTION – After charging the battery: switch off the
that the battery is charged much more effi-
● Never disconnect the battery if the ignition battery charger and disconnect the power
ciently than on vehicles without a power
is switched on or if the engine is running. socket cable.
management system. To maintain this func-
This could damage the electrical system or – Finally disconnect the charger cables from tion after replacing the battery, we recom-
electronic components. the battery. mend that the replacement battery used is of
– Replace the battery cover correctly. the same make and type as the original fitted
battery. To make proper use of the power
Charging the battery – Close the bonnet ››› page 296. management function after the battery has
Safety
been changed, have the battery coded to the
Terminals for charging the battery are fitted Important: Before you charge the battery
power management mode at a specialised
in the engine compartment. make sure you read the manufacturer's in- »
workshop.
structions for using the battery charger.
303
Advice
Tyre useful life ● In vehicles with a tyre pressure indicator, flated to the highest pressure required for the
Technical data
save the modified pressure of tyres road wheels.
››› page 308, ››› page 305. In the case of a minimised temporary spare
● Avoid fast cornering and hard acceleration. wheel (125/70 R18) inflate to a pressure of
● Inspect the tyres for irregular wear from 4.2 bar as indicated on the tyre pressure la-
time to time. bel ››› Fig. 237.
Advice
Fast cornering, heavy acceleration and hard
braking (squealing tyres) all increase tyre
Tyre pressure
wear.
The tyre inflation pressures are listed on a
sticker on the rear of the front left door frame Wheel balance
››› Fig. 237.
The wheels on new vehicles are balanced.
Operation
Insufficient or excessive pressure greatly re- However, certain circumstances may lead to
duces the useful life of the tyres and adverse- imbalance (run-out), which is detected as vi-
ly affects vehicle performance and ride. Cor- brations in the steering wheel.
rect inflation pressures are very important,
Fig. 237 Location of the tyre pressure sticker. especially at high speeds. Unbalanced wheels should be rebalanced, as
they otherwise cause excessive wear on
Emergencies
Correct inflation pressures and sensible driv- Depending on the vehicle, tyre pressure can steering, suspension and tyres. A wheel must
ing habits will increase the useful life of your be adjusted to medium load to improve driv- also be rebalanced when a new tyre is fitted
tyres. ing comfort (tyre pressure ). When driving or if a tyre is repaired.
with comfort tyre pressure fuel consumption
● Check tyre pressure at least once a month, may increase slightly. Incorrect wheel alignment
and also prior to any long trip.
The tyre pressure must be adjusted according Incorrect running gear alignment causes ex-
● The tyre pressure should only be checked to the load the vehicle is carrying. If the vehi- cessive tyre wear, impairing the safety of the
when the tyres are cold. Do not reduce the
Safety
cle is going to carry the maximum load, the vehicle. If you notice excessive tyre wear, you
pressure of warm tyres. tyre pressure should be increased to the max- should check wheel alignment at a SEAT Offi-
● Adjust tyre pressure to the load being car- imum value indicated on the sticker cial Service. »
ried by the vehicle. ››› Fig. 237.
Do not forget the spare wheel when checking
the tyre pressures: Keep this spare wheel in-
305
Advice
306
Wheels
– If you wish to fit the vehicle with rims or 95 Load rating code decide to fit a different type of tyre, you must
Technical data
tyres different to those installed in manu- obtain the appropriate manufacturer's certif-
facture, it is advisable to consult a SEAT Of- V Speed index icate from the tyre retailer to confirm that
ficial Service before purchasing them. the tyres are suitable for your vehicle. Keep
The manufacturing date is also indicated on this certificate in a safe place.
The tyres and wheel rims are an essential the tyre sidewall (possibly only on the inner
part of the vehicle's design. The tyres and part): Your SEAT Official Service will be able to ad-
rims approved by SEAT are specially matched vise you on which tyres may be fitted to your
DOT ... 2212 ... vehicle.
to the characteristics of the vehicle and make
Advice
a major contribution to good roadholding it means, for example, that the tyre was man- It is best to have all servicing of wheels and
and safe handling ››› . ufactured in the 22nd week of 2012. tyres performed by a specialised workshop.
The sizes of the rims and tyres approved for But note that with some types of tyre, the ac- They are familiar with the procedure and
your vehicle are listed in the vehicle docu- tual tyre size can differ from the nominal size have the necessary special tools and spare
mentation (e.g. EC Certificate of Conformity or marked on the tyre (for instance 215/60 R16 parts as well as the proper facilities for dis-
COC document1)). The vehicle documentation 95 V), and there may be significant differen- posing of the old tyres respecting the envi-
Operation
varies depending on the country of resi- ces in the contours of the tyres, even though ronment.
dence. the tyres are marked with the same nominal
size. When replacing the tyres, it is therefore WARNING
A knowledge of tyre designations makes it
important to make sure that the actual size ● It is very important to ensure that the tyres
easier to choose the correct tyres. The follow-
of the new tyres does not exceed the dimen- you have chosen have adequate clearance.
ing wording can be read on the sides of the
sions of the factory-approved makes of tyre. When selecting replacement tyres, do not re-
Emergencies
tyre:
ly entirely on the nominal tyre size marked on
Failure to observe this requirement can af- the tyre, since the effective tyre size can dif-
215/60 R16 95V
fect the clearance needed for the tyres. If the fer significantly depending on the manufac-
This contains the following information: tyres rub against the bodywork, in certain turer. Inadequate tyre clearance can result in
circumstances the tyres, running gear or damage to the tyres or the vehicle, causing a
215 Tyre width in mm bodywork and pipes may be damaged, and serious safety risk. Risk of accident! It may
vehicle safety could be severely impaired also invalidate the vehicle's registration for
60 Height/width ratio in %
››› . use on public roads. »
Safety
R Tyre construction: Radial
If you use tyres that are approved by SEAT
16 Rim diameter in inches you can be sure that the actual tyre dimen-
sions will be correct for your vehicle. If you
● Avoid running the vehicle on tyres that are the right length and correctly shaped bolt ● Regularly check your tyres for damage and
more than 6 years old. If you have no alterna- heads. This ensures that wheels are fitted se- wear.
tive, you should drive slowly and with extra curely and that the brake system functions ● Never exceed the maximum permitted
care at all times. correctly. speed or loads specified for the type of tyre
● If wheel trims are fitted after the car is pur- The wheel bolts must be clean and turn easi- fitted on your vehicle.
chased, ensure that there is an adequate flow ly.
of air for cooling the brake system.
A special adapter is required to turn the anti- For the sake of the environment
theft wheel bolts* ››› page 62. Under-inflated tyres lead to increased fuel
For the sake of the environment
consumption and tyre wear.
Old tyres must be disposed of according to
the laws in the country concerned.
Tyre monitoring systems Note
● Driving for the first time with new tyres at a
Note
Introduction high speed can cause them to slightly ex-
● A SEAT Service Centre should be consulted pand, which could then produce an air pres-
to find out whether wheels or tyres of differ- sure warning.
WARNING
ent sizes to those originally fitted by SEAT ● Only replace used tyres with those author-
can be fitted, and to find out about the com- Unsuitable handling of the wheels and tyres ised by SEAT for the corresponding type vehi-
binations allowed between the front axle may lead to sudden tyre pressure losses, to cle.
(axle 1) and the rear axle (axle 2). tread separation or even to a blow-out.
● Do not only rely on the tyre monitoring sys-
● Never mount used tyres if you are not sure ● Check tyre pressures regularly and ensure tem. Regularly check your tyres to ensure
of their “previous history”. they are maintained at the pressures indica- that the tyre pressure is correct and that the
● For technical reasons, it is not generally ted. Tyre pressure that is too low could cause tyres are not damaged due to puncture, cuts,
possible to use the wheels from other vehi- overheating, resulting in tread detachment or tears and impacts/dents. Remove objects
cles. In some cases, this may also be true for even burst tyres. from the tyres only when they have not
the same model of wheel. ● Tyre pressure should be that indicated on pierced the tyres.
the label when the tyres are cold at all times
››› page 316.
Wheel bolts ● Regularly check the cold inflation pressure
of the tyres. If necessary, change the tyre
The wheel bolts are matched to the rims. pressure of the vehicle tyres while they are
When installing different wheels (for instance cold.
alloy wheels or wheels with winter tyres) it is
important to use the correct wheel bolts with
308
Wheels
Tyre monitoring control lamp control of the vehicle and a serious or fatal ● Tyre pressures which are too high or too
Technical data
accident. low reduce the useful life of the tyre, affect-
If a light appears ● If the warning lamp lights up, stop im- ing vehicle performance.
The pressure in one or more tyres has mediately and check the tyres. ● If a tyre has not been punctured and it does
clearly reduced in comparison to the ● If the tyres are inflated at different pres- not have to be changed immediately, drive to
tyre pressure set by the driver or the sures or if a tyre pressure is too low, this will the nearest specialised workshop at a moder-
increase tyre wear, negatively affecting vehi- ate speed and have the tyre checked and in-
tyre has structural damage. flated to the correct pressure.
cle stability and increasing braking distan-
Additionally, an audible warning can be heard and a text ces.
Advice
message can be seen on the instrument panel display. ● If tyres are inflated at different pressures or WARNING
Stop! Reduce speed immediately! Stop the vehicle
a tyre pressure is too low, a tyre may be dam- Observe the safety warnings ››› in Warning
safely as soon as possible. Avoid sudden manoeuvres
and braking! Check all tyres and pressures. Replace any aged and burst resulting in a loss of control and control lamps on page 117.
damaged tyres. of the vehicle.
● The driver is responsible for ensuring that
Note
Operation
If flashing all of the vehicle tyres are correctly inflated
to the right pressure. The recommended tyre ● If excessively low tyre pressure is detected
System malfunction pressure is indicated on the label with the ignition on, an audible warning will
››› page 316. sound. In the event that there is a fault in the
The control lamp flashes for approximately one minute ● The tyre monitoring system can only oper- system, an audible warning will sound.
and then lights up permanently.
ate correctly if all of the tyres are inflated to ● Driving on dirt tracks for a long period of
If tyre pressure is correct, switch the ignition off and on
Emergencies
again. If the control lamp remains lit up, the tyre moni- the correct pressure when cold. time or driving in a sporty style can tempora-
toring indicator can be calibrated. Have the system ● Driving with tyres at the wrong pressure rily deactivate the TPMS. The control lamp
checked by a specialised workshop. can damage them and result in an accident. shows a fault, but disappears when road con-
Ensure that the tyre pressures of all the tyres ditions or the driving style change.
Several warning and control lamps light up correspond to the vehicle load.
for a few seconds when the ignition is switch- ● Before starting a journey, always inflate
ed on while the function is verified. They will tyres to the correct pressure.
switch off after a few seconds. ● Tyres with insufficient pressure are subjec-
Safety
ted to more flexing. Due to this, the tyre
WARNING could become excessively hot, causing tread
When the tyres are inflated at different pres- separation and also tyre blow-out.
sures or at a pressure that is too low then a ● With an overloaded vehicle at high speed,
tyre may be damaged resulting in a loss of the tyres can overheat and burst resulting in
a loss of vehicle control.
309
Advice
Tyre monitoring indicator Wheel tread change cator must be recalibrated. Do the same, for
The wheel tread changes when: example, when the front and rear wheels are
swapped.
● Tyre pressure is manually changed
● Switch the ignition on.
● Tyre pressure is insufficient
● Store the new tyre pressure in the Easy
● Tyre structure is damaged
Connect1) system with the button and the
● The vehicle is unbalanced because of a SETTINGS function button ››› page 31.
load ● In vehicles without radio: press and hold
● The wheels on an axle are subject to a down the button with the ignition on,
heavier load (e.g. with a heavy load). until an acoustic signal is heard.
● The vehicle is fitted with snow chains When driving, the system self-calibrates the
Fig. 240 Instrument panel: warning of loss of
● The temporary spare wheel is fitted tyre pressure provided by the driver and the
tyre pressure.
● The wheel on one axle is changed wheels fitted. After a long journey with varied
speeds the programmed values are collected
The tyre monitor indicator compares wheel
There may be a delay in the reaction of the and monitored.
revolutions and, with this information, the
tread of each wheel using the ABS sensors. If tyre monitoring indicator or it may not in- With the wheels under very heavy loads, the
the rolling circumference of one or more dicate anything under certain circumstances tyre pressure must be increased to the total
wheels has changed, the tyre monitoring in- (e.g. sporty driving, snow-covered or un- recommended tyre pressure before the cali-
dicator will indicate this on the instrument paved roads, or when driving with snow bration ››› page 316.
panel through a warning lamp and a warning chains).
to the driver ››› Fig. 240. When only one spe- Note
cific tyre is affected, its position within the ● The tyre monitoring indicator does not
vehicle will be indicated. Calibrating the tyre monitoring indica- function when there is a fault in the ESC or
tor ABS ››› page 184.
Loss of pressure: Check left
tyre pressure!
After changing the tyre pressure or replacing
one or more wheels, the tyre monitoring indi-
● An erroneous indication may be given when reason, do not use a temporary spare wheel ● Avoid heavy acceleration, hard braking and
Technical data
snow chains are in use because they increase from a different type of vehicle. fast cornering: risk of accident!
the tread of the wheel. ● Never use more than one temporary spare
Removing the temporary spare wheel wheel at the same time, risk of accident.
– Lift and hold up the floor panel to remove ● No other type of tyre (normal summer or
the temporary spare wheel. winter tyre) may be fitted on the compact
Temporary spare wheel temporary spare wheel rim.
– Turn the thumb wheel anti-clockwise
››› Fig. 241. ● If you are driving using the spare wheel,
General information
Advice
the ACC system could automatically switch
– Take out the temporary spare wheel. off during the journey. Switch off the system
when starting off.
Chains
For technical reasons, snow chains must not
be used on the temporary spare wheel. Extraction of the spare wheel in vehi-
Operation
If you have a puncture on one of the front cles with SEAT SOUND 10 speakers
wheels when using snow chains, fit the tem- (with subwoofer)*
porary spare wheel in place of one of the rear
wheels. Fit the snow chains on the rear wheel
that you have removed and replace the punc-
tured front wheel with this wheel.
Emergencies
Fig. 241 Compact temporary spare wheel: WARNING
raised floor panel. ● After fitting the temporary spare wheel,
check the tyre pressures as soon as possible.
The temporary spare wheel has been de- Failure to do so may cause an accident. The
signed to be used for short periods of time. tyre pressure is listed on the back of the left
Have the tyres checked and replaced as soon front door frame ››› Fig. 237.
Safety
as possible at a SEAT Official Service or at a ● Do not drive at over 80 km/h (50 mph)
specialised workshop. when the temporary spare wheel is fitted on
Please note the following restrictions when the vehicle: risk of accident! Fig. 242 In the luggage compartment: re-
using the compact temporary spare wheel. ● Never travel more than 200 km using a tem- move the subwoofer. »
The compact temporary spare wheel is de- porary spare wheel.
signed specifically for this model. For this
311
Advice
To remove the spare wheel, you must first re- – Only use winter tyres that are approved for Winter tyres lose a great deal of their proper-
move the subwoofer. your vehicle. ties when the tread is worn down to a depth
of 4 mm.
● Lift and secure the luggage compartment – Please note that the maximum permissible
floor as described in ››› page 164. speed for winter tyres may be lower than The performance of winter tyres is also se-
for summer tyres. verely impaired by ageing, even if the tread is
● Disconnect the subwoofer ››› Fig. 242 1
still much deeper than 4 mm.
speaker cable. – Also note that winter tyres are no longer ef-
● Turn the securing wheel in an anti-clock- fective when the tread is worn down. Winter tyres are subject to the following max-
wise direction ››› Fig. 242 2 . imum speed limits according to speed rating
– After fitting the wheels you must always
code letter: ›››
● Remove the subwoofer speaker and the check the tyre pressures. When doing so,
spare wheel. take into account the correct tyre pressures
Speed rating
● When re-mounting the spare tyre, place the
listed on the rear of the front left door
code letter Maximum speed limit
frame ››› page 305.
subwoofer on the base of the wheel rim with ››› page 306
care. When doing so, the tip of the “FRONT” In winter road conditions winter tyres will
arrow on the subwoofer should point for- Q 160 km/h (100 mph)
considerably improve vehicle handling. The
ward. design of summer tyres (width, rubber com- S 180 km/h (112 mph)
● Reconnect the speaker cable and firmly ro- pound, tread pattern) gives less grip on ice
T 190 km/h (118 mph)
tate the securing wheel clockwise so that the and snow. This applies particularly to vehi-
subwoofer system and wheel are firmly in cles equipped with wide section tyres or with H 210 km/h (130 mph)
place. high speed tyres (code letters H, V or Y on
the sidewall). 240 km/h (149 mph) (please note
V
relevant restrictions)
Only use winter tyres of the correct type ap-
W 270 km/h (168 mph)
Winter service proved for your vehicle. The sizes of these
tyres are specified in the vehicle's docu- Y 300 km/h (186 mph)
ments (e.g. EC Certificate of Conformity or
Winter tyres
COC1)). The vehicle documentation varies de- Vehicles capable of exceeding these speeds
– Winter tyres must be fitted on all four pending on the country of residence. See al- must have an appropriate sticker attached so
wheels. so ››› page 306. that it is visible to the driver. Suitable stickers
are available from the SEAT Official Service
Technical data
regulations to this effect in your country.
“All-weather” tyres can also be used instead
of winter tyres.
Using winter tyres with V-rating
Please note that the generally applicable
240 km/h (149 mph) speed for winter tyres
with the letter V is subject to technical re-
Advice
strictions; the maximum permissible speed
for your vehicle may be significantly lower.
The maximum speed limit for these tyres de-
pends directly on the maximum axle weights
for your car and on the listed weight rating of
Operation
the tyres being used.
It is best to contact a SEAT Official Service to
check the maximum speed which is permissi-
ble for the V-rated tyres fitted on your car on
the basis of this information.
Emergencies
WARNING
Exceeding the maximum speed permitted for
the winter tyres fitted on your car can cause
tyre failure, resulting in a loss of control of
the vehicle – risk of accident.
Safety
Summer tyres should be fitted again as soon
as possible after the winter period; they give
better handling on roads which are free of
snow and ice. Summer tyres perform with
less rolling noise, tyre wear and – most im-
portant – reduce fuel consumption.
313
Technical data
Type plate
The type plate is located on the right side
door pillar. Vehicles for certain export coun-
tries do not have a type plate.
Technical data
The vehicle data sticker is under the carpet tion
trim in the luggage compartment, in the Kerb weight refers to the basic model with a
spare wheel well. A sticker with the vehicle fuel tank filled to 90% capacity and without
data is attached to the inside cover of the
Fuel consumption optional extras. The figure quoted includes
Maintenance Programme. 75 kg to allow for the weight of the driver.
Approved consumption values are derived
The following information is provided on the from measurements performed or supervised Special versions, optional equipment fittings
vehicle data sticker: ››› Fig. 243 by certified EU laboratories, according to the or retro-fitting accessories will increase the
weight of the vehicle ››› .
Advice
legislation in force at the time (for more infor-
1 Vehicle identification number (chassis mation, see the Publications Office of the Eu-
number) ropean Union on the EUR-Lex website: © Eu- WARNING
2 Vehicle type, model, capacity, engine ropean Union, http://eur-lex.europa.eu/) and ● Please note that the centre of gravity may
type, finish, engine power and gearbox apply to the specified vehicle characteristics. shift when transporting heavy objects; this
type may affect vehicle handling and lead to an ac-
The values relating to fuel consumption and
Operation
cident. Always adjust your speed and driving
3 Engine code, gearbox code, external CO2 emissions can be found in the documen- style to suit road conditions and require-
paint code and internal equipment code tation provided to the purchaser of the vehi- ments.
4 Optional extras and PR numbers cle at the time of purchase. ● Never exceed the gross axle weight rating
Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions depend or the gross vehicle weight rating. If the per-
Identifying letters on the equipment/features of each individual missible axle load or the permissible total
Emergencies
vehicle, as well as on the driving style, road weight is exceeded, the driving characteris-
The identifying letters of the engine can be
conditions, traffic conditions, environmental tics of the vehicle may change, which could
viewed on the instrument panel when the en-
lead to accidents, injuries and damage to the
gine is switched off and the ignition is on. conditions, load or number of passengers.
vehicle.
● Hold down the 0.0/SET 4 ››› Fig. 117 but- Note
ton for more than 15 seconds.
In practice, and considering all the factors
mentioned here, consumption values can dif-
Safety
fer from those calculated in the current Euro-
pean regulations.
315
Technical data
Engine data
Technical data
Petrol engine 1.0 85 kW (115 PS)
Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) Fuel
85 (115)/5,000-5,500 200/2,000-3,500 3/999 Super 95 RON/Normal 91 RONa)
a) Slight power loss.
Advice
Outputs and weights
Top speed (km/h) 183 (5)
Operation
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 11.0
Emergencies
Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 940
Safety
317
Technical data
Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) Fuel
110 (150)/5,000-6,000 250/1,500-3,500 4/1,395 Super 95 RON/Normal 91 RONa)
a) Slight power loss.
Outputs and weights 2WD Manual 2WD Automatic 4WD Manual 4WD Automatic
Top speed (km/h) 201 (5) 198 (6) 192 (5) 189 (5)
Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,359 1,375 1,460 1,476
Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 970 990 1,000 1,010
Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 980 980 1,050 1,050
Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 670 680 730 730
Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% (kg) 1,850 1,800 1,950 1,950
Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% (kg) 1,800 1,600 1,900 1,900
318
Technical specifications
Technical data
Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) Fuel
140 (190)/4,200-6,000 320/1,450-4,200 4/1,984 Super 95 RON/Normal 91 RONa)
a) Slight power loss.
Advice
Top speed (km/h) 212(5)
Operation
Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,536
Emergencies
Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 750
Safety
319
Technical data
Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) Fuel
Diesel according to standard EN 590, min.
85 (115)/3,250-4,000 250/1,500-3,250 4/1,598
51 CZ
320
Technical specifications
Technical data
Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) Fuel
Diesel according to standard EN 590, min.
105 (143)/3,500-4,000 320/1,750-3,000 4/1,968
51 CZ
Advice
Top speed (km/h) 197
Operation
Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,435
Emergencies
Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 710
Safety
321
Technical data
Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) Fuel
Diesel according to standard EN 590, min.
110 (150)/3,500-4,000 340/1,750-3,000 4/1,968
51 CZ
Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% (kg) 1,900 1,900 2,000
a) Data not available as this edition goes to print.
322
Technical specifications
Technical data
Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) Fuel
Diesel according to standard EN 590, min.
140 (190)/3,500-4,000 400/1,750-3,250 4/1,968
51 CZ
Advice
Top speed (km/h) 212 (6)
Operation
Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,589
Emergencies
Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 750
Safety
323
Technical data
Dimensions
324
Technical specifications
Technical data
A Front projection (mm) 868 868
Advice
F Backa) track (mm) 1,541 1,544
1,601b) 1,611b)
H Height at kerb weight (mm)
1,615c) 1,625c)
Operation
I Ground clearance between the axles (mm) 176 189
J Front projection angle limited by the bumper maximum 19.4° maximum 20.6°
K Rear projection angle limited by the bumper maximum 27.9° maximum 25.5°
Emergencies
a) This data will change depending on the type of wheel rim.
b) Distance to the roof.
c) Dimension to the roof bars.
Safety
325
Index
Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Blind spot detector (BSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Central locking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
backup programme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 anti-theft alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
downhill speed control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 driving situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 central locking switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 indication in the external rear view mirror . . . 233 electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
kick-down feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
launch control programme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 manual locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
manual release of selector lever . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
safety interlock for ignition key . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15, 295 remote control key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
selector lever lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 opening the bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 selective unlocking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
selector lever positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 sliding/tilting sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
steering wheel with gearshift paddles . . . . . . 190 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Central wheel trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
tiptronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188, 190 brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 Centre console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 brake servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Cetane number (diesel fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
AUX-IN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 electronic parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Changing
Auxiliary heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 emergency braking function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
activating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 new brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Changing a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
electric consumers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Braking dipped beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
operating instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 front assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 BSD main beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 see Blind spot detector (BSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 number plate light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
remote control range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 rear bulb in the side panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
special features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 C rear light in the rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Camera turn signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
things to note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 cleanliness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 subsequent work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Lane Assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 Changing gear
B Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 engaging gears (manual gearbox) . . . . . . . . . 187
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 AdBlue tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 Changing settings
replacement in the remote control (auxiliary fuel tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 CAR menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
heater) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 windscreen washer water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 Changing the blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Before starting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Car-care products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 Changing the wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Belt tightening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Charging the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Bench seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Checking levels
Bicycle rack CCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
fitting on the retractable tow hitch . . . . . . . . . 271 CD-ROM player (navigation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Child-proof locking
maximum load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Biodiesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
328
Index
334
Index
Tightening torques of wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . 316 towing not allowed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 technical requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Tiptronic (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . . . . . 188, 190 with towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 tow rope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269, 272
Top speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Towline anchorages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65, 93 trailer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Top Tether system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24, 27 Tow rope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269, 272 unlocking the electrical unlocking tow hitch . 270
Top View Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 Traffic Jam Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 vertical load on the coupling . . . . . . . . . 267, 273
see Top View Camera system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 malfunctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Trailer mode
Top View Camera system situations in which Traffic Jam Assist must be also see towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
instructions for use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 switched off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 see Driving with a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Trailer weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Transporting children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Traffic sign detection system . . . . . . . . . . . 240, 241 Transporting items
Tow-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 indication on display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Tow-starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 limited operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 loading the trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 net bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Tow hitch speed warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 retaining hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165, 166
electrical unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 windscreen damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 tailboard for transporting long items . . . . . . . 161
Towing Traffic signs trailer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
blind spot detector (BSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 indication on display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 Trim parts: cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Trims
Towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 adjusting the headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
also see Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 anti-theft alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 Turn signal convenience function . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 anti-theft system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Turn signal lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
electrical unlocking tow hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Tyre mobility set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
fitting a bicycle rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 hooking up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 inflating a tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
retrofitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 sealing a tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Towing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65, 96, 97 malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 Tyre Mobility System
automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 maximum trailer weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 see Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274, 316 Tyre monitoring systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
four-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Park Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 tyre monitoring indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
front towing eye . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 Tyre pressure monitoring system . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 power socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Tyre pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
rear towing eye . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 rear LED lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269, 272 Tyre profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96, 98 rear lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269, 272 Tyre repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
tow bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 retrofitting a towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 Tyre repair kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
stabilisation of the towing vehicle and trailer 275 see also Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
337
Index
Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 Vehicle battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56, 302 Lane Assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 assisted starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 charge level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
new tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 connecting and disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
repair kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 disconnect and connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 tyre monitoring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 power management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 Warning symbols
useful life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 see Warning and control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
wear indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 winter conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 Warning triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
with compulsory direction of rotation . . . . . . . . 64 Vehicle care Washing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
with directional tread pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 natural leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Tyre tread depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 windscreen wipers service position . . . . . . . . . 68 special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Tyre wear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Vehicle interior monitoring and anti-tow system 133 Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Wheel balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
U Vehicle seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Unfastening the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 79 Vehicle tool kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61, 93 anti-theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Unlocking and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Ventilation slits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 caps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
by remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Vertical load on the coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 loosening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
with Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Vertical load on the trailer coupling tightening torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
with the central locking switch . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 loading the trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 Wheel cover
Upholstery: cleaning removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
alcantara . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 W Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304, 316
fabrics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 Warning and control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 central wheel trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
USB/AUX-IN Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61, 63, 306
applying the brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210, 220 cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
V ASR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 new wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
audible warning signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
cruise control system (CCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 temporary spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Vehicle
electromechanical steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 Wheel spanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
chassis number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
engine management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Windows
data label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
engine pre-heating/fault system . . . . . . . . . . . 198 electric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 136
identification data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
ESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 removing ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
identification number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
for seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Window wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
raising . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
gear change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Window wiper blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
unlocking and locking the vehicle with Keyless
Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43, 45 Windscreen
instrument panel display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
338
Index
339
About this manual The equipment marked with an aster-
isk* is fitted as standard only in certain
For the sake of the environment
versions, and is only supplied as op- Texts preceded by this symbol contain rele-
This manual contains a description of the vant information concerning environmental
equipment supplied with the vehicle at the tional extras for some versions, or are
protection.
time this manual was published. Some of the only offered in certain countries.
units described herein will not be available ® All registered marks are indicated with
Note
until a later date or are only available in cer- ®. Although the copyright symbol does
tain markets. not appear, it is a copyrighted mark. Texts preceded by this symbol contain additio-
nal information.
Because this is a general manual for the >> The section is continued on the follow-
ATECA, some of the equipment and functions ing page.
that are described in this manual are not in- This manual is divided into six large parts,
cluded in all types or variants of the model; Important warnings on a given page which are:
they may vary or be modified depending on Detailed contents on a given page 1. The essentials
the technical requirements and on the mar- 2. Safety
ket; this is in no way deceptive advertising. General information on a given page
3. Emergencies
The illustrations are intended as a general Emergency information on a given page 4. Operation
guide and may vary from the equipment fitted
in your vehicle in some details. 5. Tips
WARNING
The steering indications (left, right, forward, 6. Technical data
Texts preceded by this symbol contain infor-
reverse) appearing in this manual refer to the mation on safety. They warn you about possi- At the end of this manual, there is a detailed SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to under-
normal driving movements of the vehicle ex- ble dangers of accident or injury. alphabetical index that will help you quickly stand, that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason
cept when otherwise indicated. find the information you require. no right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook.
The audiovisual material only is intended to CAUTION All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error
help users to understand certain car function- or omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print.
Texts with this symbol draw your attention to
alities better. It does not replace the instruc- Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form.
potential sources of damage to your vehicle.
tion manual. Please use the instruction manu-
SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the “Copyright” Act.
al to obtain more comprehensive information
and indications. All rights on changes are reserved.
Ateca Inglés
(05.17)
SEAT recommends SEAT recommends
SEAT GENUINE OIL Castrol EDGE Professional